JP2018000936A - Game board - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game board featuring display means for the game board represented by a pinball game machine (Pachinko game machine), an enclosed type game machine, and a reel game machine (slot machine).SOLUTION: Display means 208L can display a first indication Od1 that may be displayed while extending over a plurality of continuous variation indications of decorative patterns, and a second indication to which the first indication is changed during variations of the decorative patterns. During a period (demonstration display period) in a period when the decorative patterns are stopped, the first indication may be displayed.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 34

Description

  The present invention relates to a game table represented by a ball game machine (pachinko machine), an enclosed game machine, and a spinning machine (slot machine).

  Game consoles such as pachinko machines are equipped with obstacles that change the direction of the fall of the game ball in the game area of the game board, a winning opening, a starting opening, a variable winning opening, etc. where the game ball can win. It is common. When a game ball wins a prize, a privilege is given to the player such as paying out the prize ball (for example, see Patent Document 1).

  Some of these game tables have display means.

JP 2008-200302 A

  However, the conventional game stand has room for improvement in display means.

  An object of the present invention is to provide a game machine having a feature in display means.

The game stand of the present invention that solves the above-described object is as follows.
A gaming machine equipped with a display means,
The display means is means capable of displaying a decorative design,
The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a first display,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a second display,
The first display is a display that may be displayed across a variation display of a plurality of consecutive decorative symbols,
The first display may change to the second display during the decoration pattern change.
The first display may be displayed in a certain period, and
The certain period is a certain period of the period during which the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed.
It is characterized by that.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to realize a game machine having a feature in display means.

It is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the front side (player side). It is the external view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the back side. FIG. 3 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 of the pachinko machine 100 as viewed from the front. The circuit block diagram of a control part is shown. (A) An example of the stop symbol form of the special figure is shown. (B) An example of a decorative design is shown. (C) An example of a usual stop display symbol is shown. (A) is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main control part main process, (b) is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main control part timer interruption process. (A) It is a flowchart of the main process which CPU404 of the 1st sub control part 400 performs. (B) It is a flowchart of the command reception interruption process of the 1st sub control part 400. FIG. (C) It is a flowchart of the timer interruption process of the 1st sub control part 400. FIG. (D) It is a flowchart of the image control process of the 1st sub control part 400. FIG. (A) It is a flowchart of the main process which CPU504 of the 2nd sub control part 500 performs. (B) It is a flowchart of the command reception interruption process of the 2nd sub control part 500. FIG. (C) It is a flowchart of the timer interruption process of the 2nd sub control part 500. FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of button production in steps. It is a figure for demonstrating in detail the operation means provided in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the production in which the operation means in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. It is a flowchart showing the execution timing regarding the production | presentation in which the operation means A was entangled, and the production | presentation in which the operation means B was entangled. It is a flowchart showing the execution timing regarding the production which entangled the operation means. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect of the notice icon increase production applicable to this embodiment in steps. It is a schematic explanatory diagram showing an example of the structure of the effect device 206 in the game board 200 applicable in the present embodiment. It is a figure shown in steps about an example of the hold change notice effect as a prefetch notice effect by the hold icon applicable to the embodiment. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 16 in steps. It is a figure shown in steps about other examples of a reservation change notice effect. It is a figure which shows the modification of the effect shown by FIG. It is a figure which shows another modification of the production | presentation shown by FIG. It is a figure shown in steps about an example of the super reach production applicable to this embodiment. It is a figure shown in steps about other examples of a reservation change notice effect. It is a figure shown in steps about other examples of a reservation change notice effect. It is a figure shown in steps about other examples of a reservation change notice effect. It is a figure shown in steps about other examples of a reservation change notice effect. It is a figure shown in steps about other examples of a reservation change notice effect. It is a figure shown in steps about other examples of a reservation change notice effect. It is a figure shown in steps about other examples of a reservation change notice effect. It is a figure shown in steps about other examples of a reservation change notice effect. It is a figure shown in steps about an example of the symbol fluctuation display applicable to this embodiment. It is a figure shown in steps about another example of the expansion effect of a hold display frame. It is a figure which shows in step-by-step other examples of the notice icon increase effect applicable to the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect of the notice icon digestion effect applicable to this embodiment in steps. It is the figure which showed the example in which an operation means display is displayed ranging over the continuous symbol fluctuation | variation display. It is the figure which showed the example in which the operation means display continued from FIG. 34 in steps. It is the figure which showed the example in which the operation means display following FIG. 35 is displayed in steps. It is a figure which shows in steps the example in which the 1st operation means display Od1 changes to the 2nd operation means display Od2 in the pachinko machine provided with the game board of a structure different from the structure of the game board shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the modification of the example shown in FIG. 37 in steps. It is a figure which shows in steps the example which changes from 1st operation means display Od1 to 3rd operation means display Od3, and also changes from 3rd operation means display Od3 to 2nd operation means display Od2. It is a figure which shows in steps the example which has a period when two types of operation means displays are displayed simultaneously. It is a modification of the example shown in FIG. 39, and is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner an example in which there is a period during which the display imitating the operating means is displayed simultaneously. It is a figure which shows the example in which the operation means display is displayed on each of the 2nd decoration symbol display apparatus 208M and the 3rd decoration symbol display apparatus 208N in steps. It is a figure which shows an example in case an effect differs before and after the change of an operation means display in steps. It is a figure which shows an example in case an effect is the same before and after the change of an operation means display in steps. It is a figure which shows the example which operated the chance button 136 stepwise during execution of the fluctuation | variation display of the 3rd symbol pd3 performed at the timing when the holding | maintenance increased. It is a figure which shows the example in case the operation of a chance button is delayed in the example shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the example which the operation means display after the chance button 136 is operated once disappears in steps. It is a figure which shows the modification of the display method of an operation means display. 1 is a front view of a sealed pachinko machine to which the present invention is applicable. FIG. 4 is an external perspective view of a slot machine to which the present invention can be applied as viewed from the front side (player side).

  Hereinafter, a ball ball game machine (including a sealed type) such as a pachinko machine 100 to which the present invention can be applied will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. Note that the enclosed type here refers to an enclosed type gaming machine that circulates and uses game balls enclosed in the gaming machine.

<Overall configuration>
First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the figure is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the front side (player side).

  As an external structure, the pachinko machine 100 includes an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a door 108 with a ball storage tray, a launching device 110, and a game board 200 (see FIG. 3). . The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation location (island facilities or the like) provided in a gaming machine installation sales shop. The main body 104 is referred to as an inner frame, and is a member that is provided inside the outer frame 102 and serves as a longitudinal rectangular gaming machine base body that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via a hinge portion 112. The main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space inside. In addition, when the main body 104 is opened, an inner frame opening sensor (not shown) that detects the opening of the main body 104 is provided.

  The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104 on the front side of the pachinko machine 100 so as to be openable and closable with a lock function, and is configured in a frame shape so that the inner side of the front frame door 106 can be opened and closed. Is a door member having an opening. The front frame door 106 is provided with a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin at the opening, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached to the front side. Note that the frame lamp 122 is an example of a light emitting means, and in this specification, a lamp whose light source is an LED is also referred to as a lamp, and a lamp that emits light such as a fluorescent lamp or a cold cathode tube is referred to as a lamp. And emits light corresponds to an example of light emitting means.

  A game area 124 (see FIG. 3) is defined by the rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200. In addition, when the front frame door 106 is opened, a door open sensor 609 (see FIG. 4) that detects the opening of the front frame door 106 is provided.

  The front frame door 106 is provided with a transmission unit 190. The transmission unit 190 includes a transmission unit 191 that is different from the transparent plate member 118, and the transmission unit 191 is rotatable in the front-rear direction around a drive shaft (not shown) provided in the lower part. The transmission unit 190 includes a light emitting diode (LED). The transmission part 191 of the transmission part unit 190 shown in FIG. 1 is in the initial position. The transmission unit 191 functions as an operation unit (button) and corresponds to an example of a movable unit.

  The door 108 with a ball storage tray is a door member attached to the lower side of the main body 104 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 so as to have a lock function and be openable and closable. The ball storage tray-equipped door 108 is capable of storing a plurality of game balls (hereinafter simply referred to as “balls”), and an upper plate 126 provided with a passage for guiding the game balls to the launching device 110. A lower plate 128 that stores game balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 126, a ball removal button 130 that discharges the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the lower plate 128 by the player's operation, A ball discharge lever 132 that discharges game balls stored in the lower plate 128 to a game ball collection container (common name, dollar box) by operation, and a game ball guided to the launching device 110 by operation of the player A ball launching handle 134 that is launched into the game area 124 of 200, a chance button 136 that changes the performance mode of various performance devices 206 (see FIG. 3) by a player's operation, and a chance button 136 It provided an opportunity button lamp 138 to the. The chance button 136 is an effect button and corresponds to an example of an operation unit. The chance button 136 is also an example of a movable unit, and the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 1 is in the initial position. As will be described in detail later, the chance button 136 can execute an advance / retreat operation. In addition, a lower pan full sensor (not shown) that detects that the lower pan 128 is full is provided.

  In addition, an operation key unit 181 is provided on the right side of the chance button 136. The operation key unit 181 includes a cross key 181a, an OK button 181b, and a cancel button 181c. A panel display unit 183 is also provided at the upper right of the operation key unit 181.

  The launching device 110 is attached to the lower side of the main body 104, and a launching rod (not shown) that rotates when the ball launching handle 134 is operated by the player, and a launching ball that hits the game ball at the tip of the launching rod (not shown). And a launcher. The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface, and is detachably attached to the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening after the game board 200 is mounted on the main body 104.

  FIG. 2 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 1 viewed from the back side. The upper part of the back surface of the pachinko machine 100 has an opening that opens upward, a ball tank 150 for temporarily storing game balls, and a lower part of the ball tank 150 that is positioned below the ball tank 150. A tank rail 154 is provided for guiding a ball passing through the formed communication hole and dropping to the dispensing device 152 located on the right side of the back surface.

  The payout device 152 is formed of a cylindrical member, and includes a payout motor, a sprocket, and a payout sensor (not shown) inside. The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor. The sprocket that temporarily passes through the tank rail 154 and flows down into the payout device 152 is temporarily retained, and the payout motor is driven to rotate by a predetermined angle. Thus, the temporarily accumulated game balls are sent one by one downward to the payout device 152.

  The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket. When the game ball is passing, either a high signal or a low signal is passed. Either the high signal or the low signal is output to the dispensing control unit 600. Note that the game ball that has passed through the payout sensor passes through the discharge port 152a and reaches the upper plate 126 disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100, and the pachinko machine 100 is configured to play games. Pays out a ball to the person

  On the left side of the payout device 152 in the figure, a main board case 158 that houses the main board 156 that constitutes the main control section 300 that performs control processing for the entire game, and control related to effects based on the processing information generated by the main control section 300 The first sub-board case 162 that houses the first sub-board 160 that constitutes the first sub-control unit 400 that performs processing, and the second sub-board that performs control processing related to effects based on the processing information generated by the first sub-control unit 400. An error release switch that constitutes a second sub-board case 166 that houses the second sub-board 164 that constitutes the control unit 500, a payout control unit 600 that performs control processing related to the payout of game balls, and that releases an error by the operation of a game clerk Discharge board case 172 storing the payout board 170 having 168, launch base constituting the launch control unit 630 that performs control processing relating to the launch of the game ball A launch board case 176 that houses 174, a power control unit 660 that supplies power to various electrical gaming machines, and a power switch 178 that turns the power on and off by the operation of a game store clerk and an RWM clear by being operated when the power is turned on A power board case 184 that houses a power board 182 that includes an RWM clear switch 180 that outputs a signal to the main controller 300, and a CR interface 186 that transmits and receives signals between the payout controller 600 and the card unit are provided. ing.

  FIG. 3 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front.

  The game board 200 shown in FIG. 3 is a so-called right-handed machine game board. In the game board 200, an outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are provided, and a game area 124 in which a game ball can roll is defined. In a generally known right-handed game board, by changing the strength of launching a game ball by a player's operation, a general-purpose starting port 228 and a second special-purpose starting port 232, which will be described later, 1 special drawing start port 230. Specifically, the game ball that rolls in the first area (the left side in the game area) provided with the first special figure starting port 230 is disposed on the game area 124 by arranging the game nail 238 and the like. A game ball that rolls in the second area (the right side in the game area) where the second special figure start port 232 is provided is configured such that it is difficult or impossible to enter the special view start port 232. 1 It is difficult or impossible to enter the special drawing starting port 230. The present invention is not limited to the pachinko machine 100 provided with a right-handed game board, and can be applied to a wide range of pachinko machines equipped with a general game board.

  An effect device 206 is disposed in the approximate center of the game area 124. In the effect device 206, three decorative symbol display devices are arranged side by side. That is, the first decorative symbol display device 208L disposed at the center of the three decorative symbol display devices, the second decorative symbol display device 208M disposed on the left side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the first decoration. The display is performed by the third decorative symbol display device 208N arranged on the right side of the symbol display device 208L. The first decorative symbol display device 208L may be referred to as a main display device, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be referred to as sub-display devices. The length in the width direction of 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N is shorter than the half of the length of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the height is also short. However, the display screens of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are only required to be smaller than the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the length and height in the width direction are shown in FIG. It is not limited to the embodiment. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M shown in FIG. 3 has its right end side portion overlapped with the front side of the left end side portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the third decorative symbol display device shown in FIG. The left end portion of 208N overlaps the front side of the right end portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The position of the second decorative symbol display device 208M shown in FIG. 3 may be the initial position of the second decorative symbol display device 208M. Further, the position of the third decorative symbol display 208N shown in FIG. 3 may be the initial position of the third decorative symbol display device 208N. However, the initial position of the second decorative symbol display device 208M does not partially overlap with the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and is a position deviated from the first decorative symbol display device 208L (first decorative symbol display device 208L). It may be a position separated from the left side toward the left). Also, the initial position of the third decorative symbol display device 208M does not overlap with the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and is a position away from the first decorative symbol display device 208L (on the right side from the first decorative symbol display device 208L). It may be a position distant from each other. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are configured to be slidable in the direction of contacting and separating from each other along the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N can rotate integrally along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L when they are closest to each other. It is configured to be able to. The names of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are not necessarily displayed in a variable manner with respect to each display device. However, it is added here just in case that the interpretation of the display device is not narrowed. Further, a combination of these decorative symbol display devices (first decorative symbol display device 208L, second decorative symbol display device 208M, and third decorative symbol display device 208N) is used as an effect display means, and the effect display means is a decoration symbol. It is also possible to display various fluctuations or to display a plurality of types of effects. Furthermore, there is no limitation on the number of decorative symbol display devices, and the decorative symbol display device may be a pachinko machine having only one, or may be a pachinko machine having only two. It may be a pachinko machine provided with two or more. Further, the positional relationship between the plurality of decorative symbol display devices is not limited to the positional relationship shown in FIG.

  In addition, a transparent light guide plate is arranged on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the player can visually recognize the display state of the first decorative symbol display device 208L through the light guide plate. . The light guide plate has a predetermined lens cut in the transmission region. A light emitter such as an LED is provided at an appropriate position near the side edge of the light guide plate, and light from the light emitter is reflected forward by the lens cut portion, so that the transmission region emits light in a predetermined pattern. It is configured so that it can appear to be. For example, a lens cut having a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image is applied to the light guide plate. Note that the light guide plate is configured such that the thickness of the portion of the region where light is refracted toward the player side is thinner than the thickness of light irradiation. Therefore, the display states of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be easily visible. Further, the light guide plate may be movable. Further, the light guide plate may be provided on the near side of at least one of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

  Below the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to 208M, a normal symbol display device 210, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a normal symbol hold lamp 216, and a first special symbol. A holding lamp 218, a second special symbol holding lamp 220, and a high-probability medium lamp 222 are provided. Hereinafter, the normal symbol may be referred to as “general symbol” and the special symbol may be referred to as “special symbol”. The effect device 206 will be described later.

  The three decorative symbol display devices 208 </ b> L to 208 </ b> M are display devices for performing various displays used for decorative symbols and effects, and here are configured by liquid crystal display devices (Liquid Crystal Display). The display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L can be divided into four display areas: a left symbol display area 208a, a middle symbol display area 208b, a right symbol display area 208c, and an effect display area 208d. The area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c display different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for the effect. Further, the positions and sizes of the display areas 208a, 208b, 208c, and 208d can be freely changed within the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In addition, although the liquid crystal display device is employ | adopted as the 1st decoration symbol display apparatus 208L, even if it is not a liquid crystal display device, it should just be comprised so that a various effect and various game information can be displayed, for example, a dot matrix Other display devices including a display device, a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (ElectroLuminescence) display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be adopted.

  The general map display device 210 is a display device for displaying a general map, and here, it is constituted by a 7-segment LED. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are display devices for displaying a special figure, and here are configured by 7-segment LEDs. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are symbol display means. The decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is a symbol that represents the symbol displayed on the first special symbol display device 212 or the second special symbol display device 214 in an enhanced form. The first decorative symbol display device 208L is also a kind of symbol display means.

  The general figure hold lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of general figure variable games (details will be described later) that are on hold. Here, the general figure variable game is held to a predetermined number (for example, two). Is possible. The first special figure holding lamp 218 and the second special figure holding lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of special figure variable games (details will be described later) that are being held. Here, a predetermined number of special figure variable games are displayed. It is possible to hold up to (for example, four). The high-probability medium lamp 222 is a lamp for indicating that the gaming state is a high probability state in which a big hit is likely to occur or a high probability state, and the gaming state is changed from a low probability state in which a big hit is unlikely to occur. Turns on when switching to the probability state, and turns off when switching from the high probability state to the low probability state.

  In addition, there are predetermined ball entrances, for example, a general prize opening 226, a normal start port 228, a first special view start port 230, a second special view start port 232, around the rendering device 206, A central variable winning opening 234 and a right variable winning opening 235 are provided.

  A plurality of general winning ports 226 are arranged on the game board 200, and when a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects a ball entering the general winning port 226 (when winning the general winning port 226). Then, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The player can freely take out the balls discharged to the upper plate 126. With these configurations, the player can pay out the winning balls to the player based on winning. The ball that has entered the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side. In the following, a ball to be paid out to a player as a consideration for a prize may be referred to as a “prize ball”, and a ball lent to a player may be referred to as a “lending ball”. Sometimes called a “ball (game ball)”.

  The normal start port 228 is configured by a device called a gate or a through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed through a predetermined area of the game area 124. One is arranged. For this reason, the game start ball 228 is expected to enter a game ball by hitting it to the right. Unlike the ball that has entered the general winning opening 226, the ball that has passed through the usual starting port 228 is not discharged to the amusement island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that a ball has passed through the general map starting port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts a general map variable game by the general map display device 210.

  Only one first special figure starting port 230 is arranged at the center of the game board 200. The first special figure starting port 230 is a first starting region where the size of the entrance through which the game ball enters does not change. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the first special figure starting port 230, the payout device 152 shown in FIG. 2 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, three) of balls is used as a prize ball. At the same time, the special figure changing game is started by the first special figure display device 212. The ball that has entered the first special figure starting port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side. The first special figure starting port 230 is one of the starting regions, and corresponds to an example of a fixed starting region in which the size of the first special diagram starting port 230 does not change.

  Only one second special figure start port 232 is disposed below the general view start port 228. That is, the second special figure starting port 232 is provided on the right side of the game board 200, and entering the ball is expected by hitting to the right. In the vicinity of the second special figure starting port 232, a pair of blade members 2321 that can be opened and closed by a solenoid are provided. A combination of the pair of blade members 2321 and the second special figure starting port 232 is provided. It corresponds to a variable starting means and is generally called an electric tulip (electric chew). The pair of blade members 2321 are members that change the difficulty level of winning a prize to the second special figure starting port 232. That is, when the pair of blade members 2321 is closed, it is impossible to enter the second special figure starting port 232, and the mode in which the pair of blade members 2321 is closed is an open / close mode in which winning is difficult. On the other hand, when the universal figure change game is won and the universal figure display device 210 stops and displays the symbol, the pair of blade members 2321 are opened and closed at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times, and the second special figure starting port 232 is opened. The ball can be entered (easy winning state), and the open state in which the pair of blade members 2321 are open is an easy winning state. In other words, the second special figure starting port 232 has either a small size (corresponding to the first size) or a large size (corresponding to the second size) of the entrance (game ball entrance). A variable starting area in which the ease of entering a game ball, which changes from one size to the other, is equivalent to an example of a second starting area. The size of the large size is larger than the size of the entrance of the first special figure starting port 230. In the state where the pair of blade members 2321 are opened, out of the game balls that have entered the game area 124, the second special feature that is the variable start area is more than the game ball that has entered the first special figure start opening 230 that is the fixed start area. There are more game balls entering the starting port 232 in the figure. On the other hand, the size of the small size is smaller than the size of the entrance of the first special figure starting port 230 or smaller than the size of the entrance of the first special diagram starting port 230. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the second special figure starting port 232, the payout device 152 is driven and a predetermined number (for example, four) of balls is discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. At the same time, the special figure variation game by the second special figure display device 214 is started. The ball that has entered the second special figure starting port 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  The pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 is provided with two variable winning openings. A central variable winning opening 234 (corresponding to the first variable winning opening) provided in the center of the game board 200 is disposed below the first special figure starting opening 230. Further, a right variable winning opening 235 (corresponding to a second variable winning opening) provided on the right side of the game board 200 is disposed below the second special figure starting opening 232, and can be entered by hitting right. There is expected. Each of the variable winning openings 234 and 235 includes a winning opening and door members 2341 and 2351 that can open and close the winning opening by a solenoid. The winning opening may be referred to as a big winning opening, and the variable winning openings 234 and 235 may be referred to as attackers. The central variable winning opening 234 is kept closed until the big hit game is started when the big hit is made in the non-electric support state, and when the big hit game is started, the state is changed between the open state and the closed state. repeat. The right variable winning opening 235 is kept closed until the big hit game when the big hit is made in the electric support state, and when the big hit game is started, the state is changed between the open state and the closed state. repeat. In other words, each of the variable winning openings 234 and 235 has a predetermined first opening / closing state (here, the closed state) and a second opening / closing state (here, the opening / closing state) where the winning of the game ball is easier than the first opening / closing state. Is a variable winning means that can change the open / closed state from one to the other, and when the special figure change game is won in the non-electric support state and the first special figure display device 212 stops and displays the jackpot symbol The door member 2341 of the central variable prize opening 234 opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. On the other hand, when the special figure variation game is won in the electric support state and the second special figure display device 214 stops and displays the big hit symbol, the door member 2351 of the right variable prize winning opening 235 is set at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. Open and close with. In any of the variable winning openings 234, 235, the closed state does not necessarily need to be completely closed, and may be in a state where it is impossible or difficult to enter a game ball even if it is slightly opened. . When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the central variable winning port 234 or the right variable winning port 235, the payout device 152 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 15) of balls is used as a winning ball. It discharges to 126. It should be noted that both the ball that has entered the central variable winning opening 234 and the ball that has entered the right variable winning opening 235 are guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  According to the arrangement of the general figure starting port 228, the first special figure starting port 230, the second special figure starting port 232, the central variable winning port 234, and the right variable winning port 235 described above, Strike is an advantage for the player, and in the non-electric support state, a left strike is an advantage for the player.

  Further, a plurality of disc-shaped hitting direction changing members 236 called a windmill and a plurality of game nails 238 are arranged in the vicinity of these winning openings and start openings, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204, An out port 240 is provided for guiding a ball that has not won a prize or starting port to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharging it to the game island side.

  This pachinko machine 100 supplies the ball stored in the upper plate 126 by the player to the launch position of the launch rail, drives the launch motor with strength according to the operation amount of the player's operation handle, and launches 146 Further, the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 are passed by the launcher 148 and driven into the game area 124. Then, the ball that has reached the upper part of the game area 124 falls downward while changing the advancing direction by the hitting direction changing member 236, the game nail 238, etc., and the winning hole (general winning hole 226, central variable winning hole 234, right variable The winning opening 235) or the starting opening (the first special figure starting opening 230, the second special drawing starting opening 232), or without winning any of the winning opening or starting opening, or the ordinary drawing starting opening 228 Just passing through will reach the outlet 240.

<Directing device 206>
Next, the rendering device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. On the front side of the effect device 206, a warp device 242 and a stage 244 are arranged in an area where the game ball can roll. In addition, the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to 208N described above are disposed on the back side of the effect device 206. That is, in the effect device 206, the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to 208N are located behind the warp device 242 and the stage 244.

  The warp device 242 discharges the game balls that have entered the warp inlet 242a provided at the upper left of the effect device 206 to the stage 244 below the front surface of the effect device 206 from the warp outlet 242b.

  The stage 244 can roll a ball discharged from the warp outlet 242b, a ball carried on by a nail of the game board 200, or the like, and the passed ball is a first special figure starting port 230 at the center of the stage 244. A special route 244a is provided to facilitate entry into the golf course.

  In a state where the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are fully opened (fully open state), the player can visually recognize part or all of the display on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N can be stopped at arbitrary positions, for example, which decorative symbol is the decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. It is possible to shield only a part of the decorative design to the extent that the player can identify the game. In addition, when the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are completely closed (fully closed state), the decorative symbols displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c in the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Shield everything. Therefore, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, which are the effect display means, are both the shielding means and the effect moving means of the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

  In addition, above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an Yatsushiro character 224Fa and a general character 224Fb, which are one of the effect movable bodies, are arranged, and each moves in the vertical direction according to the effect contents. It is configured to be able to. In addition, the Yatsushiro character 224Fa and the shogun character 224Fb each have a built-in light emitting means such as a full color LED, and can emit light in various light emission modes according to the contents of the production.

  Note that the above-described chance button 136 capable of executing the advancing / retreating operation and the transmitting portion 191 that can be rotated in the front-rear direction are also a kind of effect moving means.

  Further, as the effect moving means, a family crest member 224E (see FIG. 14 and the like) (not shown) is prepared here. The family crest member 224E is disposed at an initial position below the first decorative symbol display device 208L. When the operation starts, the family crest member 224E rises from the initial position to the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and overlaps the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L from the front side (player side). In the state in which the family crest character 224E is in the initial position, it is more difficult for the player to visually recognize than the state in which it overlaps the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L from the front side. Further, the family crest member 224E includes a light emitting means such as a full color LED, and can emit light in various light emission modes depending on the contents of the production.

<Control unit>
Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. This figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit.

  The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 can be roughly classified into a main control unit 300 that controls the central part of the game and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. A first sub-control unit 400 that controls the second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on a command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400, and a command transmitted by the main control unit 300 The payout control unit 600 that mainly controls the game ball payout, the launch control unit 630 that controls the launch of the game ball, and the power supply control unit 660 that controls the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100 are configured. Yes.

  Here, the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400, and the second sub-control unit 500 are made of different circuit boards, but these three control units (300, 400, 500) are common. The first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 may be composed of one common circuit board different from the circuit board of the main control unit 300. There may be. Therefore, the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400, and the second sub control unit 500 are each controlled by control means (for example, main control means (300), first sub control means (400), second sub control means (500). )), Or a combination of these three control units (300, 400, 500) can be regarded as a control means. A combination of the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 may be regarded as a second control unit.

<Main control unit>
First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, and temporary data. RAM 308 for storing data, I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, counter timer 312 for measuring time and frequency, and WDT 314 for monitoring abnormalities in program processing are mounted. . Note that another storage device may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this is the same for the first sub-control unit 400 described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock.

  The basic circuit 302 includes a random value generation circuit 318 for deriving a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 every time a clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316a is received (this circuit includes two random value generation circuits). And a predetermined ball detection sensor, for example, a sensor that detects a game ball passing through each start port, a winning port, a variable winning port, a door opening of a front frame door opening sensor, an inner frame opening sensor, etc. A sensor circuit 322 for receiving signals output from various sensors 320 including a sensor and a full plate sensor, and outputting a comparison result with an amplification result and a reference voltage to the random value generation circuit 318 and the basic circuit 302; A drive circuit 324 for performing display control of a symbol display device such as the first special symbol display device 212 or the second special symbol display device 214, and a predetermined symbol display device such as the universal symbol display device 21. Drive circuit 326 for performing display control and various status display units 328 (for example, general map hold lamp 216, first special figure hold lamp 218, second special figure hold lamp 220, high accuracy medium lamp 222, etc.) A drive circuit 330 for performing display control, a predetermined movable member, for example, a blade member 2321 of the second special figure starting port 232, a door member 2341 of the central variable winning port 234, a door member 2351 of the right variable winning port 235, and the like. A drive circuit 334 for controlling various solenoids 332 that are opened and closed is connected.

  The random value generation circuit 318 generates a random value used in the basic circuit 302. Random number generation in the random value generation circuit 318 can be broadly divided into two types of methods: counter mode and random number mode. In the counter mode, a numerical value that is counted up (down) at a predetermined time interval is acquired, and the numerical value is derived as a random number. There are two more methods in the random number mode. The first method in the random number mode performs an operation using a predetermined function (for example, a modulus function) using a seed of random numbers, and derives the operation result as a random number. In the second method, a numerical value is read from a random number table in which numerical values in the range of 0 to 65535 are randomly arranged, and the read numerical value is derived as a random number.

  The random value generation circuit 318 acquires an irregular value using white noise superimposed on a signal input from the various sensors 320 to the sensor circuit 322. The random value generation circuit 318 uses the acquired value as an initial value of a counter that counts up (down) in the counter mode, uses it as a seed of random numbers, or determines a read start position of the random number table. .

  When the ball detection sensor 320 detects that a ball has won the first special figure starting port 230, the sensor circuit 322 outputs a signal indicating that the ball has been detected to the random value generation circuit 318. The random value generation circuit 318 that has received this signal latches the value at that timing of the random value generation circuit corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230, and the latched value is incorporated in the random value generation circuit 318. It is stored in a random value storage register corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230. Similarly, when the random number generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that a ball has won the second special figure starting port 232, the timing of the random value generation circuit corresponding to the second special figure starting port 232 is also the same. Is latched, and the latched value is stored in a random value storage register corresponding to the second special figure starting port 232 incorporated in the random value generation circuit 318.

  Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 is connected to an information input circuit 350 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via this information output circuit 336. The game information (for example, game state) of the machine 100 is output.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power source supplied from the power source control unit 660 to the main control unit 300. The voltage monitoring circuit 338 is a voltage value of the power source. Is less than a predetermined value (for example, 9v), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has decreased is output to the basic circuit 302.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. When the activation signal is input, game control is started (main control unit main processing described later is started).

  The main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub-control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600. With this configuration, the first control unit 300 Communication with the sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is enabled. The main control unit 300 and the payout control unit 600 transmit / receive a communication confirmation command when the power is turned on, the main control unit 300 always transmits the number of payouts, and the payout control unit 600 transmits error information. Both can communicate bidirectionally. On the other hand, the information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 is configured to transmit a signal such as a command to the first sub control unit 400. The first sub control unit 400 is configured not to transmit a signal such as a command to the main control unit 300.

<Sub control unit>
Next, the first sub control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 mainly based on commands transmitted from the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404 and A RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, the number of times, and the like are mounted. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock, and controls programs and data for controlling the entire first sub-control unit 400, various effect data, etc. Is connected to the ROM 406.

  The basic circuit 402 includes a sound source IC 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and amplifier), a drive circuit 420 for controlling various lamps 418 (for example, the chance button lamp 138), and a second decorative design. A drive circuit 432 for controlling the drive of the display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a position detection sensor 430 for detecting the current positions of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and , A detection unit 710 for detecting that the chance button 136 is pressed, and a detection signal from the operation key unit sensor 425 for detecting the operation of the position detection sensor 430, the detection unit 710 of the chance button 136, and the operation key unit 181. From the CPU 404 and the sensor circuit 428 that outputs the A VDP 434 (video display) that reads out image data and the like stored in the ROM 406 based on the signal, generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 436, and displays the image on each of the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to 208N.・ Processor) is connected.

  Next, the second sub control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives the control command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 via the input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on the control command. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer for measuring time and frequency 512 is installed. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock, and controls a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, and an image display A ROM 506 storing data and the like is provided.

  The basic circuit 502 includes various movable means (chance button 136 capable of performing advancing and retreating operations, a transparent portion 191 that can be rotated in the front-rear direction, an eight-story role 224Fa, a general role 224Fb, and a family crest role 224E). Based on a drive circuit 516 for performing drive control, various movable means sensors 424 for detecting the current positions of various movable means 136, 191, 224Fa, 224Fb, and 224E, and detection signals from the various movable means sensors 424. A sensor circuit 518 that outputs to the circuit 502 is connected. Furthermore, the basic circuit 502 includes a game board lamp drive circuit 530 for controlling the game board lamp 532, a game table frame lamp drive circuit 540 for controlling the game table frame lamp 542, and the like. A serial communication control circuit 520 that performs lighting control by serial communication is connected between the game board lamp drive circuit 530 and the game stand frame lamp drive circuit 540.

  In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, the first sub-control unit 400 performs image display control of each of the three decorative symbol display devices 208 </ b> L to N, and the second sub-control unit 500 performs various movable units 136, 191, 224Fa, 224Fb, and 224E are controlled, the second sub-control unit 500 performs image display control of each of the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to 208N, and the first sub-control unit 400 performs various movable units 136, 191, 224 Fa, 224 Fb, 224 E may be controlled, or any one of the sub-control units may perform both controls.

  Although not shown in FIG. 4, the first sub control unit 400 or the second sub control unit 500 also performs display control of the panel display unit 183 shown in FIG.

<Discharge control unit, launch control unit, power supply control unit>
Next, the payout control unit 600, the launch control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

  The payout control unit 600 controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 mainly based on a command signal or the like transmitted from the main control unit 300, and a prize ball or a rental ball based on a control signal output from the payout sensor 604 It is detected whether or not the payout has been completed, and communication with a card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 is performed via the interface unit 606.

  Further, a detection signal of the door opening sensor 609 is input to the dispensing control unit 600, and a door opening command is transmitted from the dispensing control unit 600 to the main control unit 300. Also, when there is a payout error, an error command is transmitted from the payout control unit 600 to the main control unit 300.

  As for the door opening command, the detection signal of the door opening sensor 609 may be directly input to the main control unit 300 without using the dispensing control unit 600, or the dispensing control unit 600 is used as a relay base. Then, a door opening command may be transmitted from the door opening sensor 609 to the main control unit 300.

  The launch control unit 630 outputs a control signal output from the payout control unit 600 to permit or stop the launch, or a launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134 to operate the ball launch handle 134 by the player. Control of the launch motor 632 that drives the launcher 146 and launcher 148, and control of the ball feeder 634 that supplies the launcher 110 with a ball from the upper plate 126 based on a control signal that indicates the launch intensity according to the amount. I do.

  The power control unit 660 converts the AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into a DC voltage, converts it to a predetermined voltage, and controls each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400, the payout device 152, etc. Supply to each device. Further, the power supply control unit 660 supplies a power storage circuit (for example, a power supply circuit) for supplying power to a predetermined part (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the external power supply is cut off. , Capacitor). Here, a predetermined voltage is supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the payout control unit 600 and the first sub control unit 400, and from the payout control unit 600 to the main control unit 300, the second sub control unit 500, and the launch control unit 630. Although the predetermined voltage is supplied, the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit and each device through another power supply path. For example, the main control unit 300 may be directly supplied with a predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660. The second sub control unit 500 may be configured to supply a voltage after a predetermined voltage is supplied to the payout control unit 600, the main control unit 300, and the first sub control unit 400. The second sub control unit 500 may be supplied with a predetermined voltage from the first sub control unit 400. The firing control unit 630 may be directly supplied with a predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660. The payout control unit 600 may be supplied with a predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660 via other control units (such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400) and each device. The first sub-control unit 400 may be supplied with a predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660 via other control units (main control unit 300, payout control unit 600, etc.) and devices. The payout control unit 600, the main control unit 300, and the first sub control unit 400 may be supplied with a predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660 almost simultaneously. The payout control unit 600 may be supplied with the predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660 earlier than both of the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 or at least one of them. The main control unit 300 may be configured to supply the predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660 earlier than at least one of the payout control unit 600 and the first sub control unit 400. The first sub control unit 400 may be supplied with the predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660 earlier than at least one of the payout control unit 600 and the main control unit 300.

  The second sub control unit 500 may be supplied with a predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660 almost simultaneously with the payout control unit 600, the main control unit 300, and the first sub control unit 400. The second sub control unit 500 is configured so that the predetermined voltage is supplied from the power supply control unit 660 earlier than all of the payout control unit 600, the main control unit 300, and the first sub control unit 400, or one or more control units. May be. The second sub control unit 500 may be directly supplied with a predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660.

  In an island facility provided in a game machine installation store, a 100V AC power source is stepped down to a voltage of 24V, and a 24V AC current is supplied to the pachinko machine 100. The 24V AC current is converted into a 12V DC voltage by the power supply control unit 660 of the main control unit 300. Although not shown in FIG. 4, the main control unit 300 is also provided with a voltage conversion circuit. The 12 V DC current is further stepped down to a predetermined voltage (here, 5 V) by the voltage conversion circuit, and the predetermined voltage (5 V ) Is supplied to the CPU 304 provided in the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300. Further, the direct current converted to a voltage of 12 V by the power supply control unit 660 is also supplied to the voltage monitoring circuit 338 and the start signal output circuit 340 of the main control unit 300. When the voltage value of the 12V supply current drops below a predetermined value (9V in this example), the voltage monitoring circuit 338 outputs a low voltage signal to the I / O port 310 of the basic circuit 302. Therefore, the voltage monitoring circuit 338 monitors the voltage value of the power line connecting the power control unit 660 and the voltage monitoring circuit 338 and through which a DC current of 12 V flows. This power line is an example of a predetermined power line. It corresponds to. Note that a low voltage signal may be directly input to the CPU 304. The power management unit 660 also outputs the input 24V AC current as it is, or converts it into a 36V DC current and outputs it. Furthermore, the current of the operating voltage (here, 5V) may be supplied to the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 via a circuit different from the voltage conversion circuit.

  The activation signal output circuit 340 outputs an activation signal when the voltage value of the direct current supplied from the power supply control unit 660 by turning on the power reaches a voltage value at which the CPU 304 can operate. Further, when the WDT 314 times out, a reset signal is output from the WDT 314 to the CPU 304. When the WDT 3141 times out, there is a case where the CPU 304 cannot perform the originally designed operation due to a runaway state due to a program mistake or a voltage drop caused by a lightning strike or an illegal act. In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, a numerical value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set in the WDT 3141 as an initial value. The activation signal from the activation signal output circuit 340 and the reset signal from the WDT 3141 are input to the CPU 304 through a common signal line, but may be input through dedicated lines. The activation signal output from the activation signal output circuit 340 and the reset signal output from the WDT 314 described here correspond to an example of a predetermined activation signal.

  In the case of a momentary power loss when the power supply is shut off and immediately recovered, that is, when the power supply switch 178 is automatically recovered without being turned on, a stop voltage signal is output and the WDT 3141 times out, and the main control unit 300 performs reset processing. Is executed. In this reset process, it is first determined whether or not the reset operation to be executed is a system reset operation. There are two reset operations executed by the basic circuit 302: a system reset operation and a user reset operation. Here, when the system reset operation is executed, the values of the core of the CPU 304 and the built-in register are initialized. Subsequently, a security check process is executed. In the security check process, recalculation is performed to determine whether the authentication code calculated based on the user program is correct. If the authentication code is correct, the extension process is executed. The extension time in the extension process may be a fixed time, or may be a time obtained by adding a randomly selected random time to the fixed time. When the extension process ends, a main process of the main control unit 300 described later is executed, and game control is started. On the other hand, when executing the user reset operation, the values of the core of the CPU 304 and the built-in register are initialized. However, the value of the register that controls the random number generation circuit 318 is maintained in the state before the reset. Thereafter, main processing of the main control unit 300 described later is executed, and game control is started.

<Type of design>
Next, referring to FIGS. 5A to 5C, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the normal symbol display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are provided. The types of special maps and general maps to be stopped will be described. Fig.5 (a) shows an example of the stop symbol aspect of a special figure.

  The special figure 1 variable game is started on the condition that the first start port sensor detects that the ball has entered the first special figure start port 230, and the ball has entered the second special figure start port 232 The special figure 2 variable game is started on the condition that the second start port sensor has detected. When the special figure 1 variable game is started, the first special symbol display device 212 performs “variable display of special figure 1” by repeating all lighting of seven segments and lighting of one central segment. In addition, when the special figure 2 variable game is started, the second special symbol display device 214 displays “fluctuation display of special figure 2” which repeats lighting of all seven segments and lighting of one central segment. Do. These “variation display of special figure 1” and “variation display of special figure 2” correspond to an example of the symbol fluctuation display. Then, when the variation time determined before the start of the fluctuation of the special figure 1 elapses, the first special symbol display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol form of the special figure 1, and the fluctuation time determined before the start of the fluctuation of the special figure 2 When elapses, the second special symbol display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol mode of the special symbol 2. Further, after that, a fixed display for maintaining the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 msec) is performed.

  Therefore, from the start of “figure display of special figure 1” until the stop display of special figure 1 is stopped and finalized display is completed, or after “fluctuation display of special figure 2” is started The process up to the stop display of 2 stop symbol forms and the end of the final display corresponds to an example of the symbol variation display. As will be described later, the symbol variation display may be continuously performed a plurality of times. FIG. 5A shows ten types of special figures from “Special figure A” to “Special figure J” as stop symbol forms in the symbol variation display. In FIG. 5A, the white portions in the figure indicate the segment locations where the light is turned off, and the black portions indicate the location where the segments are turned on.

  “Special Figure A” is a 15 round (15R) special jackpot symbol, and “Special Figure B” is a 15R jackpot symbol. In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, as will be described later, whether or not a big hit in a special figure variable game is determined by lottery of hardware random numbers, and whether or not a special big hit is determined by lottery of software random numbers. The difference between the jackpot and the special jackpot is the difference in whether the probability of winning the jackpot is high (special jackpot) or low (jackpot) in the next special figure variation game. Hereinafter, a state having a high probability of winning the jackpot is referred to as a special figure high probability state, and a state having a low probability is referred to as a special figure low probability state. Moreover, after the 15R special jackpot game ends and after the 15R jackpot game ends, both shift to the time-saving state. Although the time reduction will be described in detail later, the state that shifts to the time reduction state is referred to as a normal high probability state, and the state that does not shift to the time reduction state is referred to as a normal low probability state. “Special figure A”, which is a 15R special jackpot symbol, is a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state, and “Special figure B”, which is a 15R jackpot symbol, is a special figure low probability ordinary figure high probability state. These “special chart A” and “special chart B” are symbols that give a relatively large profit amount to the player.

  “Special figure C” is a 2R jackpot symbol called sudden probability change, and is a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state. That is, “Special Figure C” is 2R compared to “Special Figure A” which is 15R. "Special figure D" is a 2R jackpot symbol called sudden time reduction, and is a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state. That is, “Special Figure D” is 2R compared to “Special Figure B” which is 15R.

  “Special figure E” is a 2R jackpot symbol called hidden probability change, and is a special figure high probability normal figure low probability state. "Special figure F" is a 2R jackpot symbol suddenly called normal, and is a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. These “special drawing E” and “special drawing F” are both 2R and are in a state in which they do not shift to the time-saving state.

  "Special figure G" is a first small hit symbol, and "Special figure H" is a second small hit symbol, both of which are in a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. The small hit here is equivalent to the same short hit big hit with 2R. That is, the “special drawing G” and “special drawing H” are in the same state as the “special drawing F”, but the effects displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L are different from each other. The special interest G, “special H” and “special F” are provided to enhance the interest of the game.

  In addition, “Special Figure I” is a first off symbol, and “Special Figure J” is a second off symbol, and the profit amount given to the player is a relatively small profit amount.

  In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, symbols other than “Special Figure A” are prepared as 15R special jackpot symbols, and the same applies to other symbols such as 15R jackpot symbols.

  FIG. 5B shows an example of a decorative design. There are ten types of decoration designs, “Decoration 1” to “Decoration 10”. The first start port sensor detects that a ball has won the first special figure start port 230 or the second special view start port 232, that is, the ball has entered the first special view start port 230; or On the condition that the second start port sensor detects that a ball has entered the second special symbol start port 232, the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the right In each symbol display area of the symbol display area 208c, “decoration 1” → “decoration 2” → “decoration 3” →... “Decoration 9” → “decoration 10” → “decoration 1” →. Switch the display with to “decorative pattern change display”. At the beginning of the decorative symbol change display, the decorative symbols change at a high speed for each symbol display area (scrolled). When the 15R jackpot of “Special Figure B” is notified, a symbol combination (for example, “decoration 1—decoration 1—decoration”) corresponding to the 15R jackpot corresponding to the 15R jackpot is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. 1 ”or“ decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 2 ”). When the 15R special jackpot of “special drawing A” is notified, a combination of three symbols of the same odd number of decorative symbols (for example, “decoration 3—decoration 3—decoration 3” or “decoration 7—decoration 7—decoration 7”). Etc.) is stopped and displayed.

  In addition, the 2R jackpot called “hidden probability change” of “Special Figure E”, the 2R jackpot called “Special Figure F” suddenly, or the first small hit of “Special Figure G”, “Special Figure H” When notifying the second small hit, “decoration 1-decoration 2—decoration 3” is stopped and displayed. Furthermore, in order to notify the 2R jackpot called “sudden change” of “special drawing C” or the 2R jackpot called “sudden time reduction” of “special drawing D”, “decoration 1-decoration 3—decoration 5” is displayed. Stop display.

  On the other hand, when notifying the first deviation of “Special Figure I” and the second deviation of “Special Figure J”, the symbol combinations other than the symbol combinations shown in FIG. 3B are stopped in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. indicate.

  Further, the fifth symbol may be displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M and / or the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The fifth symbol is a display of a decorative symbol smaller than the decorative symbol displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c in the first decorative symbol display device 208L. For example, the decorative design shown in FIG. 5B may be reduced, or may be a number having a display form different from the display form of the decorative design shown in FIG. Therefore, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and / or the third decorative symbol display device 208N is also a kind of symbol display means. Note that the fifth symbol may be displayed in a region outside the symbol display regions 208a to 208c even in the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

  Further, the fourth symbol may be displayed on the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to 208M. The 4th symbol is a display of a decorative symbol indicating that the symbol is changing or being stopped.

FIG.5 (c) shows an example of the usual stop display symbol. There are two types of stop display modes for normal maps: “general map A”, which is a winning symbol, and “general symbol B”, which is a missed symbol. Based on the fact that the above-mentioned gate sensor has detected that a sphere has passed through the general-purpose start opening 228, the normal symbol display device 210 repeats all lighting of the seven segments and lighting of the central one segment. Perform a “normal change display”. Then, when notifying the winning of the common figure variable game, the “normal figure A” is stopped and displayed, and when notifying the usual figure variable game, the “normal figure B” is stopped and displayed. Also in FIG. 5C, the white portions in the drawing indicate the locations of the segments that are turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments that are turned on.
<Main control unit main processing>
Next, main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of main processing of the main control unit.

  The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 includes, for each of FIG. 1 and FIG. 2, a counter for generating a big hit special figure determining random number counter initial value, a big hit special figure determining random number counter, and a small hitting time. Special figure determination random number counter initial value generation counter, small hit special figure determination counter, loss special figure determination random number counter initial value generation counter, loss special figure determination random number counter, and special figure timer Each counter of a random number counter for number determination is provided. In addition, the RAM 308 stores, for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, the number of holdings, the random number for determining the big hit, the random number for determining the special figure for the big hit, the random value for determining the special figure for the small hit, and the special figure for the lost time The random number value for use, the determination result of prior / impossible determination, the special determination result / pre-judgment result, the determination of correct / incorrect determination, the special figure determination result, and the special figure timer determination result are stored. Further, in RAM 308, special figure holding storage sections divided into the maximum number of areas (four in this example) that can hold the start of the determination (lottery) are separately provided for special figure 1 and special figure 2. It is prepared. The special storage unit shown in FIG. 1 includes special figure 1 big hit determination random value, big hit special figure 1 determination random value, small hit special figure 1 determination random value, and lost special figure 1 determination random value. The four random number values are stored as one set for each area in the winning order (holding order). In addition, the special storage unit for special figure 2 big hit determination random number, big hit special figure 2 determination random value, small hit special figure 2 determination random value, and lost special figure 2 determination The four random number values of the random number value are set as one set, and these four random number values are stored for each area one set at a time in winning order (holding order).

  As described above, the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 includes the start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs the start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which this activation signal has been input starts reset by a reset interrupt and executes the main process of the main control unit shown in FIG. 6A according to the control program stored in the ROM 306 in advance.

  In step S101, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization process, first, as initial setting 1, setting of a stack initial value (temporary setting) to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, setting of an interrupt mask, initial setting of the I / O 310, various kinds of information stored in the RAM 308 Initial setting of variables, operation permission to WDT 314, setting of initial values, and the like are performed. In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, a numerical value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set in the WDT 314 as an initial value. Next, the value of the WDT 314 counter is cleared, and the time measurement by the WDT 314 is restarted (hereinafter, this process is referred to as a WDT process). Following the WDT process, in the initialization process of step S101, whether or not the low voltage signal is on, that is, the voltage monitoring circuit 338, the power management unit 660 via the second sub control unit 500, the main control unit When the voltage value of the power source supplied to 300 is less than a predetermined value (for example, 9 v), it is monitored whether or not a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has decreased is output. When the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects that the power supply is cut off), the process returns to the WDT processing. When the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect the power supply is cut off), Perform setting 2. Even when the predetermined value (9 V) is not yet reached immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value. In the initial setting 2, a process for setting a numerical value for determining a cycle for executing a main control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, in the counter timer 312, a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, a second output port, etc.) 1) a process of outputting a clear signal from the output port 1), a setting for permitting writing to the RAM 308, and the like.

  Next, in step S103, after setting for interrupt prohibition, the basic random number initial value updating process is performed. In the basic random number initial value updating process, three initial values for generating initial values of the big hit special figure determining random number counter, the small hit special figure determining random number counter, and the lost special figure determining random number counter are generated. Update the value generation counter. After this basic random number initial value update process ends, the process proceeds to step S105.

  In step S105, effect random number update processing is performed. The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with random number counters for timer numbers for special drawings and for universal maps, and these counters determine timer numbers that can take values ranging from 0 to 99. Generate a random number value. In step S105, the value of this counter is updated. After this effect random number update process is completed, interrupt permission is set and the process returns to step S103.

  The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the processes of steps S103 and S105 except during a timer interrupt process that starts every predetermined period (for example, 4 ms).

<Main control unit timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6B is a flowchart showing the flow of main controller timer interrupt processing.

  The main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (for example, about once every 4 ms), and the main control unit timer is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. Interrupt processing is started at a predetermined cycle. At the start of the timer interrupt processing, the values of the registers of the CPU 304 are temporarily saved in the stack area, or the WDT 314 is periodically saved (for example, once every about 2 ms which is the main controller timer interrupt cycle). ) Restart.

  First, in step S201, input port state update processing is performed. In this input port state update process, the detection signals of the various sensors 320 shown in FIG. The data is stored in a signal state storage area provided for each sensor 320. If the detection signal of the sphere detection sensor is described as an example, information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected in the timer interruption process (about 4 ms before) is stored in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor. This information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area partitioned and stored in the RAM 308 in the previous detection signal storage area partitioned for each sphere detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt processing (about 2 ms before) ) Is read from the current detection signal storage area provided for each sphere detection sensor in the RAM 308, and this information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area described above. To remember. Further, the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-described current detection signal storage area.

  Further, in this step S201, the information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor stored in each storage area of the detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared. It is determined whether or not the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each sphere detection sensor matches the winning determination pattern information. This main control unit timer interrupt process that is repeatedly started at a very short interval of about 2 ms while one game ball passes one ball detection sensor is started several times. For this reason, every time the main control unit timer interrupt process is activated, in step S205 described above, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the game ball starts to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal before the previous time, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a detection signal this time. In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, in consideration of erroneous detection and noise of the ball detection sensor, it is determined that there is a winning when the detection signal is continuously stored twice after no detection signal. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 stores winning determination pattern information (for example, information indicating that there is no detection signal before, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a current detection signal). In this step S205, the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor is predetermined winning determination pattern information (for example, no previous detection signal, previous detection signal, current detection signal). In the case of the general winning port 226, the central variable winning port 234, the right variable winning port 235, the first special figure starting port 230, and the second special figure starting port 232, It is determined that the starting port 228 has passed. In other words, it is determined that there has been a winning at these winning ports 226, 234, 235 and these starting ports 230, 232, 228. For example, when the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three matches with the above-described winning determination pattern information in the general winning opening sensor for detecting the winning at the general winning opening 226, there is a winning at the general winning opening 226. If the information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times does not match the above-described winning determination pattern information, the subsequent general winnings are performed. The process branches to the subsequent process without performing the process associated with winning the prize to the mouth 226. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (for example, information indicating that there is a detection signal before, no previous detection signal, and no current detection signal). After it is determined that there has been a single win, it is not determined that there has been a win until the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times matches the winning determination clear pattern information in each ball detection sensor, and the winning determination is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, it is next determined whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information.

  In the basic random number initial value update process (step S203), the value of the counter for generating various random number counter initial values is updated in the range of 0 to 99, and in the subsequent basic random number update process (step S205), the values of the various random number counters are updated. For example, every time the big hit special figure 1 determination random number counter makes one round, the value of the generation counter is set in the big hit special figure 1 determination random number counter. The same processing is performed for other random number counters.

  In step S207, timer update processing is performed. In this timer update processing, the normal symbol display symbol update timer for timing the time for the symbol to be changed / stopped on the normal symbol display device 210, and the time for the symbol to be changed / stopped to be displayed on the first special symbol display device 212 are timed. Special symbol 1 display symbol update timer for performing, special symbol 2 display symbol update timer for measuring the time for the symbol to be changed and stopped on the second special symbol display device 214, a predetermined winning effect time, a predetermined opening time Various timers including a timer for measuring a predetermined closing time, a predetermined end effect period, and the like are updated.

  Subsequently, a winning determination process (step S209) is performed. In the winning determination process (step S209), first, in the case where the winning holes 226, 234, 235 and the starting holes 230, 232, 228 are won, a prize provided in the RAM 308 for each winning hole or for each starting hole. The value in the number-of-balls storage area is read out, and 1 is added to set the original number of prize balls as the storage area.

  Subsequently, in this winning determination process, the first special figure starting port 230 or the second special figure starting port 232 has won a prize, and the number of special figure variable games held is less than a predetermined number (for example, 4). If this is the case, the predetermined starting information is stored. That is, if the number of holdings is less than the predetermined number, the jackpot determination random number value and various special figure determination random number values are stored. The jackpot determination random value is a value obtained by processing the value acquired from the random value storage register of the random value generation circuit 318 shown in FIG. 4 (for example, acquired value + value of R register + 1). On the other hand, the special figure determination random number value is a value obtained by processing a software random number derived from the special figure determination random number counter provided in the RAM 308 (software random number value + R register value + 1). A combination of the random value generation circuit 318 shown in FIG. 4, the special figure determination random number counter provided in the RAM 308, and the main control unit 300 that performs random number processing corresponds to an example of the starting information deriving unit. Various random values (starting information) are stored as a set of starting information in a vacant area corresponding to a winning order (holding order) in a special-purpose holding storage unit provided in the RAM 308. This special figure storage unit stores a predetermined upper limit number (4 here) of start information derived based on the game ball entering the first special figure start port 230 or the second special figure start port 232. This corresponds to an example of starting information storage means that can store up to. At this time, various random values (starting information) may be temporarily stored in a temporary area provided in the RAM 308, and the value stored in the temporary area may be stored in a special storage storage unit. In this case, the temporary area is started. Information storage means may be used, and the reserved storage section and temporary area of the special figure may be used as the start information storage means. In addition, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 adds 1 to the value of the number of reserved special figures stored in the RAM 308, and the number of special figure held increases by one. Therefore, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 corresponds to an example of a holding unit.

  In addition, when it is detected that a ball has passed through the general map start port 228 and the number of the general map variable games held is less than a predetermined number (for example, 2), the general map winning selection at that timing is performed. The value of the random number counter for numerical value generation is stored in a random number value storage area provided in the RAM 308 that is different from that for the special figure, as a normal winning random number value as start information.

  In this winning determination process, the predetermined special ball detection sensor is used to move to the first special figure starting port 230, the second special figure starting port 232, the ordinary drawing starting port 228, the central variable winning port 234, or the right variable winning port 235. The first special figure starting port 230, the second special figure starting port 232, the universal figure starting port 228, the central variable are included in the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 when the winning (winning) is detected. The winning acceptance information indicating the presence / absence of winning (winning) in the winning opening 234 and the right variable winning opening 235 is set.

  Whether the start information of the special figure or the start information of the usual figure, if the number of holdings is equal to or more than the predetermined number, the start information is not stored and the process proceeds to step S211.

  When this winning determination process (step S209) ends, the prefetch process is called. In this prefetching process, first, it is determined whether or not the number of holds has increased from the prefetching process executed last time. That is, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 also stores the number of holds until now (the number of holds at the end of the previous timer interrupt process, which is referred to as the old number of holds). The pending number at the time of executing the current pre-reading process after the winning determination process (step S209) is compared with the old pending number, and it is determined whether or not the pending number is increasing. If the number of holds has not increased, the prefetching process is terminated without prefetching the starting information. On the other hand, if the number of reservations has increased, the increase in the random number for special figure 1 big hit determination in the special memory 1 in the special memory 1 provided in the RAM 308 is prefetched, or the special memory in the special memory in the special memory 2 in FIG. FIG. 2 Prefetch the increase in the random number for jackpot determination. In the prefetching here, only the increment is prefetched, but all may be prefetched. Note that the prefetching here means that the start information is read first before the success / failure determination (final lottery), but in the subsequent prefetching processing, the word “prefetching” is used as the result of the predecessor (prevention / correction (final lottery)). ) May be used to mean read.

  The pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 is in one of the control states of a special figure low probability state with a relatively low probability of winning a jackpot and a relatively high special figure high probability state. The special figure high probability state is called during probability fluctuation. A probability variation flag is prepared in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. When the probability fluctuation glag is set to ON, a special figure high probability state (during probability fluctuation) is set, and when the probability fluctuation glag is set to OFF, a special figure low probability state is set.

  The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores a pre-adjustment determination table used in the prefetching process. In this success / failure pre-determination table, a random number range is defined for a special figure high probability state and a special figure low probability state. When the pre-reading of the special figure 1 big hit determination random value or the special figure 2 big hit determination random value is completed, the pre-read special figure 1 big hit determination random value or the special figure 2 big hit determination random value is determined in advance. The random number range in the table is determined. That is, referring to the probability variation flag prepared in the RAM 308, in the case of the special figure low probability state, the pre-read special figure 1 big hit determination random value or the special figure 2 big hit determination random value is within a predetermined numerical range. In some cases, the success / failure determination result is determined in advance as “big hit”, and in other cases, the determination result is determined as “losing”. In the special figure related process (step S213 shown in FIG. 6B), which will be described later, the success / failure determination of the special figure variable game is performed again by using the success / failure determination table having the same contents as the previous / failure determination table. The determination result here is only a result of prior determination.

  When the pre-judgment result is “big hit”, the random number value for determining the big hit special figure 1 in the reserved storage part of the special chart 1 provided in the RAM 308 is prefetched, or in the reserved memory part of the special figure 2 Prefetch random number for determining special figure 2 for big hits. When the result of the determination in advance is “small hit”, the random number value for determining the special figure 1 at the time of small hit in the reserved storage unit of the special figure 1 provided in the RAM 308 is prefetched, or the reserved memory in the special figure 2 is stored. The random number for determining the special figure 2 for small hits in the department is prefetched. If the result of the preliminary determination is “losing”, the random number value for determining the special figure 1 at the time of losing in the special memory 1 of the special chart 1 provided in the RAM 308 is prefetched or the special memory in the special memory 2 of the special figure 2 is stored. The random number for determining the special figure 2 at the time of loss is prefetched. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 also stores a special figure prior determination table used in the prefetching process. In the special figure predetermination table, a random number range corresponding to each of the ten types of stop symbols ("Special Figure A" to "Special Figure J") shown in FIG. 5A is defined. Depending on which random number range the figure determination random number value belongs to, a special figure prior determination result (which stop symbol form shown in FIG. 5A is stopped and displayed) is obtained. Here, the determination result of the special figure is also a result of the preliminary determination, and the determination of the stop symbol form of the special figure is also performed again in the special figure related process (step S213 shown in FIG. 6B) described later. .

  The pre-reading of the start information and the pre-determination using the pre-read start information described above are executed before the success / failure determination (main lottery) of the special figure related process (S213) described later is performed. The main controller 300 that pre-reads the special figure 1 big hit determination random number value and various special figure 1 determination random number values corresponds to an example of the first start information pre-reading means. The main control unit 300 that prefetches the special figure 2 determination random number value corresponds to an example of second start information prefetching means. Further, the main control unit 300 that performs pre-determination based on the special figure 1 big hit determination random value and various special figure 1 determination random numbers corresponds to an example of the first pre-determination means. The main control unit 300 that performs a prior determination based on the random value and various special figure 2 determination random values corresponds to an example of a second prior determination unit.

  The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a prefetch information temporary storage section for special figure 1 divided into areas for each hold and a prefetch information temporary storage section for special figure 2 divided into areas for each hold. It has been. Information representing the special figure pre-determination result (which is also information representing the special figure and hereinafter referred to as prefetch information) is stored in a corresponding reserved area of the prefetch information temporary storage unit.

  If the number of holds has not increased, prefetch information “no hold” is stored in the corresponding hold area of the prefetch information temporary storage unit. Further, in the prefetching process, when the big hit game is being played and when the current control state is the electric support state (the time flag is on), the prefetching and pre-determination of the start information in FIG. 1 is performed. In these cases, the “undetermined” information indicating that the stop symbol pre-determination based on the pre-read start information in FIG. 1 is not performed is stored in the corresponding reserved area in the pre-read information temporary storage unit. To remember. That is, it is acquired during a big hit game and during electric support based on entering a starting port where the pair of blade members 2321 are not provided (the first special figure starting port 230 which is a fixed starting region). The pre-determination based on the start information is not performed, and the pre-determination result is not notified (pre-reading notice). By doing so, the fairness of the player is secured. In addition, although the pre-reading of the start information itself is not performed, the pre-reading may be performed and the preliminary determination and the result notification (pre-reading advance notice) may not be performed. The notification (pre-reading notice) may not be performed.

  In the main control unit timer interruption process shown in FIG. 6B, the common figure related process is performed following the winning determination process in step S209 (step S211). In this common figure-related process, first, one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the state of the common figure is performed as the common figure state update process. For example, in the process during the normal symbol change display (the value of the above-mentioned general symbol display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the lighting / extinguishing drive control that repeatedly turns on and off the 7-segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is performed. Do. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs a usual fluctuation display (ordinary figure fluctuation game).

  Further, in the processing at the timing when the normal symbol display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the normal symbol display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), the winning symbol (the common symbol A shown in FIG. 5C) and the lost symbol are displayed. The 7-segment LED constituting the universal display device 210 is controlled to be turned on / off so that one of the display modes of the general figure B shown in FIG. In addition, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings in various processes, not limited to the common drawing related processes here. Here, the above-described lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed, and the setting area is set to indicate that the normal stop display is being performed. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs fixed display of one of the winning symbols and the lost symbols. Further, after that, for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 0.6 seconds), information indicating the stop period is always set in the storage area of the normal stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the display. By this setting, the winning symbol that is confirmed and displayed is always stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is informed of the result of the usual figure variation game.

  Further, if the result of the usual figure variable game is a hit, the usual figure hit flag is turned on. When the usual figure hit flag is on, in the usual figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (when the usual figure stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), The normal operation is set in the setting area, and the blade member 2321 is opened to a solenoid (332) for opening and closing the blade member 2321 of the second special figure starting port 232 for a predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds). And a signal indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the blade open time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  In the usual state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the blade member A signal for holding the blade member in the closed state is output to the opening / closing drive solenoid 332, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Further, in the normal state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (when the value of the blade closing time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), the non-operating state is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. To do. Furthermore, if the result of the usual figure variable game is lost, the usual figure lost flag is turned on. When the usual figure loss flag is on, even in the usual figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (when the value of the usual figure stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, normal operation inactive is set.

  Subsequently, in this general drawing-related lottery process, the opening and closing control of the general figure variable game and the second special figure starting port 232 is not performed (the state of the normal figure is inactive), and the pending general figure When the number of variable games is one or more, the result of the general variable game is won by the random lottery based on the normal random number value stored in the random value storage area described above, or is not selected A hit determination is performed to determine whether or not, and in the case of winning, a hit flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON. If unsuccessful, turn off the winning flag. Regardless of the result of the hit determination, next, the value of the random number counter for generating the normal figure timer random value is acquired as the normal figure timer random number value, and a plurality of fluctuation times are obtained based on the acquired general figure timer random number value. One time is selected for variably displaying the normal map on the general map display device 210, and this variable display time is stored as a normal map variable display time in a general map variable time storage area provided in the RAM 308. In addition, the number of pending general figure variable games is stored in the usual figure pending number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and from the number of pending custom figure variable games each time a hit determination is made. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is re-stored in the usual figure reservation number storage area. Also, the random number value used for the hit determination is deleted.

  In the main control unit timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 6B, the special figure related process (step S213) is performed following the common figure related process of step S211 described above. In this special figure related process, first, a special figure state update process for special figure 2 (special figure 2 state update process) is performed, and then a special figure state update process for special figure 1 (special figure 1 state update). Process). In the special figure 2 state update process, one of the following eight processes is performed according to the state of the special figure 2. For example, in the special figure 2 state update process in the middle of the special figure 2 fluctuation display (the value of the above-mentioned special figure 2 display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the second special symbol display device 214 is turned on. Performs lighting / extinguishing drive control that repeatedly turns off. By performing this control, the second special symbol display device 214 performs the variable display of the special figure 2 (special figure 2 variable game).

  Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the general command rotation start setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area described above, and the process ends.

  Also, in the special figure 2 state update process starting at the timing when the special figure 2 variable display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), On / off drive control of the 7-segment LED constituting the second special figure display device 214 is performed based on the special figure determination result (special figure stop pattern mode), and special figure 2 stop display is being performed in the setting area of the RAM 308. Make settings to indicate this. By performing this control, the second special symbol display device 214 has a 15R special jackpot symbol (special symbol A), a 15R jackpot symbol (special symbol B), a 2R special jackpot symbol (special symbol C), and a sudden time shortening symbol (special symbol). Figure D), hidden probability variation (special E), suddenly normal (special F), first small hit (special G), second small (special H), first loss (special) One of the symbols (Fig. I) and the first lost symbol (special symbol J) is confirmed and displayed. After that, information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 milliseconds). With this setting, the specially displayed special figure 2 is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special figure 2 variable game is notified to the player. In addition, when a value is set in the electric support number storage unit provided in the RAM 308, if the value is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the short time number, and the subtraction result becomes 1 to 0. In this case, if the special figure probability is not changing, the time reduction flag is turned off. Further, the hourly flag is also turned off during a big hit game (in a special game state) or a small hit game. That is, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 enters the non-electric support state (first entry rate control state) when the big hit gaming state and the small hit gaming state (in the special gaming state).

  In addition, a predetermined transmission information indicating that a general command rotation stop setting transmission process is executed in a command setting transmission process (step S215) to be described later is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and a pattern for stopping the variable display is displayed. Special figure 2 identification information indicating that it is special figure 2 is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in command data, which will be described later, and the processing is terminated.

  The RAM 308 also has a big hit flag. If the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit, the big hit flag is turned on at the start of the special figure 2 variable game. When the jackpot flag is on, in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the RAM 308 In the setting area, special figure 2 is in operation, and a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, an image for notifying the player that the big hit game is started is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L or the like. In order to wait for a certain period, information indicating the winning effect period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 waiting time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, 5H is additionally stored as transmission information (command type) in the above-described transmission information storage area in order to execute the general command winning effect start setting transmission process in the command setting transmission process (step S233).

  Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), a predetermined release period (for example, 29 seconds) Or, until a winning of a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) is detected at the central variable winning opening 234 or the right variable winning opening 235, the door member 2341 of the central variable winning opening 234 or the door member of the right variable winning opening 235 A signal for holding the door members 2341 and 2351 in an open state is output to the open / close drive solenoid (332) 2351, and information indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the door open time management timer provided in the RAM 308. To do. Further, 7H is additionally stored as transmission information (command type) in the above-described transmission information storage area in order to execute the general command big prize opening release setting transmission process in the command setting transmission process (step S233).

  Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the door opening time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the door member 2341 of the central variable prize opening 234 or the right side A signal for holding the door members 2341 and 2351 in a closed state is output to a solenoid (332) for opening and closing the door member 2351 of the variable prize opening 235 for a predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) and provided in the RAM 308. Information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the door closing time management timer. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening closing setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  In addition, in the special figure 2 state update process in which the opening / closing control of the door member is repeated a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 rounds or 2 rounds) and started at the end timing, a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a big hit Production in the storage area of the production standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308 for setting to wait for the period during which the image for informing the player of the end of the game is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L or the like. Information indicating the waiting period is set.

  As described above, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 changes the open / closed state of the door member 2341 of the central variable winning port 234 or the door member 2351 of the right variable winning port 235 during the big hit gaming state (in the special gaming state). This corresponds to an example of variable winning control means for performing control. Note that the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores the opening / closing patterns of the door members 2341 and 2351, and the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 stores the opening / closing patterns according to whether the special figure variation game is successful or not from the ROM 306. get.

  Further, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 sets the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag provided in the RAM 308 to be on simultaneously with the end of the big hit game, based on the stop symbol form represented by the special figure determination result. That is, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 sets both the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag to ON when the special figure determination result is “special figure A” or “special figure C” in the special figure lottery process described later. . When the special figure determination result is “special figure E”, only the probability variation flag is set to ON among the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag. Furthermore, when the special figure determination result is “special figure B” or “special figure D”, only the short time flag is set to ON among the probability variation flag and the short time flag, and the electric support number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is set. Set power support 100 times. The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 sets the entry rate control state, which is a state in which the ease of entry (entry rate) of the game ball into the second special figure starting port 232 (variable starting region) is controlled, This corresponds to an example of an approach rate changing unit that changes between a non-electric support state that is an approach rate control state and an electrical support state that is a second approach rate control state.

  Furthermore, 6H is additionally stored as transmission information (command type) in the above-described transmission information storage area in order to execute the general command end effect setting transmission process in the command setting transmission process (step S233).

  Also, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined end production period ends (when the production standby time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 is not activated in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set medium. Furthermore, a loss flag is also prepared in the RAM 308. If the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a loss, the loss flag is turned on. When the lost flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (the timing when the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, special figure 2 inactive is set. In the special figure 2 state update process when the special figure 2 is not in operation, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next process.

  When the special figure 2 state update process is completed, the special figure 1 state update process is performed. In the special figure 1 state update process, each process described in the special figure 2 state update process is performed according to the state of the special figure 1. Each process performed in the special figure 1 state update process is the same as the process in which “special figure 2” in the contents described in the special figure 2 state update process is replaced with “special figure 1”. Omitted. The order of the special figure 2 state update process and the special figure 1 state update process may be reversed.

  When the special figure state update process described above is completed, a special figure related lottery process is performed. In the special figure related lottery process, the process for the special figure 2 (the special figure 2 related lottery process) is first performed, and then the process for the special figure 1 (the special figure 1 related lottery process) is performed. In this way, the main control unit 300 performs the special figure 2 related lottery process before the special figure 1 related lottery process, so that the same timing (winning determination process in the main control unit timer interruption process started at a predetermined opportunity) When starting information is acquired based on the game ball entering the first special figure starting port 230 in S209) and starting information is acquired based on the game ball entering the second special figure starting port 232 in S209) If the start condition of the special figure 2 variable game and the start condition of the special figure 1 variable game are satisfied at the same time, or both the start condition of the special figure 2 variable game and the start condition of the special figure 1 variable game are satisfied Even in such a case, since the special figure 2 variable game is changing first, the special figure 1 variable game does not start changing. In addition, the main control unit 300 notifies the result of the jackpot determination of the special figure variable game by the first special figure display device 212 or the second special figure display device 214, and wins a prize to the second special figure start port 232. The lottery result notification based on the first special figure start opening 230 is prioritized over the lottery result notification based on the winning of the first special figure start opening 230. In the state where only the start information of FIG. 1 among the start information of 2 remains, when the start information of FIG. 2 is newly stored, it is based on the newly stored start information of FIG. The notification of the lottery result is performed prior to the notification of the lottery result based on the already stored start information of FIG. The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 that executes the special drawing related lottery process corresponds to an example of a lottery means (whether or not judgment means).

  In the special figure 2 related lottery process, a lottery (win / no decision) is executed, a special figure to be stopped and determined, and a timer number is determined. First, it is determined whether or not a predetermined condition is satisfied. That is, first, it is determined whether or not a predetermined success / failure determination prohibition condition is not satisfied. Here, it is determined whether or not the second special figure display device 214 is in the special figure fluctuation display or in the stop display. Returning, if neither is displayed, it is determined whether it is set during special figure operation or special figure non-operation, and if it is set during special figure operation, the main controller timer interrupt processing Returning to FIG. 5, if the special figure is set to be inactive, it means that the validity determination prohibition condition has not been established, and this time, it is determined whether or not a predetermined validity determination condition has been established. This determination is made by referring to the reserved storage unit of the special figure 2 provided in the RAM 308 to determine whether or not the number of the special figure 2 variable games held is larger than zero. If the number of holds is 0, the process returns to the main control unit timer interrupt process. If the number is 1 or more, a predetermined success / failure determination condition is established.

  If a predetermined success / failure determination condition is satisfied, one set of random values (the special figure 2 big hit judgment random number value) which is the start information stored in the past from the reserved storage unit of the special figure 2 provided in the RAM 308. , Random number value for determining special figure 2 at the time of big hit, random number value for determining special figure 2 at the time of small hit, and random number value for determining special figure 2 at the time of loss), and starting information (random) The numerical value set) is transferred from the currently stored area to the next area. That is, if the starting information stored in the past is taken out from the holding storage unit of FIG. 2 and the starting information is stored in the holding storage unit of FIG. 2, the Nth oldest starting information is held in FIG. It is set as the (N-1) oldest starting information in the storage unit. Also, 1 is subtracted from the pending number stored in the RAM 308. One set of random values from the reserved storage unit of the special figure 2 of the RAM 308 (the special figure 2 big hit determination random value, the big hit special figure 2 decision random value, the small hit special figure 2 decision random value, and the loss time The main control unit 300 that performs processing for extracting the special figure 2 determination random number value) corresponds to an example of a second start-up information acquisition unit.

  Next, a success / failure determination process is performed. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 also stores a determination table for determining whether or not it is correct. The contents of this success / failure determination table are the same as the contents of the previous / failure determination table described above. In the success / failure determination process, the probability variation flag prepared in the RAM 308 is referred to, and the special figure 2 big hit determination random number value is stored in the success / failure determination table in accordance with the control state (special figure low probability state, special figure high probability state). Based on which of the random number ranges, “big hit”, “small hit”, or “losing” is derived as a result of the determination of success / failure. In the special figure high probability state, the probability of winning a big hit is higher than in the special figure low probability state. Deriving “big hit”, “small hit”, or “losing” corresponds to the determination (lottery), and the CPU 304 of the main control unit 30 that executes the determination processing here selects lottery means (passage determination means). It corresponds to an example. Further, “big hit” corresponds to an example of a specific determination result.

  When the execution of the success / failure determination process is completed, the process proceeds to a special symbol design determination process. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 also stores a special figure determination table. The contents of the special figure determination table are the same as the contents of the special figure advance determination table described above. In this special symbol design determination process, when the result of the determination is “big hit”, based on which random number range in the special symbol determination table belongs to which random number value for determining the big bonus special figure 2 belongs, The special figure determination result is determined as one of “Special Figure A” to “Special Figure F”. In addition, when the determination result is “small hit”, the special figure determination result is determined based on which random number range in the special figure determination table the random number value for determining the special figure 2 at the time of small hits belongs. Determine "Special Figure G" or "Special Figure H". Further, when the determination result is “lost”, the special figure determination result is set to “special figure determination result” based on which random number range in the special figure determination table the random figure value for determining the special figure 2 at the time of loss belongs. The figure is determined as “I” or “Special Figure J”. The CPU 304 of the main control unit 30 that executes the special symbol design determining process corresponds to an example of a symbol determining unit.

  In the variation time determination process following the special symbol determination process, the variable display period in the special figure variable stop display is determined. In this variation time determination process, a timer number determination random number is acquired from a timer number determination random number counter provided in the RAM 308. The acquisition timing of the timer number determination random number is the timing immediately before the start of the special figure change, but may be the timing of acquiring the start information. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 also stores a timer number determination table. In the timer number determination table, a timer number and a random number range corresponding to the timer number are defined for each special figure determination result. The timer number is the time from when the second special symbol display device 214 or the first special symbol display device 212 starts changing the symbol until the stop symbol indicating the result of the determination of the success / failure is displayed, that is, the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner. This represents the fluctuation table time period (special figure fluctuation time) to be used, but may be a variation table time period of the decorative symbol.

  In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, timers 1 to 8 are prepared as timers. Timer 1 indicates that the special figure fluctuation stop period will be 2 seconds, resulting in an extremely shortened special figure fluctuation time. Represents that Note that the determination of the timer 1 or the timer 2 may be referred to as a special figure change. The timer 3 has a special figure fluctuation stop period of 10 seconds. In the timers 1 to 3, the decorative pattern variation pattern in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG.

  The timer 4 indicates that the special figure variation stop period is 12 seconds. When the timer 4 is determined, normal reach is selected as the variation pattern of the decorative symbols in the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Normal reach is generally a stop display (strictly a temporary stop) of decorative symbols in which two symbol display areas (for example, left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c shown in FIG. 3) are equal (first stop and second stop are performed). ) The remaining one symbol display area (for example, the middle symbol display area 208b) is variably displayed, that is, the symbol display area that is variably displayed is a specific symbol (the symbol display area that is stopped and displayed). Is a state in which a combination of predetermined big hit symbols is stopped and displayed. Timer 5 indicates that the special figure fluctuation time is 40 seconds, timer 6 indicates that the special figure fluctuation time is 60 seconds, and timer 7 indicates that the special figure fluctuation time is 80 seconds. When the timers 5 to 7 are determined, super reach is selected as the decorative pattern variation pattern in the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Super reach is a product obtained by adding special variation display to normal reach to improve the production effect (long reach, normal reverse reach, double line reach, etc.).

  The timer 8 indicates that the special figure fluctuation time is 120 seconds. When the timer 8 is determined, a special variation is selected as the variation pattern of the decorative symbol in the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The special variation includes special multi-line reach, full rotation reach, special full rotation reach, and the like. When the timer 8 is determined, the full rotation reach is selected as the variation pattern of the decorative symbol in the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The The probability that timer 8 is selected is much lower than the probability that other timers are selected, and this full rotation reach corresponds to premier reach.

  Note that the term “reach” simply means a decorative pattern variation pattern including normal reach, super reach, and special variation.

  This reach is after the determination of whether or not the result of the determination of the success / failure (the final lottery) in the special figure related process is a specific determination result (a predetermined result with a high player's advantage). It is a notice effect that informs the player in advance before notifying the result of the success / failure determination, and whether or not the reach is performed is determined after the determination of the success / failure.

  In this variation time determination process, the timer number is determined based on the timer number determination random number using the timer number determination table. That is, the timer number is determined depending on which random number range corresponding to the special figure determination result the acquired timer number determination random number belongs to. In determining the timer number, if the timer number determination table defines the timer number according to the number of reservations, the timer number determination random number as well as the current number of reservations shown in FIG. Based on this, the timer number may be determined.

  The timer number representing the special figure variation time described above is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 308.

  Before the special drawing lottery-related process is executed (for example, the above-described winning determination process S209), the special figure preliminary determination result is obtained from a plurality of types of timer selection tables including timer numbers as one or a plurality of period information. One type of timer selection table may be selected based on a predetermined dedicated random number lottery, and the timer number may be determined from the timer selection table here. In determining the timer number here, a lottery may be performed using a dedicated random number (for example, a random number for timer number determination), or the timer number may be uniquely determined without performing the lottery. . In addition, a timer selection table may be selected in the special drawing lottery related process, and the first sub-control unit 400 may be selected based on the timer selection table.

  When the variation time determination process is completed, other processes are performed, and the special drawing 2 related lottery process is terminated.

  Subsequently, in the special figure related process, a special figure 1 related lottery process is performed. Each process performed in the special figure 1 related lottery process is the same as the process in which “special figure 2” in the contents described in the special figure 2 related lottery process is replaced with “special figure 1”. Omitted.

  Thus, the special figure related process (step S213) in the main control unit timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 6B ends, and the process proceeds to the command setting transmission process (step S215). In this command setting transmission process, various commands are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. The output schedule information transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of 16 bits, bit 15 is strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), bits 11 to 14 are command Type (for example, basic command, symbol variation start command, symbol variation stop command, winning effect start command, end effect starting command, per round number designation command, winning prize opening command, winning prize closing command, power recovery command, RAM Information that can specify the type of command such as clear command, special figure hold increase command, general figure hold increase command), and bits 0 to 10 are constituted by command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

  Specifically, the strobe information is turned on and off in the command transmission process described above. If the command type is a symbol variation start command, the command data includes information indicating a special symbol stop symbol, information indicating a control state (information indicating a setting state of a time reduction flag and a probability variable flag), and information indicating a timer number. In the case of a symbol variation stop command, it includes information indicating a special symbol stop symbol (special symbol determination result), information indicating a control state, etc., and in the case of a winning effect start command and an end effect start command. In the case of a per-round number designation command, information indicating the control state, the number of rounds, etc. are included. When the command type indicates a basic command, the device information in the command data, the presence / absence of winning at the first special figure starting port 230, the presence / absence of winning at the second special figure starting port 232, the winning at the central variable winning port 234 Presence or absence, presence or absence of winning in the right variable winning opening 235, and the like.

  In the general command rotation start setting transmission process described above, information indicating the special figure stop symbol (special figure determination result), information indicating the control state, information indicating the timer number, information stored in the RAM 308 as command data Information indicating the number of the first special figure variable games or the second special figure variable games being set is set. In the general command rotation stop setting transmission process described above, information indicating the special figure stop symbol (special figure determination result), information indicating the control state, and the like stored in the RAM 308 is set in the command data. In the above-described general command winning effect start setting transmission process, the command data includes information indicating the special figure determination result, information indicating the control state, the number of the first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game held, etc. Set the information indicating. The winning effect start command here corresponds to a jackpot game start command. In the above-described general command end effect setting transmission process, command control data stored in the RAM 308, effect control information to be output to the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to 208N, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the effect standby period, Information indicating the control state, information indicating the number of the first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game being held, etc. are set. The first sub control unit 400 that has received the end effect start command transmits an end effect control command to the second sub control unit 500 based on the end effect start command. Receiving the end effect control command, the second sub-control unit 500 displays on the first decorative symbol display device 208L or the like an image for notifying the player that the predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, the big hit game is to end. And the jackpot game ends. The end effect start command here corresponds to a jackpot game end command. In the above-described general command special winning opening release setting transmission process, information indicating the number of winning rounds stored in the RAM 308, the current number of rounds, information indicating the control state, etc. is set as command data of the special winning opening release command. . In the above-described general command big prize opening closing setting transmission process, the current round number stored in the RAM 308, the information indicating the control state, the first special figure variable game held as command data of the big prize opening closing command Alternatively, information indicating the number of second special figure variable games is set.

  In step S215, general command special figure hold increase processing is also performed. In this general command special figure hold increase processing, special figure identification information (information showing special figure 1 or special figure 2) stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308 in the command data of the special figure hold increase command, the control state And information indicating the stop symbol of special figure 1 or special figure 2 determined in advance (special figure preliminary determination result).

  Furthermore, in this step S215, general command usual figure hold increase processing is also performed. In this general command usual figure hold increase process, information indicating a control state is set in the command data of the general figure hold increase command. In addition, the main control unit 300 also transmits to the first sub-control unit 400 a general map change start command indicating that the normal map display has started (or is) as a general command-related command. In addition, the main control unit 300 to the first sub control unit 400 start (do) the common figure change stop command indicating that the change display of the normal figure has stopped (do) or the pair of blade members 2321. An electric chew opening start command indicating that, or an electric chew closing command indicating that the pair of blade members 2321 are closed (to do) may be transmitted.

  In the first sub-control unit 400, it is possible to determine the production control according to the change of the game control in the main control unit 300 by the command type included in the received output schedule information, and it is included in the output schedule information. Based on the information of the command data, the contents of effect control can be determined. In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 acquires the number of remaining rounds until all the rounds are completed based on the number of rounds included in the command and the current number of rounds.

  In this command setting transmission process, a command is also transmitted to the payout control unit 600 shown in FIG. The output schedule information and the payout request information output to the payout control unit 600 are composed of 1 byte, strobe information (indicating that data is set when turned on) in bit 7, and power-on information in bit 6. (In the case of ON, it indicates that this is the first command transmission after power-on), the current processing type (0-3) for encryption in bits 4-5, and the encrypted processing in bits 0-3 The number of payout requests is indicated.

  Next, in the main control unit timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 6B, an external output signal setting process (step S217) is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350 separate from the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336 shown in FIG.

  In step S219, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of the various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S201 described above are read, and the presence or absence of a front frame door opening error or a lower plate full error is monitored to open the front frame door. When an error or a lower pan full error is detected, device information indicating whether there is a front frame door opening error or a lower pan full error is set in the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. The device information set here is included in the basic command and transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. Also, the solenoids 332 shown in FIG. 4 are driven to control the opening / closing of the second special figure starting port 232, the central variable winning port 234, and the right variable winning port 235, or via the drive circuits 324, 326, 330. Display data to be output to the normal symbol display device 210, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the various status display units 328, and the like is set in the output port of the I / O 310.

  When the device monitoring process in step S219 ends, the process returns to the main control unit main process shown in FIG. 6A. Before the return, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S201 is returned to each original register. Make settings and enable interrupts. In addition, before recovery, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is on. If the low voltage signal is on (when power-off is detected), it returns to the power-off state when power is restored. A specific variable or stack pointer for saving is saved as a return data in a predetermined area of the RAM 308, subjected to an interruption process such as initialization of the input / output port, and then returned to the main process of the main control unit. Also good.

<Processing of First Sub-Control Unit 400>
Next, processing of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 5B is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 5C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 4D is a flowchart of the image control process of the first sub control unit 400.

  First, in step S301 in FIG. 9A, various initial settings are performed. When power is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in S301. In this initialization processing, initialization of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in the RAM 408, and the like are performed.

  In step S303, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more. This process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S305. In step S305, 0 is substituted into the timer variable. In step S307, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 determines whether a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

  In step S309, effect control processing is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S307, processing such as reading effect data corresponding to the command from the ROM 406 is performed, and when update of the effect data is necessary, effect data update processing is performed. An effect involving the operation means, which will be described below, is first controlled by this effect control process. In other words, when a symbol variation start command including information related to the symbol variation time is received, whether or not an effect involving the operation means is executed according to the length of the variation time is determined in this effect control process. When it is determined and executed by the lottery process, the effect data is read from the ROM 406. In accordance with the effect data read here, image display control in each of the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to 208N is executed in step S313, and for the movable means control, the second sub control unit 500 reads the effect read here. A control command corresponding to the data is transmitted, and is performed by the second sub-control unit 500 in step S713 described later.

  In step S311, it is determined whether or not the chance button 136 has been pressed by detecting the detection signal output from the detection unit 710 via the sensor circuit 428. As a result of the determination here, when the pressing operation of the chance button 136 is detected, the processing of changing the effect data updated in step S309 to the effect data corresponding to the pressing operation of the chance button 136, or the pressing of the chance button 136 When the operation is valid, processing for preparing production data corresponding to an operation reception production described later is performed.

  In step S313, if there is a command to VDP 434 in the effect data read in step S309, this command is output to VDP 434 (details will be described later). In step S315, if there is a command to the sound source IC 416 in the effect data read in step S309, this command is output to the sound source IC 416. In step S317, if there is a command to the various lamps 418 in the effect data read in step S309, this command is output to the drive circuit 420.

  In step S319, if there is an operation command (movement command or rotation command) to the second decorative symbol display device 208M or / and the third decorative symbol display device 208N in the effect data read out in step S309, The command is output to the drive circuit 432.

  In step S321, when there is a control command (for example, control commands related to various movable units 136, 191, 224Fa, 224Fb, and 224E) to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 in the effect data read in step S309. The control command is set to be output, and the process returns to step S303. If the door opening command has been transmitted from the main control unit 300, the setting for outputting the door opening command to the second sub-control unit is performed in step S321.

  Next, the command reception interrupt process of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described using FIG. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal output from the main control unit 300. In step S401 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output from the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

  Next, the first sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (for example, once every 2 ms). Run in cycles.

  In step S501 of the first sub control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S303 in the first sub control unit main process shown in FIG. Is stored in the timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S303, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S503 of the first sub control unit timer interrupt process, a control command is transmitted to the second sub control unit 500 set in step S319, an effect random number value is updated, and the like.

  Next, the image control process in step S313 in the main process of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing the flow of image control processing.

  In step S601, an instruction to transfer image data is issued. Here, the CPU 404 first swaps the designation of the display areas A and B in the VRAM 436. As a result, an image of one frame stored in the display area not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L or the like. Next, the CPU 404 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of the ROM 406), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of the VRAM 436) and the like in the attribute register of the VDP 434 based on the position information table and the like, and then the image from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 434 transfers the image data from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436 based on the command set in the attribute register. Thereafter, the VDP 436 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 404.

  In step S603, it is determined whether or not a transfer end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 is input. If a transfer end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S605. If not, a transfer end interrupt signal is input. Wait for it. In step S605, parameters are set based on the production scenario configuration table and attribute data. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 436 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 436 in step S601, the CPU 404 has information on the image data constituting the display image (coordinate axis and image size of the VRAM 436). , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates, etc.) are instructed to the VDP 434. The VDP 434 sets parameters according to attributes based on instructions stored in the attribute register.

  In step S607, a drawing instruction is performed. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 404 instructs the VDP 434 to start drawing an image. The VDP 434 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer in accordance with an instruction from the CPU 404.

  In step S609, it is determined whether or not a generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 based on the end of image drawing is input. If a generation end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S611. If not, the generation end interrupt signal is determined. Wait for input. In step S611, a scene display counter that is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 408 and counts how many scene images have been generated is incremented (+1), and the process ends.

<Processing of Second Sub-Control Unit 500>
Next, the processing of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 7B is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the second sub control unit 500. FIG. 8C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the second sub control unit 500.

  First, in step S701 in FIG. 9A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, first, initialization processing is executed in S701. In this initialization processing, initial setting of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in the RAM 508, and the like are performed.

  In step S703, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S705. In step S705, 0 is assigned to the timer variable. In step S707, command processing is performed. The CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500 determines whether a command has been received from the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400.

  In step S709, an effect control process is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S707, the effect data corresponding to the command is read from the ROM 506, and when the effect data needs to be updated, the effect data is updated. In step S 711, if there is a command from the first sub-control unit 400 to the game board lamp 532 or the game table frame lamp 542, this command is output to the serial communication control circuit 520.

  In step S713, a movable means control process is performed, and then the process returns to step S703. In the movable means control processing here, various movable means (chance button 136 capable of executing advancing and retreating operation, transparent portion 191 that can be rotated in the front-rear direction, and eight-position movable object that can be moved up and down are provided from the first sub control unit 400. When a control command relating to 224Fa and the general character 224Fb, which is also a family crest character 224E that can be moved up and down, is received, various processes corresponding to the control command are performed, and various movable units 136, 191, 224Fa, 224Fb, 224E are performed. Control each operation.

  Next, the command reception interrupt process of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub control unit 500 detects a strobe signal output from the first sub control unit 400. In step S801 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output from the first sub control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command storage area provided in the RAM 508.

  Next, the second sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (for example, once every 2 ms), and the timer interrupt processing is performed at a predetermined cycle triggered by this timer interrupt. Run with.

  In step S901 of the second sub control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S703 in the second sub control unit main process shown in FIG. Is stored in the timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S703, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S903 of the second sub-control unit timer interrupt process, an effect random number update process is performed.

  Next, an example of a specific effect in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 will be described.

  FIG. 9 is a diagram showing an example of button effects in stages. In FIG. 9, time elapses in the order of alphabets and the like written in parentheses (the same applies to the following figures unless otherwise noted). The time interval between the alphabet written in parentheses and the alphabet written next in parentheses may be equal intervals or different intervals in one figure. , Equal intervals and different intervals may be mixed (the same applies to the following drawings).

  In FIG. 9, among the three decorative symbol display devices 208208L to 208N, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are not shown, and only the first decorative symbol display device 208L is shown.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 9, a variable icon display area 208e is provided at the center of the effect display area 208d, and a hold icon display area 208f is located to the right of the variable icon display area 208e. Is provided. A frame-like image indicating the position of the fluctuation icon display area 208e is displayed on the outer periphery of the fluctuation icon display area 208e. This frame-like image is always displayed, but when the display condition is satisfied (for example, when the variation icon is not displayed in the variation icon display area or when it is displayed in the opposite direction, a reach effect is further performed. It may be displayed only when not). Note that only one of the change icon display area 208e and the hold icon display area 208f may be provided.

  One or a plurality of hold icons can be displayed in the hold icon display area 208f. Four hold icons h1 to h4 are displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. These four hold icons h1 to h4 are all displayed as black circles, and the display of white circles with dotted lines indicates that the hold icons are not displayed. The hold icon is an icon indicating that the start of the special symbol variation display or the start of special symbol determination is suspended, and the number of the hold icons to be displayed is basically that of the special diagram variable game. It is the same number as the number of holds. However, there may be a timing at which the display number of the hold icon does not represent the hold number before and after the hold use. The hold icons include the hold icon shown in FIG. 1 and the hold icon shown in FIG. 2, and the hold icon display area 208f may be divided into two to display areas for both icons. Further, the hold icon can be pre-readed about whether or not the hold is appropriate depending on the display mode. As animation related to the hold icon, for example, an increase animation that is executed when the hold increases and a new hold icon is displayed, and the rank of the hold changes due to digestion of the previous hold, and the hold Moving animation that is executed when the icon moves to another display position (for example, the position on the left), change animation that is executed when the display mode of the holding icon changes based on the look-ahead result, etc. Erase animation executed when the hold icon is deleted, and a save animation executed when the hold icon of the non-priority side special figure is evacuated when the hold of the priority side special figure increases in the priority change machine Etc. In addition to the above animation, the stand-by animation that can be executed independently during the period other than the execution of the animation (for example, the period during which there is no increase / decrease of the hold or change of the hold icon) and can be executed in duplicate with the animation. There is. As an example of this standby animation, an animation that is performed on the spot without changing the display position (for example, a repeated animation of a certain scale of animation) is given as an example. Note that a plurality of animations for increasing, moving, changing, erasing, saving, and waiting for the hold icon may be executed in duplicate.

  One variation icon can be displayed in the variation icon display area 208e. A star-shaped variation icon c is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 9B. The fluctuation icon is an icon corresponding to the special figure variable game that is displayed after the hold is digested and the special figure variable game is started. That is, the hold icon becomes a change icon simultaneously with the start of the special figure change game corresponding to the hold icon. More precisely, when the first hold icon with the oldest start prize moves from the hold icon display area 208f to the change icon display area 208e, the moving icon is referred to as a change icon or the change icon moves. May be. Alternatively, the icon after the movement to the fluctuation icon display area 208e is completed may be referred to as a fluctuation icon. This variation icon is displayed in a display size (display size larger or smaller than the hold icon) different from the hold icon. Thereby, although the change icon and the hold icon may be easily identified, they may be the same size. In addition, the variation icon may have a display mode related to the display mode of the hold icon. The change icon can be notified of whether or not the change is appropriate (the change notice) depending on the display mode, and is basically erased at a timing when the result of the change is notified. Therefore, the variation icon can be regarded as an icon related to the hold, and can also be considered as a kind of the hold icon in the sense that the notification of the success / failure result of the special figure change game is held. Note that the erasing timing may be a timing before the timing at which the change success / failure result is notified, the same timing, or a timing after the timing.

  As an animation related to both the hold icon and the change icon, the hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area 208f and having the earliest start winning timing is changed to the change icon display area 208e when the hold is consumed. There are a movement animation for moving the icon as a variable icon and a change animation for changing the display mode of the hold icon to the display mode of the variable icon. These animations may be combined and executed at the same time. When the display mode of the hold icon and the display mode of the variation icon are the same, the execution of the change animation can be omitted.

  The animation related to the fluctuation icon includes a standby animation executed during execution of the special figure variable game, an erase animation executed when the special figure variable game ends and the fluctuation icon is deleted, and a fluctuation icon. There is a change animation executed when the display mode is changed in the middle. These animations may be executed at the same time in combination with each other. Further, the standby animation of the variation icon may be executed at the same time in combination with the movement animation or the change animation.

  Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 9, the fourth symbol 2081 of the special symbol 1 and the fourth symbol 2082 of the special symbol 2 are displayed on the upper right. The 4th symbol 2081 of the special figure 1 is a round display, and the 4th graphic 2082 of the special figure 2 is a square display. In any of the 4th symbols 2081 and 2082, gray indicates that the symbol is changing, black indicates that the jackpot symbol is stopped (determined display), and white indicates that the lose symbol is stopped (determined display). It represents that. These fourth symbols 2081 and 2082 are also a kind of decorative symbols.

  In addition to the first decorative symbol display device 208L, FIG. 9 includes a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a first special symbol hold lamp 218, and a second special figure hold lamp 220. It is shown.

  In addition, FIG. 9 also shows a chance button 136 on the right side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 9, the white display indicates the white lighting state or the non-lighting state of the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136, and the hatched display indicates the chance button lamp 138. Represents the red lighting state. The state in which the chance button lamp 138 is lit red is a state in which pressing of the chance button 136 is urged. The hatched display may be in a lighting state other than red. In addition, although “lit” is used here, it may be “flashing” (the same applies hereinafter).

  The background image of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 9 is a background image of the castle town. When the background image is a background image of a castle town, the pachinko machine 100 is in the castle town mode among a plurality of types of production modes. That is, the background image and the effect mode are associated with each other.

  In FIG. 9 (a), both the first special symbol display device 212 and the second special symbol display device 214 display a stop symbol of the losing (determined display), and the first decorative symbol display device 208L has a random pattern. A certain “decoration 3”-“decoration 4”-“decoration 1” is displayed. In addition, the fourth symbol 2081 of the special figure 1 and the fourth symbol 2082 of the special figure 2 are both displayed in a stopped state. The four first special symbol holding lamps 218 shown in FIG. 9A are lit, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L displays four black circle holding icons, which are the holding indications in FIG. Thus, no variation icon is displayed in the variation icon display area 208e.

  In FIG. 9B, the special symbol variation display of the first special symbol display device 212 is started, and the decorative symbol variation display of the first decorative symbol display device 208L is also started. That is, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the decorative symbol is updated (varied display) continuously in each of the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c. Further, only three first special symbol holding lamps 218 shown in FIG. 9B are lit, and three holding icons (holding icons h1 to h3) are displayed in the holding icon display area 208f of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. ) Only, and a star-shaped variation icon c is displayed in the variation icon display area 208e. This is because, among the four hold icons h1 to h4 displayed in FIG. 5A, the hold icon h1 with the oldest start winning timing becomes a change icon, and the change icon display from the hold icon display area 208f. This is a result of moving to the area 208e. Furthermore, the 4th symbol 2081 of the special figure 1 which is a round display is changed to a display during change (gray).

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 9C, the reach effect is started. Up to now, the variation display of the decorative symbols, which has been performed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, is reduced in the left corner and is in a reach state with the numeral 3. .

  In this example, when the reach effect is started, the button effect is also started. The button production here is the production that tells the development of super reach. In addition, the button effect may be an effect that tells the type of super reach that develops. When the button effect is started, as shown in FIG. 9D, a button image 136a imitating the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 1 and the operation of the chance button 136 are displayed at the center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. An arrow display 136b and a character display “push” as a prompt display for prompting (pressing), and a remaining period meter display 136c as a display regarding a period (operation effective period) for accepting the operation of the chance button 136 as valid Are displayed as a set. The remaining period meter display 136c is a display representing the remaining period in which the operation of the chance button 136 is accepted. Further, the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 9 is in the initial position at any stage, and the chance button lamp 138 shown in FIG. 9D starts to light in red and prompts to be pressed.

  In this example, the player does not operate the chance button 136 immediately after the button effect is started, but operates (presses) the chance button 136 after a while (see FIG. 9F). When the chance button 136 is operated, the chance button 136, which has been lit in red until then, is switched to lighting in white or turned off.

  When the chance button 136 is operated within the operation effective period, the first decorative symbol display device 208L displays a cut-in notice indicating whether or not it is likely to develop into super reach. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 9 (g), the display “CHANCE” is interrupted so as to overlap the background image, and then developed into super reach A as shown in FIG. 9 (h). doing. On the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 9 (h), the character “super reach A” is displayed, indicating that the effect of super reach A is being performed. In this example, the background of the castle town is from the beginning to the end, and the effect display of Super Reach A is also performed in the background of the castle town. Moreover, when the effect display of super reach A is started, all the hold icons h1 to h3 disappear and are not visible. On the other hand, frame-like images indicating the positions of the fourth symbols 2081 and 2082, and the variation icon c and the variation icon display area 208e continue to be displayed. Note that the fourth symbols 2081, 2082, the variation icon c, and the frame-like image may be erased so that they cannot be seen. Super Reach A is not a big hit-determined super reach, but just because it has evolved into Super Reach A does not necessarily mean a big hit. In addition, even if a display that is expected to develop into a super reach called “CHANCE” is made, the super reach is not necessarily started, and the lose symbol is stopped and displayed without starting the super reach. There is also a case. Further, the display “CHANCE” shown in FIG. 9G may be a dedicated display that is not displayed unless the chance button 136 is operated, or a general-purpose display that is displayed even when the chance button 136 is not operated. It may be.

  On the other hand, in FIG. 9 (g ′) showing another example continued from FIG. 9 (f) in which the chance button 136 is operated (pressed), “unfortunate” is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. As shown in FIG. 11 (h ′), the first decorative symbol display device 208L does not develop into a super reach, and the decorative symbol “Lack of decoration 3” − “Decoration 1” − “Decoration 3” is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The combination is stopped. Even if “unfortunately” is displayed, there may be a big hit due to the reverse effect.

  The operation of the chance button 136 is always accepted, but the operation outside the operation valid period is finally treated as invalid, and a new effect such as a cut-in notice is not started. That is, the state within the operation effective period in the pachinko machine 100 is a state (operation effective state) where execution of a new effect such as a cut-in notice is started when the chance button 136 is operated. However, the operation of the chance button 136 may not always be accepted, and control for accepting only the acceptance period may be performed.

  FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining in detail the operation means provided in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG.

  The pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 is provided with a chance button 136 capable of performing an advance / retreat operation and a transmission part 191 that can rotate in the front-rear direction.

  FIG. 10A shows a state in which the chance button 136 and the transmission part 191 are in their initial positions, as in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. That is, the chance button 136 does not protrude, and the transmission part 191 is also substantially parallel to the transparent plate member 118. The chance button 136 can be operated (pressed) even in the initial position, and the built-in chance button lamp 138 can be turned on or blinked. Further, the chance button 136 may vibrate, and can vibrate even at the initial position. Even when the chance button 136 is vibrating, the chance button lamp 138 can be turned on or blinking, and a sound effect or effect sound can be output from the speaker 120. The chance button 136 may be capable of vibrating only at the position where it is pushed.

  FIG. 10B shows a state in which the transmission portion 191 is rotated from the initial position around a drive shaft (not shown) and tilted forward. This drive shaft is a horizontal shaft extending in the left-right direction of the pachinko machine 100. The transmission unit 191 rotates forward while the LED built in the transmission unit 190 is turned on or blinking, and a sound effect or effect sound is output from the speaker 120. The transmission part 191 may also vibrate and can vibrate even at the initial position. Further, even in a state where it is inclined forward as shown in FIG. Moreover, the transmission part 191 may rotate in the front-back direction in small increments as strong vibration with a large vibration amplitude. Even when the transmission part 191 is vibrating, the LED built in the transmission part unit 190 can be lit or blinking, and a sound effect or a production sound can be output from the speaker 120. The state (second state) of the transmission part 191 shown in FIG. 10B is closer to the player than the state (first state) in the initial position shown in FIG. The player can operate to push the transparent portion 191 toward the initial position by hand, and the transparent portion 191 corresponds to an example of an operation means. Even when the transmission unit 191 is operated and pushed in, the LED built in the transmission unit 190 is turned on or blinks, and a sound effect or effect sound is output from the speaker 120. Note that the transmission part 191 may not vibrate at the initial position.

  FIG. 10C shows a state in which the chance button 136 has started to advance upward from the initial position. The chance button 136 advances while the built-in chance button lamp 138 is lit or blinking, and a sound effect or effect sound is output from the speaker 120. FIG. 4D shows a state where the chance button 136 has advanced to the maximum advance position. The chance button 136 can be stopped at one or more positions between the initial position and the maximum advance position. Therefore, it is possible to advance in several stages. Further, the chance button 136 that has advanced (protruded) from the initial position can also vibrate, and in the state of having advanced (protruded), it vibrates laterally or vertically. Also at this time, the chance button lamp 138 can be turned on or blinked, and a sound effect or effect sound can be output from the speaker 120. Furthermore, the chance button 136 that has advanced (protruded) from the initial position can be operated so as to be pushed toward the initial position. Even when the chance button 136 is operated and pushed in, the chance button lamp 138 lights up or flashes, and a sound effect or effect sound is output from the speaker 120. The chance button 136 may be automatically retracted toward the initial position only by being lightly pressed in the advanced state.

  It should be noted that the vibration of the chance button 136 and the vibration of the transmission part 191 may be a function that appears only in a certain setting state. For example, it may be a function that is manifested by a setting by a player's effect customization function or by a switch setting on the game store clerk side. That is, depending on the setting state, there may be a case where the vibration does not occur at all, or a case where only a part thereof vibrates.

  FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an effect involving operating means in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG.

  Here, as the operation means, the chance button 136 described with reference to FIG. When the operation means A and the operation means B are compared here, the operation means B is an operation means larger than the operation means A (an operation means having a large operation surface), and the operation means A can be operated even at the initial position. Although the means B cannot be operated at the initial position, the operating means B and the operating means A may be reversed, both may be the same size operating means, or the initial position Both may be an operation means that can be operated, or both may be an operation means that cannot be operated. It should be noted that only one type of examples among the plurality of types of operation means listed here may be applied, or multiple types of examples may be applied, or all types may be applied. Also good.

  Further, the operation means described as the transparent portion 191 in the following description can be replaced with other operation means such as a second chance button provided separately from the chance button 136.

  As shown in FIG. 11 (a), the effect involving the operation of the operation means B (transmission portion 191) is larger than the effect involving the operation of the operation means A (chance button 136). Expectation is high. Further, both the function A are provided, but the function B is provided only in the operation means A. Examples of the function A include a function of vibrating at an operating position and a function of shining. Examples of function B include a function of rotating and a function of vibrating at an initial position. As shown in FIG. 11A, the operation means B is inferior in the number of functions than the operation means A.

  However, as shown in FIG. 11B, both may have the same number of functions. That is, the function B is provided only in the operation means A, but the operation means B may be provided with the function C. As an example of the function C, there is a function capable of performing strong vibration.

  The operation means A and the operation means B may have the same number of functions.

  FIG. 11C is a diagram showing a part of the effect data of the operation means A. Here, the display data on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is “liquid crystal”, the operation data on the Yatsushiro character 224Fa, the general character 224Fb and the family crest character 224E is “movable means”, and the audio output data from the speaker 120 is “ “Sound”, frame lamp 122, LED, and light emission data of various built-in lamps are displayed as “LED”, and vibration data of operation means A is displayed as “vibration”. "..." in the figure represents omission of data. Production No. The data of “vibe” in 1 is “E0”, and this “E0” indicates that no vibration occurs. Production No. The data of “Vibration” in FIG. 2 is “E1”, and this “E1” represents that the operating means A is vibrated before the operating means A (chance button 136) is operated. Production No. The production data of “liquid crystal”, “movable means”, “sound”, and “LED” in No. 2 becomes the production data after operation of the operation means A, and the operating means A that is vibrating before the operation is operated. Then, the effect after the operation is started in accordance with each effect data. Production No. 3 is “E2”, and this “E2” indicates that the operation means A is vibrated after the operation means A (chance button 136) is operated. Production No. The production data of “liquid crystal”, “movable means”, “sound”, and “LED” in FIG. Production No. 2 data and production no. The data 3 may be called even when the operating means B (transparent portion 191) is operated. This is because the production data after the operation of the operation means B can be used for the production data of “liquid crystal”, “movable means”, “sound”, and “LED”. In this case, after the operation means B is operated, the production No. 2 data or production No. The production according to the production data “liquid crystal”, “movable means”, “sound”, “LED” in the data 3 is started, and the operation means A vibrates according to the data “E1” or “E2”. That is, the production No. The data 2 includes data (E1) that vibrates the operating means A before operating the operating means A, and other data such as “liquid crystal” becomes data after the operating means A is operated. The operation No. When the second data is read, the “vibration” data is also executed after the operation means B is operated in accordance with other data such as “liquid crystal”. In addition, production No. 2 data and production no. 3 is different from at least “Liquid Crystal” data such as “A1” and “A2”, and the “Liquid Crystal” data of “A1” is used after the operation means B is operated. No. Production No. 3 2 data needs to be read.

  The production data related to the operation means B may also be called when the operation means A is operated. After the operation means A is operated, the “liquid crystal”, “movable means”, The production according to the production data of “Sound” and “LED” is started, and the operation means B vibrates according to the data of “Vibration”. However, the effect data related to the operation means B may not be called even when the operation means A is operated.

  FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing the execution timing related to the effect involving the operation means A and the effect involving the operation means B. In the flowchart shown in FIG. 12, time elapses from the left to the right in the figure. In the flowchart shown in FIG. 12A to FIG. 12C, “operation means B related effects” started in response to the operation of the operation means B (transmission portion 191) and the operation means B are operated in order from the top. Then, the “operation means B operation valid state” that the operation means B related effects will be started, “operation means B operation” indicating that the operation means B is operated, and the operation means A (chance button 136). “Operation means A related effect” that is started in response to an operation, “Operation means A operation valid state” that the operation means A related effect is started when the operation means A is operated, and the operation means A is operated “Operation means A operation” is shown to indicate that. The “operation means B related effects” include effects in which the operation means B itself vibrates, and effects display, sound effect output, LED light emission, and the like. In addition, the “operation means A related effects” include effects in which the operation means A itself vibrates, and effects display, sound effect output, LED light emission, and the like are also included. However, the “operation means A related effects” may only indicate that the operation means A itself vibrates. It should be noted that during the “operation means B operation valid state”, there are cases where a notification prompting the user to operate the operation means B may or may not be performed. There is a case where a notification (operation promotion notification) prompting to operate the means A is performed and a case where it is not performed. If these notifications are made, the player can know that the operation is in an effective state, but if not, each operation means becomes a so-called back button.

  In the example shown in FIG. 12A, the operation means B is not operated during the operation means B operation valid state, but the operation means B related effects are started simultaneously with the end of the operation means B operation valid state. Thus, the “operation means B related effects” may be started even when the operation means B is not operated. The “operation means B related effects” may be effects that always start even if the operation means B is not operated. Further, the content of the “operation means B related effects” may be varied depending on whether or not the operation means B is operated. On the other hand, with respect to the operation means A, the operation means A related effects are started simultaneously with the start of the operation means B related effects without passing through the “operation means A operation valid state” and without operating the operation means A. . Thus, the “operation means A related effects” may be started even when the operation means A is not operated. The “operation means A related effects” may also be effects that always start even if the operation means A is not operated. Further, the content of the “operation means A related effects” may be varied depending on whether or not the operation means A is operated. In this example, the execution period of the operation means B related effects is the same as the execution period of the operation means A related effects. For example, the vibration of the operation means B (transmission portion 191) and the vibration of the operation means A (chance button 136). Starts at the same time and ends at the same time.

  In the example shown in FIG. 12 (b), when the operation means B is operated during the operation means B operation effective state and the operation means B is operated, the operation means B operation effective state is changed to the execution of the operation means B related effects. Switch. On the other hand, regarding the operation means A, the operation means A-related effect starts simultaneously with the start of the operation means B-related effect without going through the “operation means A operation valid state” and without operating the operation means A. Has been. Also in this example, the execution period of the operation means B related effects and the execution period of the operation means A related effects are the same. For example, the vibration of the operation means B (transmission portion 191) and the vibration of the operation means A (chance button 136). Starts at the same time and ends at the same time.

  Also in the example shown in FIG. 12C, when the operation unit B is operated during the operation unit B operation effective state and the operation unit B is operated, the operation unit B operation effective state is changed to the execution of the operation unit B related effects. Switch. On the other hand, regarding the operation means A, the operation means A-related effect starts simultaneously with the start of the operation means B-related effect without going through the “operation means A operation valid state” and without operating the operation means A. Has been. In the example shown in FIG. 12C, the execution period of the operation means B related effects is longer than the execution period of the operation means A related effects. For example, the vibration of the operation means B (transmission part 191) and the operation means The vibration of A (chance button 136) is started at the same time, but after the vibration of the operation means A is finished first and the vibration of the operation means A is finished, the vibration of the operation means B is finished.

  Note that the start times are the same, and the execution period of the operation means A related effects may be longer than the execution period of the operation means B related effects. Alternatively, the start time is different, the operation means B related effects start first, the operation means A related effects start, the operation means A related effects end first, and then the operation means B related effects end. May be. On the other hand, even if the operation means A related effect starts first, then the operation means B related effect starts, the operation means B related effect ends first, and then the operation means A related effect ends. Good. Also, the end time may be the same, the operation means B related effects start first, then the operation means A related effects start, and the operation means B related effects and the operation means A related effects end together. Or, conversely, the operation means A related effects start first, then the operation means B related effects start, and the operation means A related effects and the operation means B related effects may end together. .

  Also, as described with reference to FIG. 12A, when the operation unit B related effect is executed without operating the operation unit B, for example, the operation unit B related effect is effective for the operation unit B operation. As long as the operation unit B is operated at an early stage, the execution time of the operation unit B-related effects may be increased as long as the operation is performed until the first time has elapsed from the start of the state. become able to.

  FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the execution timing related to the effect involving the operation means. An arrow in each of FIGS. 13A to 13C represents a vibration period of the operating means A.

  The example shown in FIG. 13 (a) is an example in which the decorative symbols are being displayed in a variable manner. When the operation means B is operated while the operation promotion notification of the operation means B (transmission portion 191) is being performed, While the vibration of the means A (chance button 136) is started, a judgment effect is started in the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the like. The judge effect here is a judge effect for a big hit, and corresponds to an example of a first effect. This first effect is a notice effect that does not use the operation of the operation means A (chance button 136). The first effect is not a notice effect related to the operation means A (chance button 136). When the result of the judge effect is displayed, the judge effect is ended, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L starts to display the fluctuation variation of the three decorative symbols as the decorative symbol variable display. The vibration of the operating means A is continued until the middle of the execution period of the fluctuation variation display. Eventually, the fluctuation variation display ends, and the combination of the three decorative symbols is confirmed and displayed.

  Here, as shown in the lower timing chart of FIG. 13 (a), when the operation timing of the operation means B is delayed, the fluctuation time of the whole decorative symbol is already determined, and therefore the fluctuation variation display of the three decorative symbols is displayed. Thus, the vibration of the operating means A is continued until shortly before the end of the shortened swing fluctuation display execution period.

  As shown in FIG. 13 (a), an effect such as vibration of the operating means A is ended before notifying the result related to the player's profit, such as a confirmation display, so that the player can concentrate on notifying the result related to the profit. I have to.

  The example shown in FIG. 13B is an example during a big hit game. When the operation means B is operated while the operation promotion notification of the operation means B (transmission portion 191) is being performed, the operation means A ( The vibration of the chance button 136) is started, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the like, a judgment effect is started. The judge in the judge performance here is a judge related to whether or not to shift to the probability variation state. When the result of the judge effect is displayed, the judge effect ends, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L is notified that it aims at a specific winning opening (for example, a V winning opening) in the next round. The vibration of the operating means A is continued halfway through this notification execution period. Eventually, the next round is started, and it is notified again that a specific winning opening (for example, V winning opening) is aimed.

  Here, as shown in the lower timing chart of FIG. 13 (b), if the operation timing of the operation means B is delayed, the maximum allowable time of one round is already determined, so the specific winning mouth is aimed at the next round. The execution period for notifying this is shortened, and the vibration of the operating means A is continued until shortly before the end of the shortened execution period of the notification.

  As described above, even during the big hit game, the effect involving the operation means is executed. In addition, the rounds that should aim for the specific winning opening are limited, and if the specific winning opening can be won in that round, the game shifts to a probable state after the big hit game is over. For this reason, the round that should aim for the specific winning opening is an important round that leads to the profit of the player, and before the start of the round that leads to the profit of the player, the effect such as vibration of the operation means A is ended, It is possible to concentrate on aiming for a specific winning opening.

  In addition, the example shown in FIG. 13A and the example shown in FIG. 13B are examples in which the vibration period of the operation unit A remains constant even when the operation timing of the operation unit B changes.

  The example shown in FIG. 13C is an example of a pseudo-continuous effect during the decorative symbol variation display, and the operation means B is operated by the operation means B (transmission portion 191) while the operation promotion notification is being performed. Then, the vibration of the operating means A (chance button 136) is started, and at the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the like, the pseudo-continuous symbol stop display is started. The vibration of the operating means A is continued until the stop display of the pseudo-continuous symbols is finished, and at the same time as the stop display of the pseudo-continuous symbols is finished, the vibration of the operating means A is also finished. Then, the next pseudo-variable display is started, and the number of pseudo-continuous operations is n-th, and the operation promotion notification of the operation means B is also performed in this n-th pseudo-variable display.

  Here, as shown in the lower timing chart of FIG. 13C, when the operation timing of the operation means B is delayed, the period of the pseudo continuous symbol stop display started by the operation of the operation means B is shortened. The vibration of the operation means A ends at the same time as the stop display of the shortened pseudo-continuous symbols.

  In the example shown in FIG. 13C, when the operation timing of the operation unit B changes, the vibration period of the operation unit A also changes.

  In summary, including what has been described above, the operating means A can vibrate in a period during which at least a judge effect corresponding to an example of the first effect is being executed. Further, the operation means A may be capable of vibrating during at least a part of a period in which a judge effect corresponding to an example of the first effect is executed. For example, the vibration may end simultaneously with the end of the judge effect, the vibration may continue even when the judge effect ends, or the vibration may end before the judge effect ends. Further, the vibration period during which the operation means A vibrates may be constant, or may be different depending on whether or not the operation means B is operated and the operation timing.

The upper example shown in FIG. 13D is an example in which the final judgment effect is started in response to the operation of the operation means A. The final judge effect is a judge related to whether or not a big hit will be made in the variation display during the decorative symbol variation display, or a judge indicating the end of the reach production (the final stage reach production such as strong SP reach). There is. In this upper example,
The period during which the operating means A vibrates is a period in which the operation of the operating means A is treated as valid. When the operating means A is operated, the vibration is finished and the final judgment effect is started. Therefore, if the operation of the operation means A is delayed, the period L1 between the vibration start timing of the operation means A and the start timing of the final judge effect becomes longer, and the period during which the operation means A vibrates becomes longer. Even when the operation means A is not operated, the final judgment effect is started. In this case, the period L1 is the longest and has a certain period length.

  On the other hand, in the lower example shown in FIG. 13D, the final judge effect is started in response to the operation of the operation unit B, and the vibration of the operation unit A is also started. Therefore, the vibration start timing of the operating means A and the start timing of the final judge effect are simultaneous, and the period length between them is zero. However, the period during which the operating means A vibrates can be secured for a certain period. The final judge effect here also corresponds to an example of the first effect, is a notice effect that does not use the operation of the operation means A (chance button 136), and is not a notice effect related to the operation means A (chance button 136).

  In addition, while the final judgment effect is started in response to the operation of the operation unit B, the vibration of the operation unit A is started by operating the operation unit A after the operation unit B is operated. As in the example, if the operation of the operation means A is delayed, the period between the start timing of the final judgment effect and the vibration start timing of the operation means A becomes longer, and the period during which the operation means A vibrates becomes longer.

  Next, effects applicable to the present embodiment will be described.

  FIG. 14 is a diagram showing step-by-step notice icon increase effects applicable to the present embodiment. In the effect example shown in FIG. 14, when the notice icon is stocked, the stock notice icon is displayed in an enlarged manner.

  In FIG. 14, a family crest character 224E as one of the effect movable bodies is shown below the first decorative symbol display device 208L. A family crest member 224E shown in FIG. 14A is located at the initial position. In addition, the Yatsushiro character 224Fa and the general character 224Fb shown in FIG. 14A are also located at the initial position.

  As shown in FIG. 14A, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows a state in which the UI unit UI1 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen. The UI unit UI1 has a hold icon display area on the left side where four hold icons can be displayed in a substantially rectangular display frame, and four notice icons are displayed in a substantially square display frame on the upper right side. A notice icon display area that can be displayed on the right is formed in the upper right, and a tutorial display section TT5 is formed below the notice icon display area. The variable icon display area is displayed at a position above the UI unit UI1 and close to the hold icon display area. More specifically, the variable icon display area is arranged above the display frame in which the first hold icon h11 is displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 14 (a), since three variable displays in FIG. 1 are held, three hold icons h11, h12, and h13 are displayed in the hold icon display area. Note that the variable icon h0, the first hold icon h11, and the second hold icon h12 are all in the default display mode, but the third hold icon h13 is displayed in the display mode of the pre-reading notice. Yes. In addition, in the tutorial display section TT5 shown in FIG. 14A, “Tono-sama is Yatsushiro Shogun” is displayed. In addition, two pseudo-continuous notice icons I65 are stocked in the notice icon display area shown in FIG. 14 (a), both of which are referred to as a normal display form (in this production example, “first display form”). It may be displayed in (). In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed. Here, since the notice icon of the normal display mode displayed in the notice icon display area is located at a position separated from the display area of the decorative design, it does not overlap with the decorative design, and the decorative design is also displayed. Do not overlap. In addition, the notice icon of the normal display mode may be overlapped with the decorative design, or the decorative design may be overlapped.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 14A, “castle town” is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. In addition, a button image 136a is displayed in a default display form above the stage name display unit ST1, and the display form is changed when an operation of the effect button 136 is instructed. The button image 136a may be displayed constantly, or there may be a period during which it is not displayed. In addition, on the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a state where the Tono-sama character is on the stage is shown, and various actions are performed according to the progress of the game. In addition, in the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of special figures 1 and 2 and the fourth graphic of special figures 1 and 2 are also displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 14 (b), the third decorative symbol display device 208N starts the throwing animation of the bomb icon I61 by the Tono-sama character and shows that the Tono-sama character tries to throw the bomb icon I61. Has been.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 14C, a state in which the Tono-sama character has thrown the bomb icon I61 is shown.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 14D, the bomb icon I61 is displayed so as to move from the third decorative symbol display device 208N to the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Note that the bomb icon I61 overlaps with the decorative symbol that is displayed in a variable manner, but the bomb icon I61 may overlap the decorative symbol that is displayed as a variable symbol.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 14E, the bomb icon I61 thrown by the Tono-sama character reaches the display frame in which the third notice icon in the notice icon display area is stocked and bursts. At this time, the effect image representing the explosion of the bomb icon I61 overlaps the display frame in which the third notice icon in the notice icon display area is stocked, and the third notice icon in the notice icon display area is stocked. At least part of the displayed display frame is difficult to view. The size of the effect image of the ruptured bomb icon I61 is large enough to cover at least the display frame in which the third notice icon in the notice icon display area is stocked. This notifies the user that the third notice icon will be stocked. In the example shown in FIG. 14E, the effect image of the bomb icon I61 is adjacent to a part of the character display displayed in the tutorial display section TT5 and the display frame of the hold display area where the bomb icon I61 has exploded. When the display frame to be displayed and the notice icon are stocked in the display frame, the display icon overlaps the notice icon.

  After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 14F, the effect image of the bomb icon I61 that has exploded is enlarged, and the display mode changes to a flame effect EF1 that covers the entire UI unit UI1 with flame. For this reason, the change icon h0, the hold icons h11, h12, h13 and the tutorial display part TT5 are also difficult to view together with the notice icon displayed on the UI part UI1. At this time, the UI unit UI1 may be hidden, or the UI unit UI1 may be displayed and the entire UI unit UI1 may be overlapped by the flame effect EF1. Further, the flame effect EF1 may cover only a part of the UI part UI1, make it possible to visually recognize at least part of the change icon h0, the hold icons h11, h12, h13 and the tutorial display part TT5. It may be difficult to see only.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 14G, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a notice icon enlargement animation is started. That is, at the timing shown in FIG. 14G, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the notice icon display frame YF formed by extracting the notice icon display area formed in the UI unit UI1 is a flame effect. A state of appearance from EF1 is displayed. At this time, in the notice icon display frame YF, two pseudo-continuous notice icons I65 are displayed in a display frame in which the first notice icon is stocked and a display frame in which the second notice icon is stocked. In the display frame in which the third notice icon is stocked, a swordsman notice icon I62 is newly displayed to notify that the swordsman notice icon I62 has been stocked. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 14G, the notice icon display frame YF is displayed larger than the notice icon display area formed in the UI unit UI1, and the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display frame YF is These are enlarged and displayed with respect to the normal display mode in accordance with the size of the notice icon display frame YF. Thereby, the player may be able to easily recognize that the swordsman notice icon I62 has been stocked.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 14 (h), the notice icon display frame YF moves toward the center of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L and is further enlarged and displayed. A part of the left side of the display frame in which the icons are stocked and a part of the right side of the display frame in which the fourth notice icon is stocked are displayed so as to be outside the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The In addition, the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display frame YF are further enlarged and displayed in accordance with the size of the notice icon display frame YF. This makes it difficult to visually recognize at least a part of the pseudo-continuous notice icon I65 displayed in the display frame in which the first notice icon is stocked. Furthermore, at the timing shown in FIG. 14 (h), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208 overlap the front sides of the left and right end portions of the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208, respectively. Therefore, a part of the notice icon display frame YF displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is further difficult to view. That is, it can be said that at least a part of the pseudo-continuous notice icon I65 displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is overlapped by the second decorative symbol display device 208M and is difficult to view. In addition, the notice icon display frame YF is displayed so as to overlap at least a part of the decorative symbol being displayed in a variable manner, so that it may be easier to understand that the notice icon has been stocked. In other words, it can be said that the notice icon displayed in an enlarged manner may overlap the decorative design. Note that the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display frame YF may be displayed so as to overlap the decorative design. Also, in this effect example, when an effect in which the notice icon is stocked is performed, the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display frame is displayed with priority over other indications (for example, notice display) (overlapping). However, the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display frame may be overlapped with another notice display.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 14 (i), the notice icon display frame YF is enlarged to the maximum size, and the notice icon enlargement animation ends. A display frame in which a third notice icon with a swordsman notice icon I62 is displayed is displayed in the approximate center of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The notice icon displayed in the notice icon display frame YF is also enlarged and displayed up to the maximum size. That is, the stocked swordsman notice icon I62 and the already stocked pseudo-continuous notice icon I65 are displayed in an enlarged display form (in this example, “first display”) that is larger in size than the normal display form (first display form). It may be referred to as “second display mode”). At this time, a part of the display frame in which the second notice icon adjacent to the display frame in which the third notice icon is stocked and a part of the display frame in which the fourth notice icon is stocked are displayed. Are displayed so as to be outside the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. As a result, at least part of the pseudo-continuous notice icon I65 displayed in the display frame in which the second notice icon is stocked is difficult to view. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 14 (i), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208 overlap each other on the front side of the left and right end portions of the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208. Therefore, a part of the notice icon display frame YF displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is further difficult to view. That is, at least a part of the pseudo-continuous notice icon I65 in the display frame in which the second notice icon displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is stocked is overlapped by the second decorative symbol display device 208M and visually recognized. It can be said that it is difficult. Furthermore, in other words, it can be said that a part of the already stocked pseudo-continuous notice icon I65 is visible in a state where the third notice icon is in an enlarged display mode. In addition, since the display frame in which the first notice icon is stocked is entirely outside the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, it is displayed in the display frame in which the first notice icon is stocked. The pseudo-continuous notice icon I65 is not displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 14 (j), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a notice icon reduction animation is started. That is, at the timing shown in FIG. 14 (j), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the notice icon display frame YF is reduced and the notice icon display area formed in the UI unit UI1 is displayed. The display that moves toward is done. In addition, the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display frame YF are also reduced and displayed in accordance with the size of the notice icon display frame YF. At this time, the entire display frame in which the second notice icon is stocked is completely displayed within the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. That is, the pseudo-continuous notice icon I65 displayed in the display frame in which the second notice icon is stocked is completely displayed, and is easily visible. Further, a part of the display frame in which the first notice icon is stocked is in the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the pseudo-continuous displayed in the display frame in which the first notice icon is stocked. A part of the notice icon I65 is visible. That is, in this effect example, in the notice icon reduction animation, the notice icon outside the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208L is gradually visible. In other words, it can be said that the number of notice icons that can be visually recognized is increased by the notice icon reduction animation.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 14 (k), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the reduced animation of the notice icon display frame YF continues. That is, at the timing shown in FIG. 14 (k), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the notice icon display frame YF is further reduced, and the notice icon display area formed in the UI unit UI1 is displayed. The display that moves toward is done. In addition, the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display frame YF are also reduced and displayed in accordance with the size of the notice icon display frame YF. At this time, the notice icon display frame YF is entirely within the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the notice icons (two pseudo-continuous notice icons I65 and I65) displayed in the notice icon display frame YF are displayed. All the swordsman notice icons I62) are visible. That is, it can be said that although the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display frame YF is displayed in an enlarged manner with respect to the normal display mode, all of the notice icons are visible.

  Thereafter, the notice icon reduction animation ends at the timing shown in FIG. That is, as shown in FIG. 14 (l), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the notice icon display frame YF is erased, and the flame effect EF1 overlapped with the notice icon display frame YF is also erased. UI part UI1 is displayed again. At this time, the notice icon display area shows that the swordsman notice icon I62 is stocked in addition to the two pseudo-continuous notice icons I65. Also, in the tutorial display section TT5, what was displayed as "Tono-sama is a general of Yatsushiro" has been changed to "Panda is a master of Tosama". Here, after the notice icon display frame YF is erased, the flame effect EF1 may be erased, or after the flame effect EF1 is erased, the notice icon display frame YF may be erased. The icon display frame YF and the flame effect EF1 may be erased simultaneously. Further, the display change of the tutorial display section TT5 may be a timing before the flame effect EF1 is erased or may be a timing after the flame effect EF1 is erased. Moreover, the display change of the tutorial display part TT5 does not need to be performed. Further, the change icon and the hold icon may be displayed at a timing between the timing shown in FIG. 14 (k) and the timing shown in FIG. 14 (l). In this case, a configuration may be adopted in which the increase in the number of holdings is firmly reflected.

  In this production example, the case where the third notice icon is stocked has been described. For example, when the first notice icon is stocked, when the notice icon enlargement animation described above ends, Since the display frame in which the first notice icon in the notice icon display frame YF is stocked is the center of the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the left end portion of the notice icon display frame YF is visible, In the area on the left side of the left end portion of the notice icon display frame YF in the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the background display appears. In this case, since there is no notice icon that is outside the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, no notice icon that is difficult to view is generated.

  In this example, when the notice icon is stocked, the notice icon enlargement animation and the notice icon reduction animation are performed to produce the notice icon stock. For example, a fire effect EF1 is displayed. After that, the notice icon display frame YF may be displayed as shown in FIG. 14 (i) without passing through the notice icon enlargement animation. For example, the notice icon display frame YF may be displayed as shown in FIG. After the display as shown in i), the UI part UI1 is displayed as shown in FIG. 14 (l) without passing through the notice icon reduction animation, and the notice icon stocked this time is added to the hold icon display area. May be displayed.

  Moreover, in this production example, the stocked notice icon is displayed in the normal display mode by the reduced animation after being enlarged and displayed. For example, the notice icon is digested in the state of being enlarged and displayed. In some cases, the notice icon may be digested without being displayed in a normal display mode.

  Also, in this production example, when the notice icon is stocked, the notice icon enlargement animation is performed to display the stock notice icon in an enlarged manner. However, when the notice icon is digested, as described above, The notice icon to be digested is enlarged (displayed in the second display mode) and then digested, or the digest icon is enlarged (displayed in the second display form) when digested. You may do it.

  Further, in this effect example, a part of the notice icon enlargement animation that is performed when stocking the notice icon may be canceled due to the stock trigger. For example, in the notice icon stock by the character's action (for example, a throwing animation of the bomb icon I61 by Tono-sama character), if it is performed immediately before the stop display of the decorative symbol, a part is canceled (for example, the second half part) May be canceled), for example, it may not be canceled in the stock of the notice icon due to the stop of the special symbol such as the pseudo-continuous symbol.

  Further, the display mode of the enlarged display may be different depending on the number of already-announced notice icons and the number of the previously-stocked notice icons. Further, the enlarged display mode may be the same regardless of the number of the notice icons.

  In addition, when the hold is increased while the notice icon is enlarged, an effect image is displayed, an LED (for example, an LED provided at the start port) is flashed, or an effect sound is output. There may be. This may be performed, for example, at the time of increase in the hold that is a target of prefetching at the time of starting winning. Even if the hold is increased when the notice icon is enlarged, an effect image is displayed, an LED (for example, an LED provided at the start port) is flashed, or an effect sound is output. Or the like, and the display mode of the hold icon may be changed after the enlarged display of the notice icon is completed. In this way, the player notices the change in the display mode of the hold icon. Sometimes it can be made easier.

  Further, when the notice icon is enlarged and displayed, the variable icon and the hold icon may also be enlarged and displayed. In this case, if the hold increases during the enlarged display of the notice icon, the hold increase animation may not be performed.

  In the description so far, when the notice icon is composed of characters (for example, “chance”, “extreme heat”, “SP”, “pseudo-ream”, etc.), it may be called a notice text.

  Next, an example of the structure of the effect device 206 in the game board 200 applicable in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 15 is a schematic explanatory diagram showing an example of the structure of the effect device 206 in the game board 200 applicable in the present embodiment.

  In FIG. 15, among the three decorative symbol display devices 208208L to 208N, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are not shown, and only the first decorative symbol display device 208L is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 15 (a-1), in the game board 200 applicable to the present embodiment, on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, substantially parallel to the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. An extended plate-like transparent protective member CL is provided. For example, the transparent protective member CL is formed so as to rise from the rear end of the stage 244, and a rib RB is formed at the upper end, and protrudes forward substantially along the shape of the stage 244. The transparent protective member CL covers about 1/3 below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the player visually recognizes the display state of the first decorative symbol display device 208L through the transparent protective member CL. It is possible. The rib RB prevents the game ball jumping into the stage 244 from jumping over the transparent protective member CL and deviating backward, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the transparent protective member There is a case where it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a malfunction by colliding with a production movable body or the like disposed between CL.

  FIG. 15A-2 shows a state where the effect display 206 shown in FIG. 15A-1 is applied and the effect display is performed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. A family crest member 224E as one of the effect movable bodies is disposed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and is displaced between the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the transparent protective member CL. It is configured to be possible. As shown in FIG. 15 (a-2), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a UI part is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and the UI unit has a square variation icon h0 at the center thereof. The hold icon is displayed in a form accommodated in the hold display frame FL1, and a hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed is formed on the left side of the change icon h0. At the timing shown in FIG. 15 (a-2), since two variable displays in FIG. 1 are held, two hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the hold icon display area. Note that the change icon h0 and the first hold icon h11 are both in the default display mode, but the second hold icon h12 is in the default display mode but is displayed in a blinking manner. It is the display mode of the notice. A tutorial display section TT1 is arranged on the right side of the variation icon h0, and the display content is updated at an appropriate timing. Note that the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 15A-2 is in a non-display state. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed. The UI portion is preferentially displayed during the variable display of the first decorative symbol, and is provided in a region that does not overlap the display region of the first decorative symbol. It may overlap. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 15A-2, the Chibi princess character CH1 is displayed together with the balloon TT2 on the left side of the display screen, and the spider character GY1 is displayed on the right side of the display screen. A balloon part TT3 is also displayed. In the balloon part TT2, a line “Where is the bag?” Is displayed, and in the balloon part TT3, a line “here is” is displayed. Note that the balloons TT2 and TT3 are overlapped with the decorative symbols that are being displayed in a variable manner, and are in a state that is difficult to visually recognize compared with the state that they are not overlapped with the decorative symbols that are being displayed in a variable manner. Further, a part of the UI portion (the hold display frame FL1 and the change icons h0 and hold icons h11 and h12 displayed in the hold display frame FL1) and the princess Chibi character CH1 overlap the transparent protective member CL, and are transparent. The visibility may be lower than when the protective member CL does not overlap.

  FIG. 15 (a-3) shows a state in which the family crest member 224E rises and overlaps the first decorative symbol display device 208L. At this time, the range of the hold display frame FL1 is enlarged so as to extend upward, and the ninja character NJ1 is displayed in the enlarged portion. At the timing shown in FIG. 15 (a-3), a part of the ninja character NJ1 is overlapped with the family crest character 224E.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 15 (a-4), the family crest actor 224E returns to the initial position below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the overlap state with respect to the first decorative symbol display device 208L is eliminated. . Therefore, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 15 (a-4), the variation icon h0 and the ninja character NJ1 are displayed side by side in the up-down direction in the expanded display frame FL1. It is shown. Note that the balloon portion TT2 is overlapped with the extended portion of the extended display of the hold display frame FL1, and is difficult to see compared with the case where it is not overlapped with the extended portion of the extended display of the hold display frame FL1. The balloon portion TT3 is not overlapped because it is displayed above the hold display frame FL1. In addition, the decorative symbols during the variable display are overlapped with the hold display frame FL1, and a part thereof is difficult to visually recognize compared with the case where the decorative symbols are not overlapped with the hold display frame FL1. In the present embodiment, since the hold display frame FL1 is expanded and displayed upward, it is possible to display up above the transparent protective member CL, and thus the visibility of the hold display frame FL1 may be improved.

  FIG. 15 (b-1) shows the state described above with reference to FIG. 15 (a-2), and FIG. The situation is schematically represented.

  As shown in FIG. 15 (b-1a), between the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the transparent protective member CL, in addition to the above-mentioned family crest character 224E, the size and the size of the first decorative symbol display device 208L are substantially the same. A light guide plate IL having the same size is disposed. The light guide plate IL is disposed on the front side (that is, the player side) of the family crest member 224E. In the state shown in FIG. 15 (b-1), the family crest character 224E is retracted below the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Since the player is configured as described above, a part of the first decorative symbol display device 208L is visually recognized only through the light guide plate IL, and the other part is the transparent protective member CL and the light guide plate IL. It will be visually recognized through.

  Here, the light guide plate IL is formed by stacking two layers of panels in the depth direction, and a predetermined lens cut is applied to the transmission region of each layer. Light emitting means such as LEDs are provided at appropriate positions near the side edges of each layer of the light guide plate IL, and light from the light emitter is reflected forward by the lens cut portion, so that the transmission region has a predetermined pattern. It is configured so that it can appear as if it is emitting light. For example, the first layer panel arranged on the front side is subjected to a lens cut of a pattern, and the second layer panel arranged on the back side of the first layer panel has a predetermined effect image. A lens cut that mimics the pattern is applied. In addition, the number of layers of the light guide plate IL is not limited to two, and may be one or three or more. Here, in the case of being configured with one layer, for example, the pattern formed on the light guide plate when light is emitted may be changed by changing the lens cut pattern.

  FIG. 15 (b-2) shows the state described above with reference to FIG. 15 (a-3). FIG. 15 (b-2a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line BB in FIG. 15 (b-2). The situation is schematically represented.

  As shown in FIG. 15 (b-2a), the family crest character 224E is interposed between the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the light guide plate IL, and the crest character 224E is guided to the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The first decorative symbol display device 208L is difficult to visually recognize as compared with the case where it is not interposed between the optical plate IL and the optical plate IL.

  FIG. 15 (b-3) shows the state described above with reference to FIG. 15 (a-4). FIG. 15 (b-3a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line CC of FIG. 15 (b-3). The situation is schematically represented.

  As shown in FIG. 15 (b-3a), since the family crest character 224E has moved below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the player can recognize that the family crest character 224E is connected to the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the light guide plate. Compared with the case of interposing between the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the IL, the display state of the first decorative symbol display device 208L is easily visible through the transparent protective member CL and the light guide plate IL.

  FIG. 15C-1 and FIG. 15C-2 are diagrams illustrating an example of a layer configuration in which an image displayed on the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L is arranged.

  As shown in FIG. 15 (c-1), the above-described hold display frame FL1 is arranged in the first layer layer LY1. Further, in the example illustrated in FIG. 15C-2, the second layer arranged behind the first layer layer LY1 with respect to the portion (extended portion) that extends upward in the hold display frame FL1. Arranged in the layer LY2. Note that a ninja character NJ1 displayed in the extended portion of the hold display frame FL1 is also arranged in the second layer layer LY2. That is, it can be said that the extended portion of the hold display frame FL1 has a low display priority. Here, another layer LY3 is formed between the parts arranged in the two layers constituting the hold display frame FL1, and for example, a serif notice, a decorative symbol, a notice display (for example, an arrow flying display) Or any other display can be displayed. Further, the extended portion of the hold display frame FL1 is also displayed on the first layer layer LY1 (or the second layer layer LY2) so that parts do not straddle two or more layers and are configured as one image data. It may be.

  The display mode of the UI unit may be configured so as to be different depending on the production mode (hereinafter referred to as “production stage, etc.”) depending on the production stage and the gaming state.

  In addition, at least a part of the production stage or the like may be selectable by the player's operation, or may change according to the progress of the game (for example, every fluctuation). Also good.

  In addition, the operation of “the hold display frame FL1 is expanded and displayed upward” which is a characteristic operation of the present invention is at least a part of an effect stage (for example, an effect stage in a non-electric support state, It may be performed at a part of the stage or the like that can be selected by the player while the setting screen is displayed during the change, or may be performed at all stage stages or the like.

  Next, another specific example of effects executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.

  16 to 31 are diagrams showing stepwise modifications of effects centered on the decorative symbol display device of the pachinko machine 100 applicable to the present embodiment. 16 to 31, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the first special figure reservation lamp 218, the second special figure reservation lamp 220, and the universal figure reservation. The lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a are not shown. In addition, FIGS. 16 to 27, 29, and 31 show examples in which three decorative symbol display devices are arranged side by side. That is, the first decorative symbol display device 208L disposed at the center of the three decorative symbol display devices, the second decorative symbol display device 208M disposed on the left side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the first decoration. The display is performed by the third decorative symbol display device 208N arranged on the right side of the symbol display device 208L. The first decorative symbol display device 208L may be referred to as a main display device, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be referred to as sub-display devices. The length in the width direction of 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N is shorter than the half of the length of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the height is slightly shorter. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M has its right end side portion overlapped with the front side of the left end side portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N has the left end side portion thereof as the first end portion. One decorative symbol display device 208N overlaps the front side of the right end side portion. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are configured to be slidable in directions close to each other along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N can rotate integrally along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L when they are closest to each other. It is configured to be able to. The names of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are not necessarily displayed in a variable manner with respect to each display device. However, it is added here just in case that the interpretation of the display device is not narrowed. Further, a combination of these decorative symbol display devices (first decorative symbol display device 208L, second decorative symbol display device 208M, and third decorative symbol display device 208N) is used as an effect display means, and the effect display means is a decoration symbol. It is also possible to display various fluctuations or to display a plurality of types of effects. Further, a transparent light guide plate IL is disposed on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the player can visually recognize the display state of the first decorative symbol display device 208L via the light guide plate IL. ing. The light guide plate IL has a predetermined lens cut in the transmission region. A light emitter such as an LED is provided at an appropriate position near the side edge of the light guide plate IL, and light from the light emitter is reflected forward by the lens cut portion, so that the transmission region emits light in a predetermined pattern. It is structured so that it can look like. In the embodiment shown in FIGS. 16 to 31, the light guide plate IL is subjected to a lens cut having a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image. The light guide plate IL is configured such that the thickness of the portion of the region where light is refracted toward the player side is thinner than the thickness of the irradiated light. Therefore, the display states of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be easily visible. Further, the light guide plate IL may be movable. The light guide plate IL may be provided on the near side of at least one of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. In addition, in FIGS. 16 to 27 and FIGS. 29 to 31, the speaker 120 and the effect button 136 are shown.

  FIG. 16 is a diagram showing step by step an example of a hold change notice effect as a pre-reading notice effect with a hold icon applicable to the present embodiment, and FIG. 17 shows a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 16 (a), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a user interface (UI) part is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and the UI part has a variation icon h0 at the center thereof. It is displayed in a form accommodated in a square-shaped hold display frame FL1, and a hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed is formed on the left side of the fluctuation icon h0. Yes. In a broad sense, the entire UI unit may be interpreted as a holding icon base. At the timing shown in FIG. 16 (a), since two variable displays in FIG. 1 are held, two hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the hold icon display area. The change icon h0 and the two hold icons h11 and h12 are both in the default display mode. Further, a tutorial display section TT1 as an explanation display section is arranged on the right side of the variation icon h0, and various information relating to games and effects is displayed (tutorial display), and the contents are updated at an appropriate timing. Is done. In the tutorial display portion TT1 shown in FIG. 16A, “Tono-sama is a general of Yatsushiro” is displayed, and explanations regarding Tono-sama's character are made. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed. The UI portion is preferentially displayed during the variable display of the first decorative symbol, and is provided in a region that does not overlap the display region of the first decorative symbol. It may overlap. Here, the explanation display section (or explanation display area) may be a place where a certain thing is displayed in addition to the pattern of the place itself. Specifically, when the stage name is displayed in red and the stage name is displayed in red in a configuration in which the stage name is hot when moving to a certain stage, the display may be an explanatory display instead of a notice. In other words, when the normal stage name is displayed in white, it is not hot as compared with the red stage name display, and this may be a kind of notice.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 as an explanation display unit for displaying the name of the stage and reach currently being performed is arranged at the bottom of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 16A, “Castle Town” is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. In addition, a button image 136a is displayed in a default display form above the stage name display unit ST1, and the display form is changed when an operation of the effect button 136 is instructed. The button image 136a may be displayed constantly, or there may be a period during which it is not displayed. In addition, the UI unit may be always displayed or there may be a period during which it is not displayed. In addition, on the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a state where the Tono-sama character is on the stage is shown, and various actions are performed according to the progress of the game. Further, in the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of the special drawings 1 and 2 and the fourth symbol of the special drawings 1 and 2 are displayed. Note that the Tono-sama character may or may not be displayed at all times.

  Also, a family crest member 224E, which is one of the effect movable bodies, is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and is configured to move in the vertical direction according to the effect contents. ing. Further, the family crest member 224E includes a light emitting means such as a full color LED, and can emit light in various light emission modes depending on the contents of the production. In addition, above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an Yatsushiro character 224Fa and a general character 224Fb, which are one of the effect movable bodies, are arranged, and each moves in the vertical direction according to the effect contents. It is configured to be able to. In addition, the Yatsushiro character 224Fa and the shogun character 224Fb each have a built-in light emitting means such as a full color LED, and can emit light in various light emission modes according to the contents of the production.

  Subsequently, when a game ball wins the first special figure starting port 230 at the timing shown in FIG. 16B, the third hold icon h13 (third hold icon in FIG. 1) is displayed in the hold icon display area. ) Is displayed, and it is notified that the number of holds has become three. Here, the third hold is a hold of the symbol variation display that is a target of prefetching. However, in this effect example, the third hold icon h13 is displayed in the default display mode at the timing shown in FIG.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 16C, the hold icon h13 of the third special figure 1 in the hold icon display area changes to a pre-read notice display form (for example, a display form blinking in white). At this time, a sound output “picone” is output from the speaker 120 to notify that a pre-reading notice is made by a hold display. Note that audio output from the speaker 120 may be performed before the display mode of the hold icon h13 is changed, or the display mode of the hold icon h13 is changed before audio output from the speaker 120. May be. In this case, it may be configured to always be performed at any timing, or may be configured so that the timing differs depending on the case. Further, the timing of changing the display mode of the hold icon h13 and the timing of outputting the sound from the speaker 120 may be the same timing. In addition, on the left side of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a balloon portion TT2 as a second tutorial display portion (explanation display portion) is displayed together with the character CH1 of Princess Chibi. The Chibi princess character CH1 and the speech balloon TT2 are displays that may be displayed when a conversation effect (or speech effect) is performed, such as a tutorial display (description display) or a notice display. At the timing shown in FIG. 16 (c), an explanation display “This change is ...” is made on the balloon portion TT 2, and a suggestion regarding the advance notice performed in the pachinko machine 100 is made. The balloon part TT2 is overlapped with the first decorative symbol, but may be arranged at a position where it does not overlap. Further, Princess Chibi character CH1 and balloon part TT2 may be displayed at the same timing, balloon part TT2 may be displayed after Princess Chibi character CH1 is displayed, and balloon part TT2 is displayed. After being done, Princess Chibi character CH1 may be displayed. In this case, it may be configured to always be performed at any timing, or may be configured so that the timing differs depending on the case.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 16D, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows a state in which a plurality of arrows descend from the upper right to the lower left of the display screen. The plurality of arrows appear as a notice display, and are overlapped with the decorative pattern being displayed in a variable manner. In addition, the balloon part TT2 is changed to an explanation display "Maybe ...". Here, the timing at which the display of the plurality of arrows may be the timing before the explanation display of the balloon portion TT2 is changed, or the timing after the explanation display of the balloon portion TT2 is changed. Alternatively, it may be the same timing as the timing at which the explanation display of the balloon TT2 is changed. In this case, it may be configured to always be performed at any timing, or may be configured so that the timing differs depending on the case. In addition, the Chibi princess character CH1 and the balloon TT2 are overlapped by a plurality of arrows, but may be overlapped by a plurality of arrows. In the tutorial display portion TT1, it is not displayed. Note that the timing at which the tutorial display unit TT1 is not displayed may be the timing after the display of the balloon unit TT2 is changed, or the timing before the display of the balloon unit TT2 is changed. Also good. Further, it may be the same timing as the timing when the explanation display of the tutorial display portion TT1 is erased and the timing when the display of the balloon portion TT2 is changed. In this case, it may be configured to always be performed at any timing, or may be configured so that the timing differs depending on the case.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 16 (e), the first decorative symbol display device 208 </ b> L shows a state where the left symbol is stopped and displayed as “decoration 6”. It should be noted that the left symbol stopped and displayed as “decoration 6” is displayed so as to overlap a part of Princess Chibi's character CH1 and the balloon portion TT2. Further, the plurality of arrows are displayed so as to pierce the right side of the second decorative symbol display device 208M.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 16 (f), the first decorative symbol display device 208 </ b> L shows a state where the right symbol is stopped and displayed as “decoration 2”. The plurality of arrows and the Princess Chibi character CH1 are deleted. The timing at which the arrows are erased may be after the princess Chibi character CH1 is erased, may be before the princess Chibi character CH1 is erased, or the princess Chibi character CH1 is erased. It may be the same timing as the timing. In this case, it may be configured to always be performed at any timing, or may be configured so that the timing differs depending on the case.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 16 (g), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, after the middle symbol is stopped and displayed as “decoration 2”, the combination of the ornament symbols “decoration 6-decoration 2—decoration 2” is combined. After shaking fluctuation is performed, the display result of the loss is confirmed. In addition, the second decorative symbol that has been variably displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M is also stopped and displayed in the combination of “decoration 6-decoration 2-decoration 2” at the timing of the first decorative symbol confirmation stop display. . At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 may be erased or may remain displayed. Moreover, you may comprise so that it may erase | eliminate before the fluctuation variation state of a decoration design is started.

  FIG. 17 (a) shows a state in which the symbol stop display is continued from FIG. 16 (g).

  Then, when the symbol variation in the first special figure display device 212 is started, as shown in FIG. 17B, the hold icons h11, h12, and h13 are moved and displayed by the movement animation, respectively, and the first hold icon h11 is displayed. The hold icon at the display position is accommodated in the hold display frame FL1 where the change icon is displayed and becomes the change icon h0, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 is the first hold icon h11. Thus, the hold icon at the display position of the third hold icon h13 becomes the second hold icon h12, and each moves onto the corresponding pedestal. In addition, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 17B starts the variable display of the first decorative symbol, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M starts the variable display of the second decorative symbol. Is done. In the tutorial display section TT1, the characters “Panda is a master of the panda” are displayed. Here, the display of the tutorial display unit TT1 may be the timing after the decorative symbol variation display starts, the same timing as the start of the decorative symbol variation display, or the decoration symbol variation. It may be a timing before the start of display. In this case, it may be configured to always be performed at any timing, or may be configured so that the timing differs depending on the case.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 17 (c), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, on the left side of the display screen, a balloon part TT2 as a second tutorial display part (explanation display part) is displayed together with the character CH1 of Princess Chibi. It is displayed. The speech balloon TT2 is displayed with a dialogue “Where is the bag?”, And a conversation notice is started. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, it is shown that a plurality of arrows again fall from the upper right to the lower left of the display screen. As described above, the plurality of arrows may function as a continuous notice performed in a plurality of times of symbol variation display. In this example, as in FIG. 16C, the princess Chibi character CH1 is displayed, but other characters may be displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 17 (d), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a balloon part TT3 as a third tutorial display part (explanation display part) is displayed on the right side of the display screen together with a spear character GY1. ing. The samurai character GY1 and the speech balloon TT3 are displays that may be displayed when a conversation effect (or a speech effect) is performed, such as a tutorial display (description display) or a notice display. At the timing shown in FIG. 17 (d), in response to the line display by Princess Chibi's character CH1, the line display “here is” is displayed in the speech balloon TT3, and the conversation announcement continues. Here, the samurai character GY1 and the speech balloon TT3 are overlapped by the first decorative symbol, but the samurai character GY1 and the speech balloon TT3 may be overlapped by the first decorative symbol. Further, the frog character GY1 and the balloon portion TT3 may be arranged at a position that does not overlap the first decorative symbol. The spear character GY1 and the balloon part TT3 may be displayed at the same timing, or after the spear character GY1 is displayed, the balloon part TT3 may be displayed, or the balloon part TT3 is displayed. A spear character GY1 may be displayed later. Further, the conversation announcement by the princess Chibi character CH1 and the samurai character GY1 may be performed by operating the effect button 136. In the tutorial display portion TT1, it is not displayed. Note that the timing at which the tutorial display portion TT1 is not displayed may be the timing after the spear character GY1 is displayed, or the timing before the spear character GY1 is displayed. Also good. Further, the timing at which the explanation display on the tutorial display portion TT1 is erased may be the same as the timing at which the frog character GY1 is displayed. In this case, it may be configured to always be performed at any timing, or may be configured so that the timing differs depending on the case. Further, the plurality of arrows are displayed so as to pierce the right side of the second decorative symbol display device 208M.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 17 (e), the crest character 224E is lifted from the initial position and overlapped with the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. More specifically, the family crest member 224E completely covers the hold display frame FL1 after movement, and also includes a part of the first hold icon h11, a part of the tutorial display part TT1, and one of the balloon parts TT2. Each part is covered.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 17 (f), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an extended animation (extended animation) of the hold display frame FL1 is performed, the hold display frame FL1 is expanded upward, and the family crest actor 224E. A state of appearing above is shown. That is, it can be said that the portion where the hold display frame FL1 is not overlapped with the family crest member 224E appears. Further, the expanded hold display frame FL1 overlaps the balloon part TT2 and overlaps the balloon part TT2, but does not overlap the balloon part TT3 and does not overlap. That is, in this effect example, there is a case where the speech notice (balloon portion TT3) displayed later does not overlap even if the hold display frame FL1 is expanded. As described above, the display mode of the extended hold display frame FL1 may be referred to as an extended display mode. In this production example, the hold display frame FL1 before expansion and the hold display frame FL1 after expansion are shown, but the extended animation includes one in which the hold display frame FL1 expands in stages.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 17 (g), the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows the appearance of the ninja character NJ1 in the upper part of the hold display frame FL1. Note that the ninja character NJ1 is partially overlapped with the family crest character 224E, and is more difficult to view than when the crest character 224E is not partially overlapped.

  FIG. 17 (h) shows a state in which the family crest actor 224E descends toward the initial position. As a result, a portion of the ninja character NJ1 that is not overlapped with the family crest member 224E is enlarged, so that the visual recognition is easy. Further, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows a state where the ninja character NJ1 is throwing the shuriken SH1. The shuriken SH1 is moving toward the second hold icon h12 for which a pre-reading notice is being made. In addition, the effect display of the shuriken SH1 may be displayed on the front side than the display of the conversation notice by the Chibi princess character CH1 or the samurai character GY1, or may be displayed on the rear side. . It can be said that the performance by the ninja character NJ1 is performed in the expanded portion of the expanded display frame FL1. In other words, it can be said that the ninja character NJ1, which is an example of the effect display, is displayed in the expanded portion of the hold display frame FL1. In other words, the ninja character NJ1 is displayed in the area of the difference between the area in the hold display frame FL1 in the extended display mode and the area in the hold display frame FL1 in the default display mode. It can also be said. This effect by the ninja character NJ1 may function as an effect of pre-reading notice or change notice. The effect display by the shuriken SH1 is related to the effect performed in the expanded hold display frame FL1 (the effect by the ninja character NJ1), but it can be said that the effect is performed outside the hold display frame FL1.

  Thereafter, in FIG. 17 (i), the crest member 224E is returned to the initial position. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a state where the shuriken SH1 is heading toward the second hold icon h12 is shown. As shown in FIG. 17 (i), the area in the frame of the hold display frame FL1 in the extended display mode includes the area in the frame of the hold display frame FL1 in the default display mode. In other words, it can be said that the hold display frame FL1 in the extended display mode is a display mode in which the area of the area in the frame of the hold display frame FL1 in the default display mode is increased.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 17 (j), the first decorative symbol display device 208L displays the effect EF2 in which the shuriken SH1 overlaps the second hold icon h12 and the second hold icon h12 explodes. ing. The effect EF2 makes it difficult to visually recognize the entire second hold icon h12, and also overlaps a part of the adjacent first hold icon h11. Thereby, there is a case where the player can have a sense of expectation that the display mode of the second hold icon h12 may change to increase the reliability of the big hit.

  Thereafter, FIG. 17 (k) shows a state in which the emission color of the family crest character 224E changes from white to green. That is, it can be said that the advance notification is made that the display color of the second hold icon h12 changes from white to green. In other words, a predetermined light emitting means (an LED built in the family crest member 224E, an LED provided at a special drawing start port, etc.) is held on the hold icon before the hold icon to be read ahead changes. It can be said that the mode is changed according to the mode after the change.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 17 (l), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the effect EF2 is deleted, and the second hold icon h12 is easily displayed again. At this time, the display mode of the second hold icon h12 is displayed in a mode of lighting in green. On the other hand, a sound “picone” is output from the speaker 120 to notify that the display mode of the hold icon has changed. Note that the sound output may be performed after the display mode of the hold icon h12 is changed, the display mode of the hold icon h12 may be changed after the sound output is performed, or the display of the hold icon h12 is displayed. The change of the aspect and the sound output may be performed simultaneously. In this case, it may be configured to always be performed at any timing, or may be configured so that the timing differs depending on the case.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 17 (m), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the ninja character NJ1 displayed in the hold display frame FL1 disappears, and then the hold display frame FL1 is shown in FIG. An animation display (reduction animation) is performed to reduce the image to the shape shown. The reduced animation may be performed without deleting the ninja character NJ1, and in this case, the ninja character NJ1 is displayed so as to move downward in accordance with the reduction of the hold display frame FL1, and the change icon h0 is displayed. It is also possible to erase the data finally by overlapping with each other.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 17 (n), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the reduced animation of the hold display frame FL1 ends, and the hold display frame FL1 becomes the default display mode.

  In the example of the above-described effects, the start timing of each effect such as Princess Chibi character CH1, Samurai character GY1, notice display of a plurality of arrows, family crest character 224E, decorative symbol variation display, expansion operation of hold display frame FL1, etc. The end timing can be performed in any combination.

  Further, in this effect example, a character (for example, ninja character NJ1) for changing the hold icon is displayed in the extended hold display frame FL1, but an image substantially the same as the changed hold icon is displayed. You may comprise, and you may comprise so that the image which respond | corresponds the hold icon after a change (corresponding to the hold icon after a change) may be displayed.

  Next, in the change effect of the display mode of the hold icon by the ninja character NJ1, an effect example when the change of the display mode of the hold icon fails will be described.

  FIG. 17 (i ′) corresponds to FIG. 17 (i), and has the same effect content as FIG. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 17 (j ′), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the shuriken SH1 overlaps the second hold icon h12, but the effect EF2 is not displayed and the shuriken SH1 is in the second hold. As shown in FIG. 17 (k ′), when the shuriken SH1 frames out of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the change in the display mode of the hold icon has failed. Directing. Therefore, the display mode of the second hold icon h12 remains white and flashing.

  FIG. 18 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the hold change notice effect. FIG. 18 shows a state in which an effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is performed in response to the stop display of the decorative symbol whose middle symbol is “change”. That is, it can be said that the decoration pattern of “change” is a display suggesting the contents of the effect.

  As shown in FIG. 18 (a), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a UI part is arranged at the lower part of the display screen. In this UI part, a change icon h0 is placed in the hold display frame FL1 in the center. It is displayed in the accommodated form, and on the left side of the variation icon h0 is formed a hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 18 (a), since two variable displays in FIG. 1 are held, two hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the hold icon display area. Note that the change icon h0 and the first hold icon h11 of the two hold icons are in the default display mode, but the second hold icon h12 is blinking in white and displays a prefetch notice. It is displayed in a manner. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, it is shown that the fluctuation varies with the combination of the decorative symbol “decoration 3-change-decoration 1”. At this time, the hold display frame FL1 is a default display mode and does not overlap the decorative design. Further, the tutorial display portion TT1 is not displayed.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 18A, “castle town” is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. In addition, a button image 136a is displayed in a default display form above the stage name display section ST1, and the second decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner at the top of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M. ing.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a state where the Tono-sama character is on the stage is shown, and in the upper part of the display screen, the second reserved number display of Special Fig. 1 and Special Fig. 2 and Special Fig. 1 are shown. And the 4th symbol of special figure 2 is displayed.

  In addition, the above-mentioned family crest character 224E is disposed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the above-mentioned eight-generation character 224Fa and the general character character 224Fb are disposed above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Has been.

  Thereafter, FIG. 18B shows a state in which the family crest character 224E is lifted from the initial position and overlaps the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. At this time, the family crest member 224E completely covers the hold display frame FL1, and also covers a part of the first hold icon h11, a part of the tutorial display part TT1, and a part of the middle symbol of “change”. Covering. Note that the family crest character 224E may not overlap the decorative design.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 18C, the first decorative symbol display device 208 shows a state in which the hold display frame FL1 extends upward and appears above the family crest member 224E. At this time, the expanded hold display frame FL1 overlaps the decorative symbol (the middle symbol of “change”). In other words, it can be said that the decorative symbol (the middle symbol of “change”) is overlapped with the expanded hold display frame FL1. Note that the expanded hold display frame FL1 may not overlap the decorative design.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 18D, the first decorative symbol display device 208 shows the appearance of the ninja character NJ1 in the upper part of the hold display frame FL1. Note that the ninja character NJ1 is partially overlapped with the family crest character 224E, and is difficult to view compared to the case where the character is not partially overlapped with the crest character 224E.

  FIG. 18E shows a state in which the family crest character 224E descends toward the initial position. As a result, a portion of the ninja character NJ1 that is not overlapped with the family crest member 224E is enlarged, so that the visual recognition is easy. Further, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows a state where the ninja character NJ1 is throwing the shuriken SH1. The shuriken SH1 is moving toward the second hold icon h12 for which a pre-reading notice is being made. That is, in this effect example, it can be said that the change effect of the display mode of the hold icon is started in a state where the display indicating the content of the effect (the decoration pattern of “change”) is overlapped.

  Thereafter, FIG. 18 (f) shows a state in which the family crest member 224E returns to the initial position. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a state where the shuriken SH1 is heading toward the second hold icon h12 is shown.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 18G, the first decorative symbol display device 208L displays the effect EF2 in which the shuriken SH1 overlaps with the second hold icon h12 and the second hold icon h12 explodes. ing. The effect EF2 makes it difficult to visually recognize the entire second hold icon h12, and also overlaps a part of the adjacent first hold icon h11.

  Thereafter, FIG. 18H shows a state in which the emission color of the family crest member 224E is changed from white to green.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 18 (i), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the effect EF2 is erased, and the second hold icon h12 is easily visible again compared to the state where the effect EF2 is not erased. Is displayed. At this time, the display mode of the second hold icon h12 is displayed in a mode of lighting in green. On the other hand, a sound “picone” is output from the speaker 120 to notify that the display mode of the hold icon has changed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 18 (j), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the ninja character NJ1 displayed in the hold display frame FL1 disappears, and then the reduced animation of the hold display frame FL1 is performed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 18 (k), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the reduced animation of the hold display frame FL1 ends, and the hold display frame FL1 becomes the default display mode. That is, the overlap with the decorative symbol by the hold display frame FL1 is eliminated, and the decorative symbol becomes easier to visually recognize as compared with the state in which the overlap with the decorative symbol by the hold display frame FL1 is not eliminated.

  FIG. 19 is a diagram showing a modification of the effect shown in FIG. In FIG. 19, the tutorial display portion TT1 is out of frame in normal times, and shows a state in which the tutorial is displayed from below when explanation display is performed. 19 (a) to 19 (n) are the same as FIGS. 17 (a) to 17 (n) except that the tutorial display unit TT1 performs an animation of frame-in and frame-out. Only the portion will be described, and description of the same contents as those in FIGS. 17A to 17N will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 19A, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the tutorial display portion TT1 is not displayed and is in a frame-out state.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 19 (b), the first decorative symbol display device 208L starts the frame-in animation (frame-in animation) of the tutorial display unit TT1 from the lower right side of the display screen. At the timing shown in FIG. 19 (c), the tutorial display portion TT1 is arranged at a predetermined display position, and a character display of “Panda is a master” is displayed on the tutorial display portion TT1. Note that the timing at which the character display of the tutorial display section TT1 is displayed may be the same as the completion of the frame-in animation, the timing after the completion of the frame-in animation, or the timing before the completion of the frame-in animation. It may be. In this case, it may be configured to always be performed at any timing, or may be configured so that the timing differs depending on the case. Further, the character display of “Panda is the Master of Panda” in the tutorial display portion TT1 is displayed until the frame-out animation (frame-out animation) of the tutorial display portion TT1 is started at the timing shown in FIG. For 5 seconds). Accordingly, as shown in FIG. 19 (e), when the family crest member 224E rises and overlaps a part of the tutorial display part TT1, a part of the character display displayed in the tutorial display part TT1 is displayed. May overlap.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 19 (f) to 19 (h), the tutorial display unit TT1 moves downward, and a frame-out animation is performed to frame out from the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The explanation display displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 may be deleted before the frame-out animation starts, or may be deleted at the timing when the frame-out animation starts, or the frame-out animation starts. It may be erased at a timing after that, or may be displayed until the frame out of the tutorial display portion TT1 is completed. In this case, it may be configured to always be performed at any timing, or may be configured so that the timing differs depending on the case. Further, the start timing of the frame-out animation may be the same as the start timing of the extended animation in the hold display frame FL1, may be the timing before the start of the extended animation, or the extended animation The timing may be later than the start. In this production example, the tutorial display unit TT1 can be said to be an example of the second extended display. For example, the tutorial display unit TT1 is the same as the extended hold display frame FL1 (in this presentation example, it may be an example of the first extended display) in that it is not overlapped with the decorative design. It can be said that it differs in that it does not overlap the notice, there are few overlapping areas, and the frequency of overlapping is low.

  FIG. 20 is a diagram showing another modified example of the effect shown in FIG. In FIG. 20, after the explanation display by the tutorial display unit TT1 is performed and out of the frame, the tutorial display unit TT1 enters the frame again, and the tutorial display unit TT1 performs a notice display. 20 (a) to 20 (n) are the same as those in FIG. 19 except that the tutorial display unit TT1 is framed in again after the tutorial display unit TT1 is out of frame, and the tutorial display unit TT1 displays a preview. Since it is the same as (a) to (n) in the figure, only different parts will be described, and description of the same contents as those in FIGS. 19 (a) to (n) will be omitted.

  After the effects shown in FIGS. 20A to 20H are performed, the first decorative symbol display device 208L performs the tutorial from the bottom right side of the display screen at the timing shown in FIG. 20I. The frame-in animation of the display unit TT1 is started again, and then the tutorial display unit TT1 is arranged at a predetermined display position at the timing shown in FIG. 20 (j). The display is displayed. That is, a display suggesting that a pseudo-ream may be performed is performed. That is, in the tutorial display unit TT1, in addition to the tutorial display, a preview display can be performed. The character display of “pseudo-ream” may be a notice of the change or a prefetch notice. The completion timing of the frame-in animation in the tutorial display section TT1 may be the timing before the display of the effect EF2 is started, or the timing after the display of the effect EF2 is started. It may be the same timing when the display of the effect EF2 is started. In this case, it may be configured to always be performed at any timing, or may be configured so that the timing differs depending on the case. Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 20 (j) to (n), the tutorial display section TT1 is continuously displayed. In this example, the display time of the tutorial display unit TT1 is configured to be longer when the notice display is performed than when the explanation display is performed. Alternatively, the display time of the tutorial display unit TT1 may be configured to be longer when the explanation display is performed than when the notice display is performed. In addition, the character color may be different between the explanation display and the notice display. Thus, in this effect example, the tutorial display unit TT1 may be displayed a plurality of times.

  In the tutorial display unit TT1, a plurality of types of mini-games having a success / failure pattern are displayed, and when the success pattern of the mini-game is performed, simultaneously with the display indicating success or after the display. , A display that changes the other display such as a change in hold (for example, a change in the display mode of the hold icon, a change in the display mode of the fluctuation icon, the stop of the pseudo-continuous pattern, the occurrence of the pseudo-run, the display mode of the serif notice Change (for example, a line in blue or blue background changes to a line in red or red text), a step up in a line advance notice (for example, in the state where a line advance notice for character A is displayed, then the line in character B For example, a notice display may be performed)).

  FIG. 21 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner an example of a super reach effect applicable to the present embodiment. In the effect example shown in FIG. 21, for example, after the effect display shown in FIG. 17 is performed, the symbol variation display based on the hold corresponding to the hold icon whose display mode is changed as described above is performed. Is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 21 (a), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a UI part is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and a change icon h0 is placed in the hold display frame FL1 at the center of this UI part. It is displayed in the accommodated form, and on the left side of the variation icon h0 is formed a hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 21A, since two variable displays in FIG. 1 are held, two hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the hold icon display area. Note that the change icon h0 is a pre-read notice display mode that is lit in green, and the two hold icons h11 and h12 are default display modes. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the variable display of the first decorative symbol is deleted. At this time, the hold display frame FL1 is a default display mode and does not overlap the decorative design. Further, the tutorial display section TT1 shows a character display “Panda is a master of the lord” and an explanation display.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 21A, “castle town” is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. In addition, a button image 136a is displayed in a default display form above the stage name display section ST1, and the second decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner at the top of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M. ing.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a state where the Tono-sama character is on the stage is shown, and in the upper part of the display screen, the second reserved number display of Special Fig. 1 and Special Fig. 2 and Special Fig. 1 are shown. And the 4th symbol of special figure 2 is displayed. Further, the first decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed small above the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

  In addition, the above-mentioned family crest character 224E is disposed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the above-mentioned eight-generation character 224Fa and the general character character 224Fb are disposed above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Has been. The family crest member 224E emits green light in accordance with the color of the change icon h0.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 21 (b), the first decorative symbol display device 208L performs a display notifying that it has developed into a super reach (swordsman reach).

  Then, as shown in FIG. 21 (c), the light emitting means corresponding to the light guide plate IL emits light to form a pattern imitating an effect image, which produces high reliability with respect to the big hit in this swordsman reach. . Here, the pattern formed on the light guide plate IL overlaps the tutorial display portion TT1, the hold display frame FL1, the variation icon and the hold icon, and the tutorial display portion TT1, the hold display frame FL1, the change icon and the hold icon. These displays may be difficult to visually recognize compared with the case where they do not overlap.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 21 (d), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an animation (UI part FO animation) in which the UI part is framed out below the display screen is started. Specifically, when the UI unit FO animation is started, the character display displayed in the tutorial display unit TT1 is deleted and the hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area is deleted. Note that the character display erasure timing in the tutorial display unit TT1 may be a timing before the hold icon erasure timing, or may be a timing after the hold icon erasure timing. The timing may be the same as the timing of deleting the hold icon. In this case, it may be configured to always be performed at any timing, or may be configured so that the timing differs depending on the case. Although the fluctuation icon h0 is not erased, the fluctuation icon h0 may also be erased.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 21D to FIG. 21G, the UI unit frames out by the UI unit FO animation. Even if the hold display frame FL1 is deleted, the display mode of the hold icon may be recognized by the light emission color of the family crest character 224E. In other words, as described above, the display is performed by performing the symbol variation display based on the hold corresponding to the hold icon changed by the change effect of the display mode of the hold icon performed by extending the hold display frame FL1. In some cases, the display mode after the change of the hold icon can be confirmed even after the hold display frame FL1 in which the variable icon is accommodated is not displayed.

  FIG. 21 (h) shows a situation where a swordsman reach is being performed. That is, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the background display is changed from the background of the castle town to the background dedicated to the swordsman reach. In the stage name display section ST1 of the device 208M, the characters “Swordsman Reach” are displayed. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a duel scene animation is performed. At the timing shown in FIG. 21 (h), a state in which the Tono-sama character and the swordsman character confront each other is displayed.

  Thereafter, for example, after a duel scene animation display by the Tono-sama character and the swordsman character, as shown in FIG. 21 (i), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the hero Ton-sama becomes the enemy swordsman. As a result, a combination of “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2” decorative symbols is derived for both the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol, and fluctuation fluctuation is started.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 21 (j), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the background dedicated to the swordsman reach is changed to the background of the castle town. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, as shown in FIG. 21 (j) to FIG. 21 (n), an animation in which the UI unit enters the frame from the lower side of the display screen (UI unit FI animation) is performed. The hold icon is displayed again after the display of the UI part FI animation is completed. However, the hold icon may be displayed when the display of the UI part FI animation is started, or the UI part FI animation is displayed. It may be displayed simultaneously with completion. In this case, it may be configured to always be performed at any timing, or may be configured so that the timing differs depending on the case.

  After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 21 (o), the first decorative symbol displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N becomes the decoration “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2” on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The display is stopped by the combination of symbols, and the display result of the deviation is confirmed. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted. Also in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed as a combination of decorative symbols “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2”. Further, the family crest character 224E changes from a green light emission mode to a default light emission mode (white light emission mode). Although the first decorative symbol is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it may be erased when stopped. Further, the timing at which the family crest character 224E changes to the default light emission mode may be the same timing as the stop display of the decorative symbol, may be the timing before the stop display of the decorative symbol, or the decoration The timing may be after the symbol stop display. In this case, it may be configured to always be performed at any timing, or may be configured so that the timing differs depending on the case. In addition, the change icon h0 may be changed to the default display mode before the decoration symbol is stopped and displayed and then deleted, or after the decoration symbol is stopped and displayed, the change icon h0 is changed to the default display mode. It may be erased after that, or it may be erased without changing the display mode before the stop display of the decorative symbol, or the display mode may be changed after the stop display of the decorative symbol. It may be erased without changing, or it may be erased without changing the display mode at the same timing as the decorative symbol stop display timing.

  In addition, in the state where the pattern formed on the light guide plate IL is displayed, the hold display frame FL1 after being expanded, being expanded, and being reduced may be configured to be displayed. All the hold display frames FL1 may be configured not to overlap the pattern formed on the light guide plate IL.

  Further, the hold display frame FL1 and the change icon h0 may be displayed during the super reach, and in this configuration, each timing during the super reach (for example, the cut-in of the ally character and the cut-in of the enemy character). Or the display mode of the lines displayed in blue, the display timing of lines displayed in red, or the like may be changed.

  Further, in addition to or in place of the above configuration, the tutorial display unit TT1 may be configured to be able to frame-in during super reach, and the display mode at each timing may be changed. One of a plurality of types of display may be displayed.

  FIG. 22 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the pending change notice effect. Here, FIGS. 22 (a-1) to 22 (a-4) show a state in which an effect display for stocking the notice icon is performed in the extended portion of the hold display frame FL1, and FIG. 1) to (b-6) in FIG. 22 show a state in which a change effect of the display mode of the hold icon is performed in a state where the notice icon is stocked, and FIG. 22 (c-1) to FIG. FIG. 6C-6 shows a state in which an effect that changes the display mode of the notice icon is performed by an effect that is partially in common with the change effect of the display mode of the hold icon.

  The production example shown in FIG. 22 (a-1) is the same as FIG. 17 (g) except that a treasure box notice icon BX is displayed instead of the ninja character NJ1. Omitted. As shown in FIG. 22 (a-1), the treasure box notice icon BX is partially overlapped with the family crest member 224E and partially not overlapped with the crest member 224E. It is considered difficult to visually compare. In this example, the treasure box notice icon BX is described as an example of the notice icon. However, it is needless to say that the present invention can also be applied to display various other notice icons.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 22 (a-2), the crest character 224E is lowered toward the initial position. Then, a portion of the treasure chest notice icon BX that is not overlapped with the family crest member 224E is enlarged so that visual recognition is easy.

  Thereafter, FIG. 22A-3 shows a state in which the crest character 224E returns to the initial position. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the treasure chest notice icon BX is moving toward the second hold icon h12. At this time, the treasure box notice icon BX is displayed in a reduced size, but may be displayed without being reduced, or may be displayed in an enlarged size. Further, the shape may be changed or the display color may be changed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 22 (a-4), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the treasure box notice icon BX is stopped and displayed above the second hold icon h12, and corresponds to the second hold icon h12. This suggests that some kind of notice will be given in the symbol variation display based on the hold. In other words, a pre-reading notice is performed using the treasure box notice icon BX.

  The production examples shown in FIGS. 22 (b-1) to 22 (b-6) are the same as those shown in FIG. 17 (g) except that a treasure box notice icon BX is displayed above the second hold icon h12. Since it is the same as that shown in FIG. Note that the notice icon BX shown in FIG. 22 (b-1) is not limited to the one displayed in the manner described above in FIGS. 22 (a-1) to (a-4), for example, other effects. (For example, an effect or the like performed by stopping the chance symbol) may be displayed. Further, the notice icon may not be displayed in the effect in the hold display frame FL1.

  FIG. 22 (b-3) shows a state where the shuriken SH1 overlaps the treasure chest notice icon BX. Here, the shuriken SH1 may overlap the treasure box notice icon BX, or may overlap the treasure box notice icon BX. That is, for example, even when the treasure box notice icon BX is displayed in the manner described above in FIGS. 22A-1 to 22A-4, the shuriken SH1 is more than the treasure box notice icon BX. May be displayed on the front side, or may be displayed on the back side.

  FIG. 22 (b-4) shows that the effect EF2 overlaps all of the treasure box notice icons BX in addition to the second hold icon h12. Thereby, it is not known whether the display mode of the second hold icon h12 changes or the display mode of the notice icon BX of the treasure box changes, and it may be possible to give the player a sense of expectation.

  The example of production shown in FIG. 22 (c-1) to FIG. 22 (c-5) is the same as that in FIG. 22 (b-1) to FIG.

  In FIG. 22 (c-5), the effect EF2 is displayed so as to cover the entire second hold icon h12, but the crest character 224E corresponding to the display mode (display color) of the hold icon after the change is emitted. There is no change in appearance. That is, it can be said that the change display of the hold icon is not performed due to the change in the emission color of the family crest member 224E.

  FIG. 22 (c-6) following FIG. 22 (c-5) shows a state after the effect EF2 is erased. That is, in the effect example shown in FIG. 22 (c-6), after the effect EF2 is deleted, the display mode of the second hold icon h12 does not change, and the display mode of the treasure box notice icon BX changes. The player may not be able to change the display mode of the hold icon, but the advance notice of the treasure box BX may change the appearance of the game and make the production more surprising and may further increase the expectation of the big hit. is there. Note that the change mode of the notice icon BX of the treasure box is not limited to a change in size. For example, the shape may change, the color may change, or the combination may change. . Note that, as shown in FIG. 22 (c-6), audio output is made from the speaker 120 to notify that the display mode of the treasure box notice icon BX has changed, but audio output is not performed. It may be.

  FIG. 23 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the hold change notice effect. Here, in FIGS. 23 (a-1) to 23 (a-6), an effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon other than the hold icon displayed in the display mode of the pre-reading notice (for example, blinking in white). 23 (b-1) to FIG. 23 (b-4), another character appears in the extended portion of the hold display frame FL1 to change the display mode of the hold icon. A state in which an effect to be changed is shown is shown. In FIGS. 23 (c-1) to 23 (c-5), an effect to change the display mode of all the held icons displayed is performed. Is shown.

  The production example shown in FIG. 23 (a-1) is the same as FIG. 17 (g) except that the third hold icon h13 is displayed, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted. As shown in FIG. 23 (a-1), the third hold icon h13 is displayed in a default display mode.

  In FIG. 23 (a-2) following FIG. 23 (a-1), the crest character 224E is lowered toward the initial position. As a result, a portion of the ninja character NJ1 that is not overlapped with the family crest member 224E is enlarged, so that the visual recognition is easy. Further, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows a state where the ninja character NJ1 is throwing the shuriken SH1. The shuriken SH1 is moving toward the third hold icon h13 adjacent thereto, not the second hold icon h12 for which the pre-reading notice is being made.

  Thereafter, FIG. 23A-3 shows a state in which the crest character 224E is returned to the initial position. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the shuriken SH1 is shown moving toward the third hold icon h13.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 23 (a-4), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the display of the effect EF2 in which the shuriken SH1 overlaps the third hold icon h13 and the third hold icon h13 explodes. Has been done. The effect EF2 makes it difficult to visually recognize the entire third hold icon h13, and also overlaps a part of the adjacent second hold icon h12. It should be noted that the second hold icon h12 remains in the pre-read notice display mode (blinking in white).

  Thereafter, FIG. 23A-5 shows a state in which the emission color of the family crest character 224E is changed from white to green. That is, it can be said that the advance notification is made that the display color of the third hold icon h13 changes from white to green.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 23 (a-6), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the effect EF2 is erased, and the third hold icon h13 is visually recognized again as compared with the state where the effect EF2 is not erased. Displayed easily. At this time, the display mode of the third hold icon h <b> 13 is displayed in a mode of lighting in green. On the other hand, a sound “picone” is output from the speaker 120 to notify that the display mode of the hold icon has changed. Note that the sound output may be performed after the display mode of the hold icon h13 is changed, the display mode of the hold icon h13 may be changed after the sound output is performed, or the display of the hold icon h13 is displayed. The change of the aspect and the sound output may be performed simultaneously. In this case, it may be configured to always be performed at any timing, or may be configured so that the timing differs depending on the case. In addition, the display mode of the second hold icon h12 remains the same as the display mode of the pre-read notice. According to this production example, not only the second hold icon h12 but the display mode of the third hold icon h13 adjacent to the second hold icon h13 changes, so that the production can be surprised and the second While maintaining the expectation for the symbol variation display based on the hold corresponding to the hold icon h12, the expectation for the symbol variation display based on the hold corresponding to the third hold icon h13 may be dramatically improved. . In addition, although this example of production demonstrated the example performed with respect to the 3rd holding | maintenance icon adjacent to the 2nd holding | maintenance icon which is the object of a prefetch notice, you may make it perform with respect to the 1st holding | maintenance icon. When there is a fourth hold, the fourth hold icon h14 may be performed.

  23 (b-1) to FIG. 23 (b-4) show an example in which the head-length character BC1 is displayed instead of the ninja character NJ1 in the extended portion of the holding display frame FL1, and the thrown-in item 17 is the same as FIG. 17G to FIG. 17J, only the differences will be described in detail, and detailed description of the others will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 23 (b-1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208, in the upper part of the holding display frame FL1, not the ninja character NJ1 but the long character BC1 appears. It should be noted that the chief character BC1 is partially overlapped with the family crest character 224E, and is difficult to view compared to a state where the character crest character 224E is not partially overlapped with the family crest character 224E.

  FIG. 23B-2 shows a state in which the family crest character 224E is lowered toward the initial position. As a result, a portion of the bancho character BC1 that is not overlapped with the family crest member 224E is enlarged to facilitate visual recognition. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, it is shown that the chief character BC1 emits a Qigong wave KK1 instead of the shuriken SH1 as a thrown object. This qigong wave KK1 is moving toward the second hold icon h12 for which the pre-reading notice is being made. It should be noted that the effect display of the Qigong wave KK1 may be displayed on the front side rather than the display of the conversation notice by the Chibi princess character CH1 or the samurai character GY1, or may be displayed on the back side. Good.

  Thereafter, in FIG. 23 (b-3), the crest character 224E is returned to the initial position. And in the 1st decoration symbol display apparatus 208L, a mode that Qigong wave KK1 is heading to the 2nd holding | maintenance icon h12 is shown.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 23 (b-4), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the effect EF2 in which the Qigong wave KK1 overlaps the second hold icon h12 and the second hold icon h12 explodes. Has been done. Here, the display mode of the effect EF2 may be different between the case of the shuriken SH1 and the case of the Qigong wave KK1. At this time, the longest character BC1 is erased from the hold display frame FL1, but may be displayed. Thus, in this production example, by allowing characters other than the ninja character NJ1 to be displayed, for example, there may be a case where the reliability of the big hit can be changed by the appearing character.

  In the production example shown in FIGS. 23 (c-1) to (c-3), the third hold icon h13 is displayed, and the second hold icon h12 is the default display mode. 23 is the same as FIG. 23 (b-1) to FIG. 23 (b-3), only the differences will be described in detail, and detailed description of the others will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 23 (c-4) following FIG. 23 (c-3), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the Qigong wave KK1 is overlapped with the second hold icon h12 and the exploding effect EF3 is displayed. However, the effect EF3 is an effect display that explodes not only in the second hold icon h12 but in the entire hold icon display area. That is, the display of the effect EF3 informs that all the hold icons displayed in the hold icon display area are to be changed in display mode. This may give a sense of expectation that reliability may increase for all holds. Note that, at the timing shown in FIG. 23 (c-4), the longest character BC1 is erased from the hold display frame FL1, but it may be displayed. The effect by the effect EF3 may be an effect that is performed only when the chief character BC1 appears, and may not be performed when the ninja character NJ1 appears. In addition, when the longest character BC1 appears, the effect EF3 may always be performed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 23 (c-5), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the effect EF3 is erased and the first hold icons h11 to 3 are compared with the state where the effect EF3 is not erased. The hold icon h13 is easily displayed again. At this time, all the display modes of the first hold icon h11 to the third hold icon h13 are changed from the default display mode to the display mode of the main character. According to this production example, not only the hold icon that is the target of prefetching but also the display mode of all the displayed hold icons can be changed, so that the production can be given unexpectedness and the In some cases, the expectation of a big hit can be dramatically improved. This production example may be performed, for example, when the hold increases at a specific timing, and more specifically, when the hold increases after the extended animation of the hold display frame FL1 is started. You may make it carry out.

  FIG. 24 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the pending change notice effect. Here, in FIGS. 24 (a-1) to (a-5), the extended range of the hold display frame FL1 is shown enlarged, and FIGS. 24 (b-1) to ( FIG. 24 (c-1) to FIG. 24 (c-4) show a state in which the background of the hold display frame FL1 is opened and a character related to the hold change notice effect appears there. In the figure, a state in which an effect of changing the display mode of the fluctuation icon is performed is shown.

  The example of the effect shown in FIG. 24 (a-1) is the same as that shown in FIG. 17 (g) and described above, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 24 (a-2) following FIG. 24 (a-1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the hold display frame FL1 is further expanded upward. Further, the ninja character NJ1 is further moved upward in accordance with the further expansion of the hold display frame FL1. At this time, the ninja character NJ1 is not overlapped with the family crest member 224E, and is easier to visually recognize than the state where it is overlapped with the family crest member 224E. In addition, the hold display frame FL1 overlaps the balloon part TT3, and the display of the balloon part TT3 is difficult to visually recognize as compared with the state where it does not overlap the balloon part TT3. Also, the family crest member 224E is lowered toward the initial position.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 24 (a-3), the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows a state in which the ninja character NJ1 throws three shurikens SH1. These three shurikens SH1 are all moving toward the second hold icon h12 for which a pre-reading notice is being made. In addition, the effect display of the shuriken SH1 overlaps the balloon part TT2. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 24A-3, the family crest character 224E has returned to the initial position.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 24 (a-4), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, three shurikens SH1 overlap with the second hold icon h12, and the second hold icon h12 explodes the effect EF2. The display is done.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 24 (a-5), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the effect EF2 is erased, and the second hold icon h12 is visually recognized again as compared with the state where the effect EF2 is not erased. Displayed easily. At this time, the display mode of the second hold icon h12 is displayed in the display mode of Tono. At this time, a notification sound indicating that the display mode of the hold icon has changed may be output from the speaker 120. At this time, the light emission mode of the family crest member 224E is not changed, but may be changed. Thus, in this effect example, compared to the effect example shown in FIG. 17, the extended range of the hold display frame FL1 is further increased upward, and the contents of the effect are also partially different. It should be noted that the production content may be the same even if the extended range of the hold display frame FL1 is enlarged. Further, the extended range of the hold display frame FL1 may be changed according to the reliability. Thereby, there may be a case where a change in the expectation for the big hit can be given by the amount of change of the hold display frame FL1.

  Note that the extended range of the hold display frame FL1 may be expanded not only in the upper direction but also in the width direction. In this case, for example, as shown in FIG. 24 (a-3 '), the hold display frame FL1 may be expanded in the width direction up to a range overlapping the hold icon to be prefetched in addition to the upward expansion. Good. Alternatively, the extended range in the vertical direction of the hold display frame FL1 may be set to the extent shown in FIG. 17G, and the extended range in the width direction may be extended to a range that overlaps the hold icon to be prefetched. In addition, when a third hold icon that is digested after the second hold icon h12 that is the target of prefetching is displayed, it is expanded in the width direction to at least a part of the third hold icon. You may comprise. In other words, a part of the hold display frame FL1 may be configured to overlap the third hold icon.

  In FIG. 24 (b-1), the family crest member 224E rises from the initial position, and the hold display frame FL1 is expanded upward by the extended animation of the hold display frame FL1, but no character appears in the extended portion. A state in which the family crest member 224E has moved to the initial position is shown. The other contents of the production are the same as those shown in FIG.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 24 (b-2), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an opening operation in which the background of the hold display frame FL1 rises like a shutter is started so that the back side of the background is visually recognized. A state in which various types of display are performed is shown.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 24 (b-3), the first decorative symbol display device 208 </ b> L shows a state in which the background of the hold display frame FL <b> 1 is fully opened and a ninja character NJ <b> 1 appears. A plurality of back colors of the hold display frame FL1 whose background is fully opened may be prepared, and the color may be varied depending on the expected degree of change in the display mode of the hold icon. Then, as shown in FIG. 24 (b-3), the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows a state where the ninja character NJ1 throws the shuriken SH1. Note that the timing at which the throwing effect of the shuriken SH1 is started may be after the timing at which the background of the hold display frame FL1 is fully opened, or the same as the timing at which the background of the hold display frame FL1 is fully open. It may be a timing before the background of the hold display frame FL1 is fully opened. In this case, it may be configured to always be performed at any timing, or may be configured so that the timing differs depending on the case.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 24 (b-4), the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows a state in which the shuriken SH1 faces the second hold icon h12.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 24 (b-5), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the display of the effect EF2 in which the shuriken SH1 overlaps the second hold icon h12 and the second hold icon h12 explodes. Has been done. At this time, a closing operation in which the background of the hold display frame FL1 is lowered like a shutter is started, and then the door is closed. Note that the start timing of the closing operation of the background of the hold display frame FL1 may be before the start timing of the display of the effect EF2, or may be the same as the start timing of the display of the effect EF2. It may be after the timing when the display of the effect EF2 is started. In this case, it may be configured to always be performed at any timing, or may be configured so that the timing differs depending on the case.

  The example of production shown in FIG. 24C-1 is the same as FIG. 17I except that the ninja character NJ1 throws a shuriken toward the variation icon h0. This will be described in detail, and description of the other will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 24 (c-1), the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows a state where the ninja character NJ1 is throwing the shuriken SH1 toward the change icon h0.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 24C-2, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the shuriken SH1 is overlapped with the change icon h0, and the effect EF3 in which the change icon h0 explodes is displayed. The effect EF3 makes it difficult to visually recognize the entire variation icon h0, and also overlaps a part of the ninja character NJ1. Note that the second hold icon h12 remains unchanged in the display mode of the prefetch notice. Thereby, while maintaining the expectation for the symbol variation display based on the hold corresponding to the second hold icon, the display mode of the change icon h0 may change, and the reliability of the change with respect to the big hit may be increased. In some cases, the player can have a sense of expectation.

  Thereafter, FIG. 24C-3 shows a state in which the emission color of the family crest character 224E is changed from white to green. In other words, it can be said that the advance notification is made that the display color of the variation icon h0 changes from white to green. In other words, prior to the notice that the display mode of the change icon changes, a predetermined light emitting means (such as an LED incorporated in the family crest member 224E or an LED provided at the special drawing start opening) is changed to the change icon. It can be said that the mode is changed according to the mode after the change of h0.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 24 (c-4), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the effect EF3 is erased, and the change icon h0 is easily displayed again. At this time, the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 is displayed in a mode of lighting in green. On the other hand, a sound “picone” is output from the speaker 120 to notify that the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 has changed. Note that the sound output may be performed after the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 is changed, the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 may be changed after the voice output is performed, or the display of the fluctuation icon h0 is displayed. The change of the aspect and the sound output may be performed simultaneously.

  FIG. 25 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the hold change notice effect. FIG. 25 shows a state in which a change effect of the display mode of the hold icon is being performed when the UI unit is out of the frame from the display screen.

  As shown in FIG. 25 (a), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a UI part is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and in this UI part, a change icon h0 is placed in the hold display frame FL1 in the center. It is displayed in the accommodated form, and on the left side of the variation icon h0 is formed a hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 25 (a), since two variable displays in FIG. 1 are held, two hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the hold icon display area. The change icon h0 and the first hold icon h11 are in the default display mode, but the second hold icon h12 is blinking in white and is displayed in the display mode of the pre-reading notice. Further, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows a state in which the first decorative symbol is variably displayed. At this time, the hold display frame FL1 is a default display mode and does not overlap the decorative design. Further, the tutorial display portion TT1 is not displayed. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a balloon portion TT2 is displayed on the left side of the display screen together with the princess Chibi character CH1. A plurality of question marks are displayed side by side in the balloon part TT2, suggesting that a UI part FO animation will be performed in which the UI part including the hold display frame FL1 described later is out of frame. That is, it can be said that the display of the balloon part TT2 shown in FIG. 25A is a display related to a predetermined effect in which the hold display frame FL1 is not displayed due to frame out.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 25A, “Castle Town” is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. In addition, a button image 136a is displayed in a default display form above the stage name display section ST1, and the second decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner at the top of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M. ing.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the state that the Tono-sama character is on the stage is shown, and in the upper part of the display screen, the second reserved number display and special diagram of Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2 are shown. The 4th symbol of 1 and special figure 2 is displayed.

  In addition, the above-mentioned family crest character 224E is disposed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the above-mentioned eight-generation character 224Fa and the general character character 224Fb are disposed above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Has been.

  FIG. 25B shows a state where the UI part FO animation is performed and the UI part is framed out together with the hold display frame FL1 below the display screen. This UI unit FO animation is performed, for example, when shifting to darkening effects or SP reach.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 25C, the first decorative symbol display device 208L displays the ninja character NJ1, and throws the shuriken SH1 toward the position where the second hold icon h12 was displayed. Has been done. That is, in this effect example, an effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon by the ninja character NJ1 is performed even when the hold display frame FL1 is not displayed. As shown in FIG. 25C, the ninja character NJ1 overlaps the decorative design and also overlaps the balloon portion TT2.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 25 (d), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the shuriken SH1 reaches the position where the second hold icon h12 is displayed, and the exploding effect EF2 is displayed. Yes.

  Thereafter, FIG. 25 (e) shows a state in which the emission color of the family crest member 224E changes from white to green. That is, a notice is given that the display color of the second hold icon h12 changes from white to green.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 25 (f), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the effect EF2 is deleted, but the UI portion is still out of frame, so the second hold icon h12 is still displayed. It has not been. On the other hand, a sound “picone” is output from the speaker 120 to notify that the display mode of the hold icon has changed.

  FIG. 25G shows a state in which an animation (UI part FI animation) in which the UI part enters a frame is performed and the UI part FI animation is completed. When the UI part FI animation is completed, the UI part is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L together with the hold display frame FL1. At this time, the display mode of the second hold icon h12 is changed from white to green.

  In this production example, the UI section including the hold display frame FL1 is out of the frame, and during this time, the display mode of the hold icon is changed. For example, FIG. 25 (a ′) to FIG. As shown in ′), the UI portion may be framed out while leaving the hold display frame FL1. Here, the example of the effect shown in FIG. 25A 'is the same as that in FIG.

  FIG. 25 (b ′) following FIG. 25 (a ′) shows a state in which the UI unit FO animation is completed. As shown in FIG. 25 (b ′), in this production example, when the UI part FO animation is performed, the UI part is framed out below the display screen, but the hold display frame FL1 is displayed without being framed out. The state is maintained.

  In FIG. 25 (c ′), the extended animation of the hold display frame FL1 is performed and the hold display frame FL1 expands upward, and then the ninja character NJ1 throws the shuriken SH1 in the hold display frame FL1. It is shown. That is, as shown in FIG. 25 (c ′), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the ninja character NJ1 is displayed in the extended portion of the hold display frame FL1, and the shuriken SH1 is displayed by the second hold icon h12. There is an effect of throwing it to the position where it was done. In other words, in this effect example, a change effect of the display mode of the hold icon by the ninja character NJ1 is performed even when the hold icon that is the target of the change of the display mode is not displayed.

  FIG. 26 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the hold change notice effect. Here, in FIGS. 26 (a-1) to 26 (a-7), an effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon and the display of the notice icon are shown at the same time. FIGS. 26 (b-1) to 26 (b-5) show how the hold icon changes to the display mode of the prefetch notice.

  The effect example shown in FIG. 26 (a-1) is the same as that shown in FIG. 17 (f) and described above, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 26 (a-2) following FIG. 26 (a-1), the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows the appearance of the ninja character NJ1 in the upper part of the hold display frame FL1. Note that the ninja character NJ1 is partially overlapped with the family crest character 224E, and is difficult to view compared to a state where the character is not partially overlapped with the crest character 224E.

  In addition, in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the animation of throwing the bomb icon I61 by the character of Tono-sama is started, and the state of the character of Tono-sama trying to throw the bomb icon I61 is shown.

  Thereafter, in FIG. 26 (a-3), the crest character 224E is lowered toward the initial position. As a result, a portion of the ninja character NJ1 that is not overlapped with the family crest member 224E is enlarged, so that the visual recognition is easy. Further, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows a state where the ninja character NJ1 is throwing the shuriken SH1. The shuriken SH1 is moving toward the second hold icon h12 for which a pre-reading notice is being made.

  On the other hand, the third decorative symbol display device 208N shows a state in which the Tono-sama character has thrown a bomb icon I61. The timing at which the bomb icon I61 starts to be thrown may be the same as the timing at which the ninja character NJ1 starts throwing the shuriken SH1, or before the start of throwing the shuriken SH1. Alternatively, it may be the timing after the throwing of the shuriken SH1 is started. In this case, it may be configured to always be performed at any timing, or may be configured so that the timing differs depending on the case.

  Thereafter, FIG. 26 (a-4) shows a state in which the crest character 224E returns to the initial position. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a state where the shuriken SH1 is heading toward the second hold icon h12 is shown.

  On the other hand, at the timing shown in FIG. 26 (a-4), the bomb icon I61 is displayed so as to move from the third decorative symbol display device 208N to the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Note that the bomb icon I61 overlaps the first decorative symbol and also overlaps the spear character GY1 and the speech balloon TT3. In other words, the first decorative symbol is overlapped with the bomb icon I61, and the spear character GY1 and the speech balloon TT3 are also overlapped with the bomb icon I61. The bomb icon I61 may be overlapped with the first decorative symbol, or may be overlapped with the spear character GY1 or the balloon portion TT3.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 26 (a-5), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the display of the effect EF2 in which the shuriken SH1 overlaps the second hold icon h12 and the second hold icon h12 explodes. Has been done.

  On the other hand, at the timing shown in FIG. 26 (a-5), the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows a state in which the bomb icon I61 thrown by the Tono-sama character bursts. The timing at which the bomb icon I61 bursts may be the same as the timing at which the effect EF2 is displayed, may be the timing before the effect EF2 is displayed, or after the effect EF2 is displayed. It may be the timing. In this case, it may be configured to always be performed at any timing, or may be configured so that the timing differs depending on the case.

  Thereafter, in FIG. 26 (a-6), a notice is given that the emission color of the family crest character 224E changes from white to green, and the display color of the second hold icon h12 changes from white to green.

  On the other hand, at the timing shown in FIG. 26 (a-6), the ruptured bomb icon I61 is changed to the swordsman notice icon I62, and the swordsman reach is notified. Here, at the timing when the notice icon I62 of the swordsman appears, a sound notifying that may be output from the speaker 120. In addition, the timing at which the swordsman notice icon I62 changes may be the same as the timing at which the light emission color of the family crest character 224E changes to green, or before the light emission color of the family crest character 224E changes to green. Or the timing after the emission color of the family crest character 224E changes to green. In this case, it may be configured to always be performed at any timing, or may be configured so that the timing differs depending on the case.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 26 (a-7), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the effect EF2 is erased and the second hold icon h12 is visually recognized again as compared with the state where the effect EF2 is not erased. Displayed easily. At this time, the display mode of the second hold icon h12 is displayed in a mode of lighting in green. On the other hand, a sound “picone” is output from the speaker 120 to notify that the display mode of the hold icon has changed.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 26 (a-7), the swordsman's notice icon I62 is arranged in a position overlapping the left end of the tutorial display section TT1 while being reduced in size, and then the bomb icon I61 by the Tono-sama character. The throwing animation ends. In addition, you may alert | report by the audio | voice output that the notice icon I62 of the swordsman is arrange | positioned in the tutorial display part TT1. In this way, since the swordsman notice icon I62 is arranged at a position overlapping the front side of the tutorial display part TT1, it is compared with the state where the swordsman notice icon I62 is not arranged at the position overlapping the front side of the tutorial display part TT1. As a result, at least part of the characters displayed on the tutorial display portion TT1 may be difficult to view. In other words, according to this production example, it can be said that the swordsman notice icon I62 may overlap the tutorial display part TT1 as a part of the hold display frame. In this way, in this production example, the swordsman notice icon I62 overlaps the front side of the tutorial display part TT1, so that it is easy to attract the player to display the tutorial display part TT1 and the swordsman notice icon I62. You may be able to. In addition, there may be cases where the presence of the tutorial is noticed, and it is possible to concentrate on the symbol variation display rather than the explanation of the effects that may occur in the future.

  The example of the production shown in FIG. 26 (b-1) is the same as FIG. 16 (a) except that the text “Panda is a master of the panda” is displayed in the tutorial display section TT1. The explanation is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 26 (b-2) following FIG. 26 (b-1), in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a throwing animation of the bomb icon I61 by the Tono-sama character is started, and the Tono-sama character becomes a bomb icon. A state of trying to throw I61 is shown.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 26 (b-3), the character of Tono throws a bomb icon I61, and the bomb icon I61 moves from the third decorative symbol display device 208N to the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The state of doing is shown.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 26 (b-4), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the bomb icon I61 thrown by the Tono-sama character reaches the second hold icon h12, and the bomb icon I61 explodes. Is shown. The display of the ruptured bomb icon I61 covers the entire second hold icon h12 and also overlaps a part of the first hold icon h11.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 26 (b-5), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the ruptured bomb icon I61 is erased and compared to the state in which the ruptured bomb icon I61 is not erased. The hold icon h12 is easily displayed again. At this time, the display mode of the second hold icon h12 is displayed in the display mode of the pre-reading notice (display mode flashing in white). As described above, the manner of changing the display mode of the prefetch notice of the hold icon is not limited to when the hold is increased, but may be performed at an appropriate timing after the hold is increased. Moreover, you may make it change the display aspect of a holding | maintenance icon by another change production like this production example. Moreover, the effect which changes the display mode of the pre-reading notice of the hold icon mentioned above may be performed in a state where the UI unit is out of frame, for example.

  FIG. 27 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the hold change notice effect. Here, FIG. 27 shows a state in which an effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is performed while moving the sub-display devices (second decorative symbol display device 208M and third decorative symbol display device 208N).

  The example of production shown in FIG. 27 (a-1) is the same as that shown in FIG. 17 (d) and described above, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 27 (a-2) following FIG. 27 (a-1) shows a state where the Tono-sama character displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N is erased together with the stage.

  Thereafter, in FIG. 27 (a-3), the third decorative symbol display device 208N moves toward the center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The situation is shown. At this time, each part of the samurai character GY1, the balloon part TT3, the tutorial display part TT1, and the right symbol of the first decorative symbol is overlapped with the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Compared with the state where TT3, tutorial display part TT1, and each part of the right symbol of the first decorative symbol are not overlapped with the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is difficult to visually recognize each.

  Thereafter, FIG. 27A-4 shows a state in which the third decorative symbol display device 208N continues to move. In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a hold display frame FL2 is displayed at the bottom of the display screen, and a variation icon h00 is displayed in the frame. The hold display frame FL2 and the change icon h00 displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N are larger in size than the hold display frame FL1 and the change icon h0 displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, respectively. . That is, it can be said that the hold display frame FL2 displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N is an expanded display of the hold display frame FL1 displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. At the timing shown in FIG. 27 (a-4), the overlap with the character GY1 of the heel has been eliminated, but each part of the right symbol of the balloon TT3 and the first decorative symbol is still displayed as the third decorative symbol. It is overlapped with the device 208N. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 27 (a-4), the hold display frame FL1, the variation icon h0 accommodated therein, and each part of the balloon portion TT2 are overlapped with the third decorative symbol display device 208N. In comparison with the state in which the hold display frame FL1 and the variation icon h0 accommodated in the hold display frame FL1 and a part of the balloon portion TT2 are not overlapped with the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is difficult to see. .

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 27 (a-5), the third decorative symbol display device 208N has finished moving, with its center aligned with the center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Then, the hold display frame FL1 displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the middle symbols of the first decorative symbol all overlap the third decorative symbol display device 208N, together with the middle symbols and the hold display frame FL1. The fluctuation icon h0 becomes invisible in front view. In addition, a part of the first hold icon h11, the balloon part TT2, and the balloon part TT3 are also overlapped by the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and a part of the first hold icon h11, the balloon part TT2, and the balloon part TT3 are overlapped. Compared with a state in which the third decorative symbol display device 208N is not overlapped, it is difficult to visually recognize.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 27 (a-6), in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the extended animation of the hold display frame FL2 is performed, and the hold display frame FL2 is expanded upward, and the extended portion has the ninja's extension. A state in which the character NJ2 appears is shown. That is, it can be said that the hold display frame FL2 in which the hold display frame FL1 displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is extended and displayed is further displayed in an extended manner. The ninja character NJ2 displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N is larger in size than the ninja character NJ1 displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, but may be the same. However, it may be made smaller.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 27 (a-7), the third decorative symbol display device 208N displays a state in which the ninja character NJ2 throws the shuriken SH1. The shuriken SH1 is moving toward the second notice icon h12 for which a prefetch notice is being made. It should be noted that the shrine sword SH1 effect display may be displayed on the front side or on the back side of the conversation notice display by the Chibi princess character CH1 or the samurai character GY1. . It can be said that the performance by the ninja character NJ2 is performed in the extended portion of the extended display frame FL2. In other words, it can be said that the ninja character NJ2, which is an example of the effect display, is displayed in the expanded portion of the hold display frame FL2. The effect by the ninja character NJ2 may function as an effect of pre-reading notice or change notice. Further, the effect display by the shuriken SH1 is related to the effect performed in the expanded hold display frame FL2 (the effect by the ninja character NJ2), but it can be said that the effect is performed outside the hold display frame FL2.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 27 (a-8), the shuriken SH1 moves from the third decorative symbol display device 208N to the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and moves toward the second hold icon h12. The situation is shown.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 27 (a-9), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the display of the effect EF2 in which the shuriken SH1 overlaps the second hold icon h12 and the second hold icon h12 explodes. Has been done. The effect EF2 is partially overlapped with the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

  Thereafter, FIG. 27A-10 shows a state in which the emission color of the family crest character 224E changes from white to green. In addition, the LEDs arranged around the third decorative symbol display device 208N emit green light, and these light emitting means notify that the display color of the second hold icon h12 changes from white to green. To do. It should be noted that the timing of the change in the emission color of the family crest character 224E may be the same as the timing at which the LED provided on the third decorative symbol display device 208N emits green light. The timing may be after the provided LED emits green light, or may be the timing before the LED provided in the third decorative symbol display device 208N emits green light. In this case, it may be configured to always be performed at any timing, or may be configured so that the timing differs depending on the case.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 27 (a-11), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the effect EF2 is erased, and the second hold icon h12 is visually recognized again as compared with the state where the effect EF2 is not erased. Displayed easily. At this time, the display mode of the second hold icon h12 is displayed in a mode of lighting in green. Here, it may be notified by voice output that the display mode of the hold icon has changed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 27 (a-12), the third decorative symbol display device 208N shows a state in which the hold display frame FL2 is erased together with the ninja character NJ2. In this case, for example, it may be performed by animation out of the frame from the third decorative symbol display device 208N, may be erased by fading out, or may be erased suddenly.

  Thereafter, FIG. 27 (a-13) shows a state in which the third decorative symbol display device 208N moves rightward toward the initial position. At the timing shown in FIG. 27 (a-13), the overlap of the first hold icon h11 is eliminated, and the hold display frame FL1 displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed in the third decorative symbol display. A part of the device 208N is overlapped, and part of the state is visible along with the change icon h0. In addition, the middle symbol of the first decorative symbol is also partially overlapped with the third decorative symbol display device 208N, which is one in comparison with the state where the third decorative symbol display device 208N is not partially overlapped. While the part is visible, the right symbol is overlapped with the third decorative symbol display device 208N, which is difficult to visually recognize compared to the non-overlapped state.

  Thereafter, in FIG. 27 (a-14), the third decorative symbol display device 208N is shown in the initial position. At the timing shown in FIG. 27 (a-14), the overlap is eliminated for each display on the first decorative symbol display device 208L that has been overlapped by the third decorative symbol display device 208N so far. As compared with a state where the is not solved, both displays are in a state of easy visual recognition.

  Thereafter, FIG. 27 (a-15) shows a state in which the LEDs emitting light around the third decorative symbol display device 208N are turned off. In addition, you may make it light by a default light emission mode (For example, the light emission mode lighted in white), without turning off. On the other hand, the family crest member 224E still emits light in green corresponding to the display color of the second hold icon h12.

  In this effect example, one of the two sub display devices (second decorative symbol display device 208M, third decorative symbol display device 208N) is used as the first decorative symbol display device. The display device 208L is moved so as to overlap, and an effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is performed. For example, as shown in FIG. 27B, both of the two sub display devices are connected. You may make it perform the effect which moves and changes the display mode of a holding | maintenance icon.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 27 (b), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are replaced with the first decorative symbol when performing the change effect of the display mode of the hold icon. The display device 208L is moved to a position close to each other at the center. The hold display frame FL2 is expanded and displayed from the third decorative symbol display device 208N to the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the lower portion of the hold display frame FL2 displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. And a ninja character NJ2 is displayed above the variation icon h00. At this time, by the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the balloon part TT2, the balloon part TT3, the first hold icon h11, the second hold icon h12, the hold display frame FL1, and the change icon All of h0 are overlapped, and a part of the tutorial display portion TT1 and Princess Chibi character CH1 are overlapped.

  FIG. 28 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the hold change notice effect. Here, in FIG. 28, instead of the two sub-display devices described above, only one sub-display device (sub-decorative symbol display device 208P is provided and the sub-decorative symbol display device 208P has an effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon. Is shown.

  28 is different from the above-described embodiment in that a decorative symbol display device 208 as a main display device and a sub decorative symbol display device 208P as a sub display device are provided. The sub-decorative symbol display device 208P is disposed on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the upper end edge of the sub-decorative symbol display device 208P overlaps the front side of a part of the lower end edge of the ornamental symbol display device 208. ing. As shown in FIG. 28 (a), on the sub-decorative symbol display device 208P, the hold display frame FL1 and the hold icon display area are arranged side by side in the left-right direction, and below these are the tutorial display section TT1. Is displayed, a change icon h0 is displayed in the hold display frame FL1, and hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the hold icon display area. Note that the change icon h0 and the first hold icon h11 are in the default display mode, but the second hold icon h12 is in the display mode of the prefetch notice. In the tutorial display section TT1, “Panda is a master of the lord” is displayed, and the relationship between the panda and the lord is explained. In the decorative symbol display device 208, a balloon portion TT2 is displayed on the left side of the display screen together with a princess Chibi character CH1. The speech balloon TT2 is displayed with a dialogue “Where is the bag?”. In addition, a balloon portion TT3 is displayed on the right side of the display screen together with the frog character GY1. A speech display “here is” is displayed on the balloon portion TT3. That is, in the production example shown in FIG. Note that the balloon part TT2 and the balloon part TT3 are overlapped with the decorative symbols, but the decorative symbol may be overlapped with the balloon parts TT2 and TT3. Further, in the upper right part of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the second reserved number display of the special figures 1 and 2 and the fourth graphic of the special figures 1 and 2 are displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 28 (a), the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner.

  Thereafter, FIG. 28B shows a state in which the extended animation of the hold display frame FL1 is performed, the hold display frame FL1 expands upward, and the ninja character NJ2 appears in the extended portion. At this time, the hold display frame FL1 displayed on the sub-decorative symbol display device 208P extends from the sub-decoration symbol display device 208P to the decorative symbol display device 208, and is displayed on the decor symbol display device 208. A ninja character NJ1 is displayed on the expanded portion of FL1. Here, a part of the balloon part TT2 is overlapped with the expanded hold display frame FL1, and a part of the balloon part TT2 is visually recognized compared with a state where it is not overlapped with the expanded hold display frame FL1. It is considered difficult. In the decorative symbol display device 208, an effect display in which the ninja character NJ1 throws the shuriken SH1 is performed, and at the timing shown in FIG. 28B, the thrown shuriken SH1 is displayed on the sub-decorative symbol display device 208P. The state of moving toward the displayed second hold icon h12 is shown.

  Thereafter, FIG. 28C shows a state where the thrown shuriken SH1 moves from the decorative symbol display device 208 to the secondary decorative symbol display device 208P and is moving toward the second hold icon h12.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 28 (d), the sub-decorative symbol display device 208P displays the effect EF2 in which the shuriken SH1 overlaps the second hold icon h12 and the second hold icon h12 explodes. Yes. This effect EF2 is overlapped with a part of the first hold icon h11 displayed adjacently.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 28 (e), in the sub-decorative symbol display device 208P, the effect EF2 is erased, and the second hold icon h12 is displayed again more easily than when the effect EF2 is not erased. Is done. At this time, the display mode of the second hold icon h12 is displayed in a mode of lighting in green. Here, it may be notified by voice output that the display mode of the hold icon has changed.

  FIG. 29 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the pending change notice effect. Here, in FIGS. 29 (a-1) to 29 (a-6), there is shown a state in which an effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is performed when the error display is performed. FIG. 29B shows a state in which an effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is performed when the effect display performed over a plurality of decorative symbol display devices is performed. (C-1) to (c-3) in FIG. 29 show a state in which an effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is performed by operating the effect button 136, and FIG. FIG. 6D-3 shows a state in which an effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon when the button effect is performed, prompting the user to operate the effect button 136, is shown.

  The production example shown in FIG. 29 (a-1) is the same as that described above with reference to FIG. 17 (d) except that error display is performed, so only the differences will be described in detail. Detailed explanations of the others are omitted.

  In FIG. 29 (a-1), when the lower pan is full, a letter “please pull out the ball” is displayed to notify that the lower pan full error has occurred. A state in which the tan error display ER is displayed is shown. The lower plate full tank error display ER is an example of an error display in the present embodiment, and other error displays include, for example, a door open display for notifying that the front frame door 106 is open. Since such an error display needs to be promptly communicated to the player, it is displayed with priority over other displays. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 29 (a-1), the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows a state where the lower pan full tank error display ER overlaps a part of the blowing portion TT2. Such an error display is continuously displayed until the error is resolved.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 29 (a-2), the crest character 224E is lifted from the initial position and overlapped with the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In FIG. 29 (a-2), since the family crest character 224E is arranged on the front surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a part of the lower plate full tank error display ER is overlapped with the family crest character 224E. In addition, it is difficult to visually recognize a part of the lower plate full tank error display ER as compared with a state in which a part of the crest member 224E is not overlapped.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 29 (a-3), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the extended animation of the hold display frame FL1 is performed and the hold display frame FL1 is expanded upward, so that it is more than the crest character 224E. A state of appearing upward is shown. In this production example, since the error display is displayed with priority over the hold display frame FL1, a part of the hold display frame FL1 is overlapped with the lower plate full tank error display ER, and a part of the hold display frame FL1 is displayed. Is difficult to visually recognize compared with a state where the lower plate full tank error display ER is not overlapped.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 29 (a-4), the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows a state in which the ninja character NJ1 appears in the upper part of the hold display frame FL1. Note that a portion of the ninja character NJ1 is overlapped with the lower plate full tank error display ER, and it is difficult to see compared with a state where a part of the ninja character NJ1 is not overlapped with the lower plate full tank error display ER. It is said that.

  FIG. 29A-5 shows a state in which the family crest member 224E is lowered toward the initial position. Then, a portion of the ninja character NJ1 that is not overlapped with the family crest member 224E is enlarged. However, since a part of the ninja character NJ1 is still overlapped with the lower plate full tank error display ER, the ninja is compared with a state where a part of the ninja character NJ1 is not overlapped with the lower plate full tank error display ER. The character NJ1 is difficult to visually recognize. Further, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows a state where the ninja character NJ1 is throwing the shuriken SH1. The shuriken SH1 is moving toward the second hold icon h12 for which a pre-reading notice is being made.

  Thereafter, in FIG. 29 (a-6), the crest character 224E is returned to the initial position. Then, the overlap state of the family crest character 224E with respect to the hold display frame FL1, the change icon h0, and the ninja character NJ1 is canceled. However, since the lower plate full tank error is still continued, the lower plate full tank error display ER is still displayed, and the ninja character NJ1 displayed in a part of the hold display frame FL1 and the extended part of the hold display frame FL1 is displayed. Part of it overlaps the bottom plate full tank error display ER. In addition, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows a state where the shuriken SH1 is heading toward the second hold icon h12.

  In FIG. 29 (b), the notice display YK is displayed across the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N and is scrolling to the left. Has been. At this time, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the hold display frame FL1 is expanded and displayed upward, the ninja character NJ1 is displayed in the extended portion, and an effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is performed. The situation is shown. Note that, at the timing shown in FIG. 29 (b), the second hold icon h12 is in the display mode of the prefetch notice. Further, in the tutorial display section TT1, a character display of “enemy invades” is displayed, and contents related to the notice display YK are displayed. In this effect example, in order to preferentially display the effect display in the display mode of the hold icon over the notice display YK, a part of the notice display YK is overlapped with the hold display frame FL1 displayed.

  FIG. 29C-1 shows a state in which the second hold icon h <b> 12 is a button hold icon that is a display form imitating the effect button 136 as an example of the display form of the prefetch notice. In this production example, Princess Chibi character CH1 and Samurai character GY1 are not displayed, and tutorial display portion TT1 is not displayed. In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the button image 136a is not displayed, but the button image 136a may be displayed. Further, since the button hold icon is displayed at a position separated from the hold display frame FL1, it can be said that the button hold icon is a non-overlapping display even when the hold display frame FL1 is enlarged. The display mode of the hold icon of the button may be displayed when the hold is increased, or may be changed from another display mode (for example, a default display mode) after the hold is increased.

  Thereafter, when the player operates the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 29 (c-2), the second hold icon h12 is changed from the button hold icon as shown in FIG. 29 (c-3). It changes into the hold icon of the display mode of Tonosama character. It should be noted that the operation of the effect button 136 is in a state where it can be accepted on condition that the symbol is changing, and cannot be accepted during the symbol stop display, but the operation of the effect button 136 can be accepted even during the symbol stop display. Also good.

  FIG. 29 (d-1) shows a state in which an effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon when the button effect is being performed is performed. Specifically, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a button image 136a simulating the effect button 136 is displayed in the center, and a remaining time display bar indicating the operation effective period of the effect button 136 is displayed below the button image 136a. It is displayed. That is, a button effect is performed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. At this time, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the hold display frame FL1 is expanded and displayed upward, the ninja character NJ1 is displayed in the extended portion, and an effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is also performed. . In this effect example, in order to preferentially display the effect display that changes the display mode of the hold icon over the button effect, the button image 136a and a part of the remaining time display bar are expanded and displayed on the hold display frame FL1. It is overlapped. In addition, while the button effect is being performed, the first decorative symbol is not displayed. Therefore, it can be said that the button effect is an effect that does not overlap with the decorative symbol, and the decorative symbol is a button effect. It can also be said that the production is not overlapped. At this time, when the error display described above is performed, the button effect and the hold display frame FL1 are displayed with priority. When the above button hold icon is displayed, it is displayed on the front side of the button image 136a and the remaining time display bar, and is displayed on the front side of the hold display frame FL1, but the button image 136a is displayed. May be displayed on the back side of the remaining time display bar, or may be displayed on the back side of the hold display frame FL1.

  After that, when the player operates the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 29 (d-2), the cut-in displayed with the Tono-sama character up and displayed as shown in FIG. 29 (d-3). Display may occur. By performing this cut-in display, the player may be able to recognize that the jackpot reliability is high. In this effect example, in order to preferentially display the effect that changes the display mode of the hold icon over the cut-in effect, a part of the cut-in image is overlapped with the hold display frame FL1 displayed in an expanded manner. . At this time, when the error display described above is performed, it is displayed with priority over the cut-in display and the hold display frame FL1. When the above button hold icon is displayed, it is displayed on the front side of the cut-in display, and is displayed on the front side of the hold display frame FL1, but on the back side of the cut-in display. It may be displayed, or may be displayed on the back side of the hold display frame FL1.

  FIG. 30 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner an example of a symbol variation display applicable to the present embodiment. Here, the effect examples shown in FIGS. 30A-1 to 30A-5 do not include the sub display device, and the effect display is performed only by the decorative symbol display device 208 as the main display device. In FIG. 30 (b-1) to FIG. 30 (b-2), the state when error display is performed is shown. FIG. 30 (c) shows that the display positions of the change icon h0 and the ninja character NJ1 are reversed in the hold display frame FL1, and FIGS. 30 (d-1) to 30 (d). -2) shows a state in which a hold display frame is displayed in the hold icon display area.

  FIG. 30A-1 is different from the above-described embodiment in that it includes only the decorative symbol display device 208 as the main display device and does not include the sub display device. Then, as shown in FIG. 30 (a-1), the UI unit is arranged at the lower part of the display screen of the decorative design display device 208, the second decorative design is displayed at the upper left of the display screen, and the display screen In the upper right of, the second hold number display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 and the fourth symbol of special figure 1 and special figure 2 are displayed.

  Further, a family crest character 224E is arranged below the decorative symbol display device 208, and an eight-yield character 224Fa and a general character character 224Fb are arranged above the decorative symbol display device 208.

  As shown in FIG. 30 (a-1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol is displayed in a combination of “decoration 6−decoration 2−decoration 2”, and fluctuations are performed. In addition, variable display is performed on the second decorative symbol. In the UI section, a hold display frame FL1 in which the change icon h0 is accommodated is displayed, and two hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the hold icon display area. The change icon h0 and the hold icons h11 and h12 are all in the default display mode. Further, the tutorial display portion TT1 is not displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 30A-2, the decorative symbol display device 208 performs wipe display in which the wipe images WP1 and WP2 move from the left and right of the display screen toward the center. In this effect example, images simulating a heel are used as the wipe images WP1 and WP2, and an effect display that closes the heel is performed as the wipe display. Here, the term “wipe” refers to a video effect that is displayed by interrupting the next image to be displayed from a part of the display screen when switching images. There are various types of techniques for wiping, but any technique can be applied. In this production example, the wipe display is performed by the wipe images WP1 and WP2 after the fluctuation variation is started by the combination of the decorative pattern of the loss, but the wipe display is performed at the timing when the fluctuation variation is finished and the display is confirmed. May be performed. Further, for example, it may be performed when a stage change is performed, or may be performed when a transition is made to a super reach effect, and can be performed at an appropriate timing. The wipe images WP1 and WP2 overlap the UI part and the first decorative symbol, while they overlap the second decorative symbol, the second reserved number display, and the fourth symbol. At the timing shown in FIG. 30 (a-2), the two hold icons h11 and h12 and the hold display frame FL1 displayed in the hold icon display area are not overlapped with the wipe images WP1 and WP2. Note that the change icon h0 is deleted at the timing when the wipe images WP1 and WP2 are started to be displayed. Here, the timing at which the change icon h0 is deleted may be a timing before the display of the wipe images WP1 and WP2 is started, or at the same timing as the timing at which the wipe images WP1 and WP2 are started to be displayed. The timing may be after the timing at which the display of the wipe images WP1 and WP2 is started. In this case, it may be configured to always be performed at any timing, or may be configured so that the timing differs depending on the case.

  FIG. 30A-3 shows a state where the wipe images WP1 and WP2 are further moved toward the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. At the timing shown in FIG. 30 (a-3), the two hold icons h11 and h12 displayed in the hold icon display area overlap the wipe image WP1, but the hold display frame FL1 is the wipe image WP1. , WP2 is not overlapped.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 30 (a-4), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the entire display screen is covered with the wipe images WP1 and WP2, and the state in which the display is confirmed with the lost symbol is displayed. Therefore, the entire hold display frame FL1 is overlapped with the wipe images WP1 and WP2. Further, the second decorative symbol displayed at the upper left of the display screen is a combination of “decoration 6-decoration 2-decoration 2” according to the combination of the decorative symbols displayed when the first decorative symbol fluctuates. The display is stopped, and the special figure 1 figure 4 is also stopped and displayed as a lost pattern.

  Thereafter, when the hold is exhausted and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, the decorative symbol display device 208 performs a wipe display in which the wipe images WP1 and WP2 are framed out in the horizontal direction of the display screen, respectively. Is called. As a result, the UI part is visible and the hold display frame FL1 is also displayed so as to be visible. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol, and the special symbol 1 and the fourth symbol have started to be displayed in a variable manner. At this time, for example, by the hold movement animation, the first hold icon displayed as the first hold icon h11 moves to the hold display frame FL1 and is displayed as the change icon h0. The second hold icon displayed as the second hold icon h12 also moves to the display position of the first hold icon and is displayed as the first hold icon h11. In the tutorial display section TT1, a character display of “Panda is a master of the lord” is displayed.

  FIG. 30B-1 to FIG. 30B-2 show a state where the wipe display is performed during the error display. 30 (b-1) to FIG. 30 (b-2), the example of production shown in FIG. 30 (a-3) to FIG. Since it is the same as a-4), only different points will be described in detail, and detailed description of other points will be omitted. As shown in FIG. 30 (b-1) to FIG. 30 (b-2), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows a state in which the lower pan full tank error display ER described above overlaps the wipe images WP1 and WP2. Has been. Since such an error display needs to be promptly communicated to the player, it is displayed with priority over other displays. Accordingly, also in the case shown in FIG. 30 (b-1), the lower pan full tank error display ER is given priority over the wipe images WP1 and WP2. As shown in FIG. 30 (b-2), even when the symbol is fixedly displayed, the lower pan full error display ER is not erased and is displayed overlapping the wipe images WP1 and WP2. . Note that an error display such as a lower plate full tank error display ER may be overlapped with the wipe images WP1 and WP2.

  FIG. 30C shows a state where the display positions of the change icon h0 and the ninja character NJ1 are reversed in the hold display frame FL1. Here, FIG. 30 (c) is the same as FIG. 17 (i) except that the display positions of the change icon h0 and the ninja character NJ1 are reversed, so only the differences will be described in detail. Detailed explanation is omitted. In the effect example shown in FIG. 30C, for example, when the extended animation of the hold display frame FL1 is performed, the change icon h0 moves upward along with the extension of the hold display frame FL1, and from the back side of the change icon h0. An effect such that a ninja character NJ1 appears is performed. Thus, in this effect example, it can be said that the display position of the variation icon h0 is changed when the hold display frame FL1 is expanded.

  In FIG. 30 (d-1), a hold display frame FL4 surrounding the second hold icon h12 that is the target of the pre-reading notice is displayed, and the hold display frame FL4 extends upward, and the extended portion has a ninja's display. A state in which the character NJ3 is displayed is shown. 30 (d-1) is the same as that shown in FIG. 17 (d-1) except that the hold display frame FL4 surrounding the second hold icon h12 is displayed and is not displayed on the tutorial display portion TT1. Since it is the same as b), only different points will be described in detail, and detailed descriptions of the other will be omitted. As shown in FIG. 30 (d-1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a hold display frame FL4 is displayed so as to surround the second hold icon h12 which is the display mode of the prefetch notice. The hold display frame FL4 is, for example, a default display mode having a size that matches the size of the second hold icon h12, and is moved in from the lower part of the display screen to the position surrounding the second hold icon h12. Thereafter, a display in which the hold display frame FL4 expands upward is performed in the manner described above by the extended animation. Then, the ninja character NJ3 is displayed on the extended portion of the extended hold display frame FL4, and an effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is performed as described above. It should be noted that both the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon performed by expanding the hold display frame FL1 and the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon performed by expanding the hold display frame FL4 are performed. You may make it overlap, and you may make it the time when both productions are performed not overlap.

  In addition, when an effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is performed, when the symbol is stopped and the next symbol variation display is started, as shown in FIG. 30 (d-2), The hold display frame FL4 also moves in accordance with the movement of the hold icon. In this case, for example, when the symbol stop display is performed, the extended hold display frame FL4 is reduced and changed to the default display mode, and then the symbol is fixedly displayed. Then, the hold display frame FL4 of the default display mode is also moved in accordance with the movement of the second hold icon h12 by the moving animation, and the symbol variation display is started. Thereafter, the hold display frame FL4 is expanded with the extended animation so that the hold display frame FL4 is directed upward. The hold display frame FL4 may be moved in such a manner. Further, at the time of symbol stop display, the hold display frame FL4 may be once erased, and the hold display frame FL4 may be displayed again after the next symbol variation display is started. Also, the display of the hold display frame FL4 may be maintained in an expanded state during the symbol stop display, and the hold display frame FL4 may be moved according to the movement display by the moving animation of the second hold icon h12.

  FIG. 31 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner another example of the expansion effect of the hold display frame. Here, FIG. 31 (a-1) to FIG. 31 (a-4) show how the tutorial display section TT6 as the hold display frame is expanded, and FIG. 31 (b-1) to FIG. In b-5), a state is shown in which the hold display frame in which the hold icon is accommodated is expanded and an effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 31 (a-1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a UI part is arranged at the lower part of the display screen. It is displayed in the form accommodated in FL1, and a hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed is formed on the left side of the fluctuation icon h0. At the timing shown in FIG. 31 (a-1), since two variable displays in FIG. 1 are held, two hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the hold icon display area. The change icon h0 and the two hold icons h11 and h12 are both in the default display mode. At this time, the hold display frame FL1 is a default display mode and does not overlap the decorative design. Further, in this effect example, the tutorial display unit TT6 extends in the left-right direction along the lower end edge of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and is disposed below the hold display frame FL1 and the hold icon display area. . In the tutorial display section TT6, a character display “Panda is a master of the lord” is displayed and an explanation display is shown. In this effect example, the tutorial display unit TT6 may function as a hold display frame.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 31 (a-1), “castle town” is displayed, and it is informed that the current stage is a castle town. In addition, on the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed. In this example effect, the button image 136a is not displayed.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a state where the Tono-sama character is on the stage is shown, and in the upper part of the display screen, the second reserved number display of Special Fig. 1 and Special Fig. 2 and Special Fig. 1 are shown. And the 4th symbol of special figure 2 is displayed. Further, the first decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed small above the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

  In addition, the above-mentioned family crest character 224E is disposed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the above-mentioned eight-generation character 224Fa and the general character character 224Fb are disposed above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Has been.

  FIG. 31 (a-2) shows a state in which the range of the tutorial display portion TT6 is expanded by pushing up the hold display frame FL1 and the hold icon display region by an animation in which the tutorial display portion TT6 extends upward. ing. In the expanded tutorial display section TT6, the drinker showdown reach production is started. At this time, the first decorative symbol that has been variably displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L moves to the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and the variable display is continued. Therefore, in this effect example, it can be said that the area where the display of the decorative symbols is not disturbed is expanded. In other words, by moving the hold display frame FL1 and the hold icon display area, the lower area (lower area) of the hold display frame FL1 and the hold icon display area is expanded. The display performed in the lower area is a display that does not overlap with the decorative pattern that is variably displayed, for example, the display of a dialogue such as a conversation notice, the display of the notice, or the effect of changing the display of the hold icon. It can be said. Further, in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a character display of “SP development by victory” is performed, and the contents of the effect performed when winning by the drinker confrontation reach effect are notified. In the drinking confrontation reach directing, the main character's Tono-sama is confronted with drinking, and if the intoxication is drunk, the main character's Tono-sama will win and it will be announced that it will develop into SP reach. When the drinker confrontation reach effect is started, the hold display frame FL1 and the hold icon display area may be hidden, or the hold display frame FL1 is displayed and the hold icon display area is hidden. May be.

  FIG. 31 (a-3) shows a situation in which a drinker confrontation reach effect is continuously performed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 31 (a-4), when moving to the SP reach, an effect display is displayed in which the frog is drunk and the hero's lord wins. On the other hand, when the result of losing is displayed without shifting to the SP reach, as shown in FIG. 31 (a-4 ′), the effect display that the main character is drunk and the main character has been defeated by the trap Is done. In addition, in the tutorial display part TT6 in the state of FIG. 31 (a-1), the presentation display performed in the tutorial display part TT6 in the state of FIG. 31 (a-2) may not be performed. The tutorial display unit TT6 in the state of FIG. 31 (a-2) may be configured such that the explanation display performed in the tutorial display unit TT6 in the state of FIG. 31 (a-1) is not performed. In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 31 (a-2), the hold icon and the change icon may be hidden.

  As shown in FIG. 31 (b-1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the UI unit UI2 is arranged at the lower part of the display screen. The UI unit UI2 in this effect example has a hold icon display area on the left side. The hold icon display area is partitioned by four frames, each forms a hold display frame, and one hold icon is displayed in each frame. At the timing shown in FIG. 31 (b-1), four hold icons are accommodated in each frame in the hold icon display area, and the first hold icon h11 to the fourth hold icon h14 are included. The second hold icon h12 is a pre-read notice display mode (for example, a display mode that lights in blue), and the other hold icons are set to the default display mode. In addition, a variation icon display area is formed above the frame in which the first hold icon h11 is accommodated, and the variation icon h0 is displayed in the variation icon display area during symbol variation display. Here, the area where the change icon h0 is displayed may also be included in the UI unit UI2. A tutorial display section TT7 is arranged on the right side of the hold icon display area. At the timing shown in FIG. 31 (b-1), the tutorial display unit TT7 displays a character display of “With notice icon digestion ...”, suggesting that a notice effect will be performed. In the tutorial display unit TT7, an explanation display may be performed. Note that neither the fluctuation icon h0 nor the first hold icon h11 to the fourth hold icon h14 overlap the decorative symbol.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed at the top of the display screen. In this effect example, the stage name display section and the button image 136a are not displayed.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a state where the Tono-sama character is on the stage is shown, and in the upper part of the display screen, the second reserved number display of Special Fig. 1 and Special Fig. 2 and Special Fig. 1 are shown. And the 4th symbol of special figure 2 is displayed.

  In addition, the above-mentioned family crest character 224E is disposed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the above-mentioned eight-generation character 224Fa and the general character character 224Fb are disposed above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Has been. Note that at the timing shown in FIG. 31 (b-1), the crest character 224E emits blue light in accordance with the display color of the second hold icon h12.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 31 (b-2), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the hold icon display area is enlarged and displayed. The enlarged display of the hold icon display area can be performed by, for example, an animation display that gradually increases. At the timing shown in FIG. 31 (b-2), the hold display frame that accommodates the second hold icon h12, which is the display mode of the prefetch notice, is enlarged and displayed at the center of the display screen. In other words, in this effect example, it can be said that the hold display frame in which the second hold icon h12 is accommodated is displayed in an expanded manner. Note that at the timing shown in FIG. 31 (b-2), the first decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner on the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 31 (b-3), the emission color of the family crest character 224E that has emitted blue light changes to green. That is, it can be said that the display color of the second hold icon h12 is foreseeing a change from blue to green.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 31 (b-4), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the display color of the enlarged second hold icon h12 is changed from blue to green. Thereby, the player may be able to increase the sense of expectation for the big hit for the symbol variation display related to the hold corresponding to the second hold icon h12.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 31 (b-5), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the hold icon display area is reduced to return to the default display mode. The reduced display of the hold icon display area can be performed by, for example, an animation display that gradually reduces. In this effect example, the hold display frame can be expanded in this way, and the display mode of the hold icon can be changed with the expanded hold display frame.

  Next, other specific examples of effects executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 32 to 157.

  32 to 157 are diagrams showing stepwise modification examples of effects centering on the decorative symbol display device of the pachinko machine 100 applicable to the present embodiment. 32 to 157, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, and the universal figure hold. The lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a are not shown. 32 to 157 show an example in which three decorative symbol display devices are arranged side by side. That is, the first decorative symbol display device 208L disposed at the center of the three decorative symbol display devices, the second decorative symbol display device 208M disposed on the left side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the first decoration. The display is performed by the third decorative symbol display device 208N arranged on the right side of the symbol display device 208L. The first decorative symbol display device 208L may be referred to as a main display device, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be referred to as sub-display devices. The length in the width direction of 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N is shorter than the half of the length of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the height is slightly shorter. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M has its right end side portion overlapped with the front side of the left end side portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N has the left end side portion thereof as the first end portion. One decorative symbol display device 208N overlaps the front side of the right end side portion. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are configured to be slidable in directions close to each other along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N can rotate integrally along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L when they are closest to each other. It is configured to be able to. It should be noted that the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N can rotate independently even when they are not closest to each other. Here, the names of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are not necessarily displayed in a variable manner with respect to each display device. It is added here to make sure that the interpretation of the display device is not narrowed. Further, a combination of these decorative symbol display devices (first decorative symbol display device 208L, second decorative symbol display device 208M, and third decorative symbol display device 208N) is used as an effect display means, and the effect display means is a decoration symbol. It is also possible to display various fluctuations or to display a plurality of types of effects. Further, a transparent light guide plate IL is disposed on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the player can visually recognize the display state of the first decorative symbol display device 208L via the light guide plate IL. ing. The light guide plate IL has a predetermined lens cut in the transmission region. A light emitter such as an LED is provided at an appropriate position near the side edge of the light guide plate IL, and light from the light emitter is reflected forward by the lens cut portion, so that the transmission region emits light in a predetermined pattern. It is structured so that it can look like. In the embodiment shown in FIGS. 32 to 157, the light guide plate IL is subjected to a lens cut having a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image. The light guide plate IL is configured such that the thickness of the portion of the region where light is refracted toward the player side is thinner than the thickness of the irradiated light. Therefore, the display states of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be easily visible. Further, the light guide plate IL may be movable. The light guide plate IL may be provided on the near side of at least one of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. 32 to 157 show the state of the speaker 120 and the effect button 136.

  FIG. 32 is a diagram showing step-by-step examples of other presentation icon increase effects applicable to the present embodiment. FIG. 32 shows a state in which the UI part is displayed in the lower part of the first decorative symbol display device 208 </ b> L with the change icon display area, the hold icon display area, the tutorial display part TT <b> 4, and the stage name display part ST <b> 2 integrated. Has been. When the notice icon is stocked on the stage name display unit ST2, the explanation display on the stage name display unit ST2 is deleted.

  As shown in FIG. 32A, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a UI unit surrounded by a square frame is arranged at the bottom of the display screen. The UI part shown in FIG. 32A has a hold icon display area in the center. The hold icon display area is partitioned by four frames, and one hold icon is displayed in each frame. In addition, a variation icon display area is formed at the center upper portion of the UI unit, and the variation icon is displayed in a manner of being placed on a frame formed by the UI unit. Note that, at the timing shown in FIG. 32A, two variable displays in FIG. 1 are held, and therefore two hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the hold icon display area. The change icon h0 and the two hold icons h11 and h12 are both in the default display mode. A tutorial display section TT4 as an explanation display section is arranged on the right side of the hold icon display area, and a stage name display section ST2 is arranged on the left side of the hold icon display area. Since the functional configurations of the tutorial display unit TT4 and the stage name display unit ST2 are the same as those of the tutorial display unit TT1 and the stage name display unit ST1 described above, description thereof is omitted here. In the tutorial display section TT4 shown in FIG. 32 (a), “With notice icon digestion ...” is displayed, and in the stage name display section ST2, “Castle Town Stage” is displayed. It is reported that the current stage is a castle town. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed at the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a state where the Tono-sama character is on the stage is shown, and various actions are performed according to the progress of the game. In addition, in the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of special figures 1 and 2 and the fourth graphic of special figures 1 and 2 are also displayed.

  Further, the above-mentioned family crest character 224E is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the above-mentioned eight-generation character 224Fa and the general character are above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. 224Fb is arranged.

  Subsequently, when a game ball wins the first special figure starting port 230 at the timing shown in FIG. 32 (b), a third hold icon (third hold icon h13 of FIG. 1) is displayed in the hold icon display area. ) Is displayed, and it is notified that the number of holds has become three. Here, the third hold is a hold of the symbol variation display that is a target of prefetching. In this effect example, the third hold icon h13 is displayed not in the default display mode but in a display mode of a prefetch notice (for example, a display mode with a blue circle).

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 32C, the first decorative symbol display device 208 </ b> L stops and displays the first decorative symbol as a combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 3−decoration 4−decoration 1”, and the display result of the deviation. Is confirmed. At this time, the variation icon h0 is not erased, but may be erased. Also in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed with a combination of decorative symbols of “decoration 3-decoration 4-decoration 1”.

  Thereafter, after the symbol variation in the first special symbol display device 212 is started, a throwing animation is performed in the third decorative symbol display device 208N as shown in FIG. 32 (d). At the timing shown in FIG. 32 (d), a state in which the Tono-sama character throws a bomb icon I61 is shown.

  FIG. 32 (e) shows a state in which after the bomb icon I61 thrown by the Tono-sama character burst, the bomb icon I61 that has been ruptured changes to a pseudo-continuous notice icon I65 and moves to the stage name display section ST2. In the timing shown in FIG. 32 (e), although it overlaps with the stage name display part ST2, a state where it has not reached the predetermined display position (stock position) is shown. In this case, since the pseudo-continuous notice icon I65 is not yet displayed in the stage name display section ST2, the explanation display of “castle town stage” is displayed, and at least one of the pseudo-continuous notice icon I65 is displayed. The part is in a difficult-to-view state. The explanation display may be deleted before the notice icon overlaps the stage name display part ST2. The throwing animation of the bomb icon I61 may be an animation in which the bomb icon I61 moves to the stage name display section. Further, a pattern (so-called gasse) in which the notice icon is not acquired after the throwing animation of the bomb icon I61 may be provided. For example, the bomb icon I61 may pass through the stage name display part ST2 so that the notice icon is not acquired. In this case, the explanation display may not be erased even when the bomb icon I61 overlaps the stage name display section ST2. When the notice icon is acquired (stocked), as shown in FIG. 32 (e), the explanation display (stage name display) is erased before the notice icon is displayed on the stage name display section ST2, and the notice is displayed. In the case where the icon is not acquired, as shown in FIG. 32 (e), the explanation display may be configured not to be erased so that it is possible to grasp in advance whether or not the notice icon is acquired.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 32 (f), when the icon I65 of the pseudo-continuous notice is displayed at a predetermined display position of the stage name display unit ST2, “ The explanation display of “Castle Town Stage” is erased and functions exclusively as an area for displaying the notice icon. Therefore, the characters “STOCK” are displayed above the stage name display section ST2. That is, according to this production example, when the notice icon is stocked in the stage name display part ST2, the stage name is not displayed. Thus, in this effect example, it is shown that the notice icon is displayed during the symbol variation display started after the prefetch target is held.

  After that, when the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 elapses, at the timing shown in FIG. 32 (g), the first decorative design display device 208L has the decorative pattern "decoration 6-decoration 2-decoration 2". The combination is stopped and displayed, and the display result of deviation is confirmed. Also, in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed as a combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 6-decoration 2—decoration 2”.

  Then, when the symbol variation in the first special figure display device 212 is started, as shown in FIG. 32 (h), the hold icons h11 and h12 are respectively moved and displayed by the moving animation, and the display of the first hold icon h11 is displayed. The hold icon at the position becomes the change icon h0 in the change icon display area, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes the first hold icon h11. In addition, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 32 (h) starts the variable display of the first decorative symbol, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M starts the variable display of the second decorative symbol. Is done. Further, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 32 (h), the stage is changed with the start of the variation display of the decorative symbols, and the background display is changed from the castle town to the coast. That is, in this production example, the stage can be changed even when the stage name display unit ST2 is not displayed, and the stage name after the change is displayed when the stage name display unit ST2 is not displayed. There is no display. When the stage is changed, the changed stage name may be displayed on the stage name display unit ST2 for a predetermined time, and thereafter, the stage name may be deleted and a notice icon may be displayed. When the stage is changed, the stage name display unit ST2 does not display the changed stage name, but displays the changed stage name for a few seconds (for example, 5 seconds) in the portion where the background is displayed. You may do it. The stage may be changed at the same time as the start of the decorative symbol variation display, after the decoration symbol variation display is started, or before the decoration symbol variation display is started. May be.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 32 (i), a balloon portion TT2 as a second tutorial display portion (explanation display portion) is displayed on the left side of the display screen together with the character CH1 of Princess Chibi. Yes. In the balloon part TT2, the above-described conversational production and dialogue production are performed. In this production example, by displaying “GET” together with the pseudo-continuous notice icon I65, the notice icon related to the pseudo-continuous notice is acquired. Is displayed. That is, it can be said that the notice icon is displayed in the balloon portion TT2. As described above, in this production example, in a state where the notice icon is displayed in a certain explanation display area (stage name display portion ST2), the notice icon may be displayed in another explanation display area (balloon portion TT2). is there. Moreover, although the blowing part TT2 may overlap with the first decorative symbol, it may be arranged at a position where it does not overlap. The same display as that displayed on the tutorial display section TT4 is not displayed on the balloon section TT2, but may be displayed. Further, the tutorial display unit TT4 may have a larger or smaller display area than the balloon unit TT2. The tutorial display unit TT4 may have a larger or smaller character font than the balloon unit TT2. The tutorial display unit TT4 and the balloon unit TT2 may have the same font or different fonts. In addition, the balloon portion TT2 may overlap with the decorative symbol, but the decorative symbol is configured not to overlap in the display area where other explanation display is performed, but may overlap. Further, the tutorial display unit TT4 may have a lower or higher frequency of explanation display than the balloon unit TT2. Further, the tutorial display part TT4 and the balloon part TT2 may be display areas partitioned by lines, or may be display areas where either one or both are not partitioned by lines. Further, the effect regarding the notice icon may be performed only in the non-electric support state. In this case, for example, in the configuration in which the electric support state is shifted to the non-electric support state and the predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 30 times) is transferred to the predetermined effect mode, the predetermined effect is obtained even in the non-electric support state. In the mode, an effect relating to the notice icon may not be performed.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 32 (j), after the pseudo continuous symbol displayed as "NEXT" in the middle symbol of the first decorative symbol is stopped, "decorative 2-pseudo continuous symbol- A state in which the fluctuation variation display is performed with the combination of the decoration pattern “decoration 3” and the start of the pseudo-ream is produced is shown. This indicates that the pseudo continuous notice is being performed by digesting the pseudo continuous notice icon I65 displayed in the balloon portion TT2. Note that the pseudo-continuous notice icon I65 displayed in the balloon part TT2 may be directly digested from the state displayed in the balloon part TT2, or may be digested after being stocked once in the stage name display part ST2. You may be made to do. In this way, the pseudo-continuous notice icon I65 displayed in the balloon portion TT2 is not stocked until the symbol variation display to be pre-read is performed, but is digested in the symbol variation display performed when the symbol is stocked. You may be made to do. Further, in this production example, when the pseudo-continuous notice icon I65 is digested, the pseudo-continuous notice is always performed. However, there may be a false notice without the pseudo-continuous notice, for example, When the pseudo-continuous notice icon I65 is digested, a pseudo-continuous pattern appears and a button image is displayed, prompting the user to operate the effect button 136. In addition, for example, a question mark may be attached to the notice icon, and a false notice may be given to the notice icon to which this mark is attached. Then, when the player operates the effect button 136 and the pseudo-continuous symbol is stopped and displayed, it is notified that the pseudo-continuous notice starts, and when the pseudo-continuous symbol is not stopped and displayed, a false notice is given. If there is, the display may be stopped and displayed with the combination of the decorative pattern of the loss. In other words, the pseudo-continuous notice icon I65 may be used as a notice item for performing an effect asking whether or not the pseudo-continuous notice is performed.

  FIG. 32 (k1) to FIG. 32 (k4) show an example of a display mode when a plurality of notice icons of the same type are stocked. When a plurality of notice icons of the same type are stocked, any of the modes described below can be adopted, and a plurality of modes may be used in combination.

  As shown in FIG. 32 (k1), for example, when a plurality of pseudo-continuous notice icons I65 are stocked and displayed, the display color may be changed. In the example shown in FIG. 32 (k1), When two icons I65 for pseudo-continuous notice are stocked, a state of being displayed in a red display mode is shown. That is, when the pseudo-continuous notice icon I65 which is a red display mode is displayed, it can be said that the pseudo-continuous notice is notified twice. Here, the display mode of the pseudo-continuous notice icon I65 may be changed according to the number of pseudo-continuous notice icons I65 to be stocked. Further, the change in display mode may be a change in color, a change in shape, a change in size, or a change in display position. Further, when one of the stocked pseudo continuous notice icons I65 is digested, for example, the red continuous display icon I65 swings and then moves upward to display. By changing the aspect from red to white, one pseudo-continuous notice icon I65 is digested, and thereafter, the pseudo-continuous notice icon I65 whose display form has changed is returned to the original display position of the stage name display unit ST2. May be. Here, at the timing when the display mode of the pseudo-continuous notice icon I65 changes, the speaker 120 outputs a sound “paquin” to notify that the pseudo-continuous notice icon I65 has been digested. Good.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 32 (k2), for example, when a plurality of pseudo-continuous notice icons I65 are stocked and displayed, only one pseudo-continuous notice icon I65 is displayed and the number of stock icons. In the example shown in FIG. 32 (k2), when two pseudo continuous notice icons I65 are stocked, “× 2” is displayed together with one pseudo continuous notice icon I65. ”Is informed that two icons I65 for pseudo-continuous notice are stocked. In addition, when one of the stocked pseudo continuous notice icons I65 is digested, for example, after the pseudo continuous notice icon I65 is swung, the pseudo continuous notice icon is displayed on the stage name display unit ST2. One pseudo continuous notice icon I65 may be digested by moving one pseudo continuous notice icon I65 upward while leaving I65. At this time, the display indicating the number of stocks of the pseudo-continuous notice icon I65 displayed on the stage name display section ST2 is erased when it is “× 2”, for example, “× 3”, etc. In the case of a display indicating the number of stocks of three or more, it may be displayed in a form in which the numerical value is reduced by one, such as “× 2”. Here, at the timing when the display mode of the pseudo-continuous notice icon I65 changes, the speaker 120 outputs a sound “paquin” to notify that the pseudo-continuous notice icon I65 has been digested. Good.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 32 (k3), for example, when a plurality of pseudo-continuous notice icons I65 are displayed in stock, they may be displayed side by side as many as the number of pseudo-continuous notice icons I65 that are stocked. In the example shown in FIG. 32 (k3), when two pseudo-continuous notice icons I65 are stocked, the two pseudo-continuous notice icons I65 are displayed side by side, so that the pseudo-continuous notice icon I65 is displayed. Are in stock.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 32 (k4), for example, when a plurality of pseudo-continuous notice icons I65 are displayed in stock, they may be displayed using two explanation display areas. In the example shown in (k4), when three pseudo-continuous notice icons I65 are stocked, one pseudo-continuous notice icon I65 is displayed on the stage name display section ST2, and two pseudo-continuous notice icons I65 are displayed on the balloon section TT2. By displaying the notice icon I65, it is informed that three pseudo-continuous notice icons I65 are stocked.

  32 (k1) and FIG. 32 (k2), for example, it is applied to a notice icon corresponding to a repeated effect such as a pseudo-continuous notice, for example, for the effect of promoting the contents of the effect. You may make it not apply about the notice icon corresponding to the production which is not performed many times like the notice icon of the corresponding thousand carton box. 32 (k1) and FIG. 32 (k2) are applied only to the pseudo-continuous notice icon I65, and notice icons corresponding to repeated effects other than the pseudo-continuous notice (for example, a chance up) The notice icon I63, etc.) may not be applied.

  Further, in this effect example, the stage name display unit ST2 may function as the first display region, the tutorial display unit TT4 may function as the second display region, or the stage name display unit ST2 may display the first display region. The balloon portion TT2 may function as a second display area. Further, the tutorial display section TT4 may function as a first display area, the stage name display section ST2 may function as a second display area, the tutorial display section TT4 functions as a first display area, and a balloon The part TT2 may function as the second display area. Further, the balloon part TT2 may function as a first display area, the stage name display part ST2 may function as a second display area, or the balloon part TT2 may function as a first display area. TT4 may function as the second display area.

  Moreover, in this production example, all of the stage name display unit ST2, the tutorial display unit TT4, and the balloon unit TT2 are configured to be able to display two or more notice icons, but the stage name display unit ST2, the tutorial display unit TT4, A part or all of the balloon part TT2 may be configured to display only one notice icon. For example, only one notice icon may be displayed for the speech balloon TT2 in which the notice is given.

  FIG. 33 is a diagram showing step-by-step examples of notice icon digest effects that can be applied to the present embodiment. FIG. 33 shows an effect performed by digesting the second button notice icon I11.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 33 (a1), a UI unit surrounded by a rectangular frame is arranged at the bottom of the display screen. The UI unit shown in FIG. 33 (a1) has a hold icon display area in the center. The hold icon display area is partitioned by four frames, and one hold icon is displayed in each frame. In addition, a variation icon display area is formed at the center upper portion of the UI unit, and the variation icon is displayed in a manner of being placed on a frame formed by the UI unit. Note that, at the timing shown in FIG. 33 (a1), one variable display of FIG. 1 is held, so one hold icon h11 is displayed in the hold icon display area. The change icon h0 has a default display mode, but the first hold icon h11 is a hold of the symbol change display that is a target of the prefetch notice, and the display form is also a display form of the prefetch notice (for example, (Display mode in blue circles). A tutorial display section TT4 as an explanation display section is arranged on the right side of the hold icon display area, and a stage name display section ST2 is arranged on the left side of the hold icon display area. Since the functional configurations of the tutorial display unit TT4 and the stage name display unit ST2 are the same as those of the tutorial display unit TT1 and the stage name display unit ST1 described above, description thereof is omitted here. In the tutorial display area TT4 shown in FIG. 33 (a1), “With notice icon digestion ...” is displayed, but in the stage name display area ST2, the second button notice icon I11 is stocked. The stage name display is erased. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner, and a pseudo-continuous symbol appears and an effect is given as to whether or not a pseudo-continuous notice is performed. At the timing shown in FIG. 33 (a1), it is made difficult to know which notice the second button notice icon I11 corresponds to, and the player may have a sense of expectation. .

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed at the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a state where the Tono-sama character is on the stage is shown, and various actions are performed according to the progress of the game. In addition, in the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of special figures 1 and 2 and the fourth graphic of special figures 1 and 2 are also displayed.

  Further, the above-mentioned family crest character 224E is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the above-mentioned eight-generation character 224Fa and the general character are above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. 224Fb is arranged.

  Subsequently, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 33 (a2), a state in which the second button notice icon I11 stocked in the stage name display unit ST2 is digested is shown. Specifically, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, display is performed in such a manner that the second button notice icon I11 pops out of the stage name display unit ST2 and hits the pseudo-continuous symbol. At this time, by displaying an effect image showing that the second button notice icon I11 hits the pseudo-continuous pattern, it is produced that the second button notice icon I11 has been digested.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 33 (a3), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays that the button image 136a is displayed together with the button reception time meter MT, and notifies the player that the operation of the effect button 136 can be received. The operation of the production button 136 is promoted. Thus, by operating the effect button 136, an expectation is given as to whether or not a pseudo continuous notice is generated. In the stage name display unit ST2, since the notice icons that have been stocked are no longer displayed, the display of the stage name is resumed, and the current stage “shore stage” is displayed. Further, since the operation of the effect button 136 is validated, the chance button lamp 138 emits red light to notify the player to that effect. The timing at which the button image 136a is displayed may be the same as the timing at which the chance button lamp 138 emits red light, or the chance button lamp 138 emits red after the button image 136a starts displaying. The button image 136a may be displayed after the chance button lamp 138 emits red light.

  When the player operates the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 33 (a4), as shown in FIG. 33 (a5), the first decorative symbol display device 208L displays the middle symbol of the first decorative symbol. After the quasi-continuous symbol is stopped, the fluctuation variation display is performed with the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 2-pseudo-continuous symbol-decoration 3”, and it is shown that the pseudo-rendition starts. . When the effect button 136 is operated, but an effect of failure is performed, the pseudo-continuous symbols are scrolled down and a combination of lost decorative symbols is derived.

  Thus, in this effect example, it can be said that the second button notice icon I11 is an example of a notice icon related to the operation means.

  In this effect example, a plurality of second button notice icons I11 may be stocked, and each may be targeted for the same notice effect (for example, pseudo-continuous notice). However, different notices (for example, pseudo-continuous notice and cut-in notice) may be targeted. In this production example, when a plurality of second button notice icons I11 are stocked, the number of stocked button effects is generated. Therefore, the second button notice icon I11 is displayed. The more you are stocked, the more you can expect.

  FIG. 33 (b1) to FIG. 33 (b7) show another mode in which the button notice icon is stocked and another mode in which the stocked button notice icon is digested.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 33 (b1), a UI unit surrounded by a square frame is arranged at the bottom of the display screen. The UI section shown in FIG. 33 (b1) has a hold icon display area formed in the center thereof. The hold icon display area is partitioned by four frames, and one hold icon is displayed in each frame. In addition, a variation icon display area is formed at the center upper portion of the UI unit, and the variation icon is displayed in a manner of being placed on a frame formed by the UI unit. Note that, at the timing shown in FIG. 33 (b1), since one variable display of FIG. 1 is held, one hold icon h11 is displayed in the hold icon display area. The change icon h0 has a default display mode, but the first hold icon h11 is a hold of the symbol change display that is a target of the prefetch notice, and the display form is also a display form of the prefetch notice (for example, (Display mode in blue circles). A tutorial display section TT4 as an explanation display section is arranged on the right side of the hold icon display area, and a stage name display section ST2 is arranged on the left side of the hold icon display area. Since the functional configurations of the tutorial display unit TT4 and the stage name display unit ST2 are the same as those of the tutorial display unit TT1 and the stage name display unit ST1 described above, description thereof is omitted here. In the tutorial display section TT4 shown in FIG. 33 (b1), “With notice icon digestion ...” is displayed, and in the stage name display section ST2, “coast stage” which is the current stage name is displayed. Has been. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a variable display of the first decorative symbol is also performed. Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 33 (b1), a part icon p1 of “+1” indicating the number of parts necessary for stocking the button notice icon appears. As will be described in detail later, when the part icon p1 appears, the number of parts of the button meter 136m indicated by the part icon p1 is accumulated, and when the tank is full, one button notice icon is stocked.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed at the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M. A button meter 136m simulating the shape of the effect button 136 is displayed at the bottom of the second decorative symbol display device 208M. The button meter 136m is configured by four parts, and is configured such that the parts are accumulated when the above-described part icon p1 appears. Note that at the timing shown in FIG. 33 (b1), no parts have been stored yet. Above the button meter 136m, the remaining number of times that the button notice icon can be digested (that is, the number of stocks) is displayed, and at the timing shown in FIG. 33 (b1), “0 more times” is displayed. Notifies that there is no digestible button notice icon. The button meter 136m may be always displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, or may not be displayed.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a state where the Tono-sama character is on the stage is shown, and various actions are performed according to the progress of the game. In addition, in the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of special figures 1 and 2 and the fourth graphic of special figures 1 and 2 are also displayed.

  Further, the above-mentioned family crest character 224E is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the above-mentioned eight-generation character 224Fa and the general character are above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. 224Fb is arranged.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 33 (b2), the part icon p1 displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is deleted, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M has one part of the button meter 136m. The state of accumulation is shown.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 33 (b3), the balloon portion TT2 is displayed on the left side of the display screen together with the princess Chibi character CH1. In the balloon part TT2, “GET” is displayed together with the part icon p1 displaying “+1”, and it is informed that one part of the button meter 136m is accumulated. Thus, in this effect example, a state is shown in which the display of the part icon p1 is also performed in the balloon part TT2. Note that a part icon p1 may be displayed on the tutorial display unit TT4 or the stage display unit ST2 to notify that the parts of the button meter 136m are accumulated. Note that the second decorative symbol display device 208M shown in FIG. 33 (b3) shows a state where three parts of the button meter 136m are stored.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 33 (b4), the Chibi princess character CH1 and the balloon TT2 displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L are erased, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M has a button meter. It shows how the 136m parts are full.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 33 (b5), in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the display of the remaining digestible number of button notice icons becomes “one more time”, that is, one button notice icon is stocked. The button meter 136m is changed to a display mode in which no parts are stored.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 33 (b6), the stocked button notice icon is digested, and the second button notice icon I11 appears, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M changes to the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The display is performed in such a manner that it moves over and hits the pseudo-continuous pattern. At this time, by displaying an effect image showing that the second button notice icon I11 hits the pseudo-continuous pattern, it is produced that the second button notice icon I11 has been digested.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 33 (b7), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays that the button image 136a is displayed together with the button reception time meter MT and notifies that the operation of the effect button 136 can be received, and the player The operation of the production button 136 is promoted. Thus, by operating the effect button 136, an expectation is given as to whether or not a pseudo continuous notice is generated. It should be noted that the remaining number of times that the button notice icon can be digested is displayed “0 more times”, that is, it is informed that the number of button notice icon stocks has become zero. Further, since the operation of the effect button 136 is validated, the chance button lamp 138 emits red light to notify the player to that effect.

  As described above, in this effect example, the button notice icon is stocked differently from the other notice icons.

  According to this production example, in the situation where, for example, when one more part of the button meter 136m is accumulated and the button production is generated due to the full tank, the appearance of the part icon p1 displaying “+1” is expected. There are cases where the production can be entertained. In addition, for example, in a situation where two or more parts need to be stored before the button meter 136m is full, a part icon p1 that stores a plurality of parts such as “+2” can be displayed, It may be possible to avoid giving up.

  FIG. 33 (c1) to FIG. 33 (c3) show another mode in which button notice icons are stocked. In this production example, when the number of remaining digestible button notification icons is not displayed and the parts of the button meter 136m are full, the second button hold icon I11 appears and appears on the stage name display section ST2. The stock is shown. Note that FIGS. 33 (c1) to (c2) are the same as FIGS. 33 (b3) to (b4) except that the remaining noticeable number of button notice icons is not displayed. The description is omitted.

  When the parts of the button meter 136m are full, as shown in FIG. 33 (c3), in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second button notice icon I11 appears, and the second button notice icon I11 that has appeared. Moves from the second decorative symbol display device 208M to the first decorative symbol display device 208L toward the stage name display unit ST2, and the second button notice icon I11 is at a predetermined display position of the stage name display unit ST2. When displayed, the stage name display of “coast stage” that has been displayed so far is erased in the stage name display section ST2, and the characters “STOCK” are displayed above the stage name display section ST2. A state in which it is informed that it is the stock area of the notice icon is shown. In addition, the button meter 136m is changed to a display mode in which no parts are stored. The timing at which the button meter 136m changes to a display mode in which no parts are stored may be the same as the timing at which the second button notice icon I11 is stocked in the stage name display section ST2. After the meter 136m changes to a display mode in which no parts are stored, the second button notice icon I11 may be stocked in the stage name display part ST2, or the second button notice icon I11 may be displayed. After being stocked in the stage name display section ST2, the button meter 136m may be changed to a display mode in which no parts are stored.

  Next, an effect in which the operation means display is displayed will be described.

  FIG. 34 is a diagram showing step by step an example in which the operation means display is displayed across the continuous symbol variation display.

  FIG. 34A shows the first decorative symbol display device 208L in the center, the second decorative symbol display device 208M on the left side, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N on the right side.

  In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 34, the family crest character that has been arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L so far is slightly larger in size than the upper portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Is arranged in. That is, the family crest character 224E 'shown in FIG. 34 has its lower half overlapped with the upper part of the first decorative symbol display device 208L from the front side (player side), and this position corresponds to the initial position. 34 can be dropped from the initial position, and when the dropping operation is performed, the entire family crest member 224E 'overlaps the first decorative symbol display device 208L from the front side. The family crest character 224E ′ and the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to 208N have a front-rear relationship (positional relationship in the depth direction). Is the rearmost side, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are arranged between the family crest character 224E ′ and the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

  In FIG. 34, it is executed in the first special figure display device 212 (see FIG. 1 etc.) not shown in FIG. The variable display symbol (special symbol) corresponds to the first symbol. Also, a variable display symbol (ordinary symbol) executed in the ordinary symbol display device 210 (see FIG. 1 and the like) (not shown) corresponds to the second symbol. Then, the decorative symbol of variable display executed in the first decorative symbol display device 208L corresponds to the third symbol pd3. In other words, the decorative symbol shown in FIG. 5B displayed in a variable manner in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c in the first decorative symbol display device 208L corresponds to the third symbol pd3. The third symbol pd3 is an effect symbol representing the first symbol (not shown) with an enhanced decoration. The display of the first symbol is controlled by the main control unit 300, and the display of the third symbol pd3 is controlled on the sub-control units 400 and 500 side. As described above, on the side of the sub-control units 400 and 500, the timer interrupt process is executed every predetermined period. For this reason, in the first symbol and the third symbol pd3, at least a time lag is generated for a predetermined period of the timer interrupt process on the sub-control unit 400, 500 side. When the symbol pd3 also starts to be changed and the first symbol is stopped, the third symbol pd3 is also stopped. The following description will be made using the third symbol pd3 or based on the third symbol pd3. However, the same thing can be said even if the third symbol pd3 is replaced with the first symbol.

  The fourth symbol pd4 is displayed at the upper left corner of the second decorative symbol display device 208M on the left side. Here, the fourth symbol pd4 indicates that the display mode of the combination of the white square and the black circle is a variable display of the third symbol pd3 (decorative symbol), and the display mode of the combination of the black square and the white circle is the third symbol pd3. Indicates that the stop is being displayed. In addition, you may distinguish and display during change display and stop display by lighting of the LED lamp etc. of a board surface. Further, on the upper right of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a mini decorative symbol obtained by reducing and displaying the third symbol pd3 is shown, and this mini decorative symbol corresponds to the fifth symbol pd5. The display pattern of the fifth symbol pd5 may be different from that of the third symbol pd3, as long as it is smaller than the size of the third symbol pd3, the display position is different, or the display position is different. Good. The 5th symbol pd5 also performs a variable display and a stop display, and, like the 4th symbol pd4, plays a role of clearly indicating the variation display and the stop display of the 3rd symbol pd3. Accordingly, the fourth symbol pd4 and the fifth symbol pd5 are synchronized with each other. A plurality of the third symbol pd3, the fourth symbol pd4, and the fifth symbol pd5 may be displayed.

  In the state shown in FIG. 34 (1), the third symbol pd3 is being displayed in a variable display, the fourth symbol pd4 is a combination of a white square and a black circle, and the fifth symbol pd5 is also in a variable display. It is being displayed.

  In addition, two hold icons h1 and h2 are displayed in the effect display area 208d of the first special figure display device 212 shown in FIG. Has been. That is, the hold icon is displayed for the number of the hold balls of the special figure. The first hold icon (first hold icon) h1 with the old winning timing is displayed in the white display mode which is the default display mode, but the second hold icon (second hold icon) with the new winning timing is displayed. ) H2 is displayed in a red display mode which is a display mode of the pre-reading notice. In addition to this, the hold icon may be displayed in a character or pattern display mode, and represents the big hit expectation in the symbol variation display corresponding to the hold for each display mode. However, even in a display mode in which the degree of expectation of a big hit is high, the symbol variation display corresponding to the hold is not necessarily a big hit, and there may be a loss. That is, the higher the degree of expectation for jackpot, the easier it is to finally display the jackpot symbol form in the first symbol. In addition, the timing at which the hold icon starts to be displayed in the pre-reading notice mode or changes to the pre-reading notice mode includes the start of change, during change, at the time of stoppage, and at the time of winning the pre-read target hold. In the example shown in FIG. 34, only four areas hs for displaying the hold icon are prepared. However, only the number (for example, eight) of the number of reserved balls in FIG. It may be prepared. In addition, an area cs for displaying a variation icon is prepared on the left side of the effect display area 208d, and this area cs is a stage higher than the area hs for displaying the hold icon. The variation icon c is an icon displayed as an icon corresponding to the symbol variation after the symbol variation corresponding to the hold icon is started. The variation icon c shown in FIG. 34 (1) is displayed in a white display mode which is a default display mode. The variation icon c may also be displayed in a display mode having a different color or a character or pattern display mode, and represents the expectation degree of jackpot in the symbol variation display being executed for each display mode. However, even in a display mode in which the degree of expectation of the big hit is high, it is not always a big hit in the symbol variation display being executed, and there may be a case where the big hit is lost.

  In addition, a mini character display (hereinafter referred to as “mini character”) is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M on the left side shown in FIG. This mini character is a display that is displayed regardless of whether the 3rd symbol (decorative symbol) is displayed in a variable manner or not, and in the example shown in FIG. 34, the display Cd of the character of the character who is the main character, Cd, It consists of a combination of a character display Lv representing a name and level (here Lv3) and a gauge display Gm. Of these displays, the character display Lv and the gauge display Gm are displayed to the Internet cooperative service user. In other words, it is a service for members registered on the Web, and the gauge increases according to the number of symbol variation display and the number of jackpots, and the level is increased when the gauge is full. A notice effect using a mini character may be performed. For example, the big hit expectation degree (here, the big hit expectation degree in the currently displayed symbol variation display) may be indicated by the action or dialogue of Tono-sama character. Further, the change in how the gauge is increased in the gauge display Gm and the color of the gauge may indicate the expected degree of jackpot in the hold (that is, equivalent to a pre-reading notice). Further, the display mode of the hold icon may be changed or the display mode of the operation means display to be described later may be changed by an animation using the Tono-sama character.

  Further, in the third decorative symbol display device 208N on the right side shown in FIG. 34 (1), the wipe display Wd is performed. In the example shown in FIG. 34, the name of the background stage is displayed on the wipe display Wd. Here, it is a castle town stage, and “wisdom town” is displayed on the wipe display Wd, and the streets of the castle town are displayed in common in the background of the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to 208N. Note that the effect display mode may be displayed on the wipe display Wd, the current control state (for example, during probability change) may be displayed, a pre-reading notice may be displayed, and the current symbol variation is being performed. A notice (normal notice) for display may be displayed.

  In addition, an operation means display is displayed below the wipe display Wd in the third decorative symbol display device 208N on the right side shown in FIG. 34 (1). In the example shown in FIG. 34, the display imitating the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 1 is displayed regardless of whether the third symbol (decorative symbol) is being displayed or stopped. There are four types of display in the operation means display, which are hereinafter referred to as a first operation means display, a second operation means display, a third operation means display, and a fourth operation means display. In FIG. 34 (1), the first operation means display Od1 is displayed. The first operation means display Od1 is a display in which PUSH characters are added to a display that imitates the chance button 136 that emits white light. For example, a display that imitates the chance button 136 that is turned off. It may be a display in which the PUSH characters are omitted. The first operation unit display Od1 may be a default operation unit display among a plurality of types of operation unit displays. Further, the operation means display only needs to be an operation means that can be operated by the player, and is not limited to the chance button 136. The transparent portion 191 shown in FIG. Each key in 181 or a second chance button may be used. The operation means display may be a display related to the operation means. For example, an operation such as a display indicating the operation means, a display associated with the operation means, for example, a PUSH character display or an arrow indicating the operation direction. Display for prompting operation of the means (hereinafter referred to as “operation promotion display”), for example, display of the remaining period of the operation effective period of the operation means such as meter display, numerical display, and number display (hereinafter referred to as “remaining period display”). Can be enumerated. That is, as the operation means display, all of the above-mentioned enumerations may be used, or a combination thereof may be appropriately made. On the other hand, some of those listed above may not be applied. In the example shown in FIG. 34, the operation means display is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N, but may be displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, or the second decorative symbol display device 208M. May be displayed on a plurality of decorative symbol display devices, or may be displayed across a plurality of decorative symbol display devices. Further, the display number of the operation means display is not limited to one, and may be plural.

  It should be noted that the button image 136a shown in FIG. 14 and the like, and the button meter-136m shown in FIG. Whether the button image 136a or the button meter 136m in each figure is classified into the first operation means display to the fourth operation means display is described below. Depending on the feature of the operation means display, it is classified appropriately.

  In addition, the display position, size, and display number of various displays described here are not limited to those described here, and can be changed as appropriate. Further, the fourth symbol pd4 and the fifth symbol pd5 may be displayed with priority over other displays. For example, when the movable means such as the family crest member 224E ′ overlaps the fourth symbol pd4 or the fifth symbol pd5 from the front side, a plurality of the fourth symbol pd4 or the fifth symbol pd5 is displayed from the beginning. Alternatively, the display position may be changed according to the movement of the movable means.

  In FIG. 34 (2), the first operation means display Od1 displayed in FIG. 34 (1) is changed to the second operation means display Od2. The second operation means display Od2 may be a display developed from the first operation means display Od1, or may be a display switched from the first operation means display Od1. The second operation means display Od2 is a display different from the first operation means display Od1. The different display referred to here may be a display in which the display mode is changed. That is, the display may have the same shape and at least one of color, size, pattern, etc., or the shape, color, size, pattern, etc. may be the same, The display may be different in operation modes such as vibration and rotation. In these cases, the operation means itself is not changed, and the first operation means display Od1 and the second operation means display Od2 are displays for the common operation means (here, the chance button 136). Moreover, the display from which a shape differs may be sufficient. When the shape is different, the operating means is the same, but when the operating means itself is deformed (for example, advanced display, reverse display, open display, closed display, display deformed by operation, etc.) It may be a case where the display changes from the display imitating the operation means to the character display “PUSH” as the operation promotion display, or the meter display indicating the remaining period as the remaining period display. It may be a case where it has changed. Furthermore, the operation means itself may be replaced (for example, when the display imitating the chance button 136 is replaced with the display imitating the second chance button). The matter described in this paragraph is the same in the following description.

  However, the second operation means display Od2 may have the same display mode as the first operation means display Od1. In this case, the difference between the second operation means display Od2 and the first operation means display Od1 is that the second operation means display Od2 is displayed in the second operation means display Od2, as will be described later. When the corresponding operation means is operated in the state, the display mode changes, whereas the first operation means display Od1 is the state in which the first operation means display Od1 is displayed and the corresponding operation means. Even if is operated, the display mode does not change. In addition, the second operation means display Od2 enables the operation of the corresponding operation means in the display state, whereas the first operation means display Od1 disables the operation of the corresponding operation means in the display state. There may be a difference.

  The second operation means display Od2 shown in FIG. 34 (2) is a display in which PUSH characters as an operation promotion display are added to the display imitating the chance button 136 that emits red light.

  The timing at which the first operation means display Od1 changes to the second operation means display Od2 is during the display of the variable display of the third symbol pd3. This change timing is that the display of the first operation means display Od1 is determined from the stage determined by the effect lottery or the like, and the third symbol at which the display of the first operation means display Od1 is started. There may be a case where the change display of the third symbol pd3 is started next and the change display of the third symbol pd3 is started next. In this case, the first operation means display Od1 continues to be displayed during the stop display of the third symbol pd3 (during the actual stop), and the second operation means simultaneously with the start of the variable display of the next third symbol pd3. The first operation means display Od1 continues to be displayed even when the display changes to the display Od2 or when the next variation display of the third symbol pd3 starts, and the second variation after the variation display of the next third symbol pd3 is started. You may change to operation means display Od2. That is, the first operation means display Od1 may be displayed across a plurality of variable displays of the third symbol pd3. The timing at which the first operation means display Od1 changes to the second operation means display Od2 may be during the stop display of the third symbol pd3 (during the actual stop).

  Further, FIG. 34 (2) shows the speaker 120, and a sound effect is output from the speaker 120 to notify that the display mode of the second operation means display Od2 has changed. Further, the actual chance button 136 itself changes from the white light emission state to the red light emission state. Note that the output of the sound effect, the change to the second operation means display Od2, and the change of the chance button 136 itself may be simultaneous, any one may be started first, or any one One may start later. Besides the output of the sound effect, the change to the second operation means display Od2 may be notified by lighting or blinking of the LED lamp on the board, the frame lamp 122 shown in FIG.

  In FIG. 34 (3), the third symbol pd3 is displayed in a swaying manner (temporarily stopped) with the combination of the decorative symbols lost ("decoration 7"-"decoration 7"-"decoration 1"). On the other hand, the changing state is displayed in the fifth symbol pd5, and the fourth symbol pd4 remains the display mode of the combination of the white square and the black circle indicating that the variable symbol is being displayed.

  In FIG. 34 (4), the third symbol pd3 is stopped and displayed (combined stop) by a combination of the decorative symbols lost. Similarly to the third symbol pd3, the fifth symbol pd5 also displays the combination of the decorative symbols lost (main stop), and the fourth symbol pd4 is a display form of a combination of a black square and a white circle indicating that the symbol is stopped. It has switched to. The period shown in FIGS. 34 (4) to (6) is a fixed display period for the first symbol (not shown), and the same display is continued for the third symbol pd3 to the fifth symbol pd5. It is displayed. The second operation means display Od2 is also continuously displayed. That is, the display is continued without returning to the first operation means display Od1 before the change. In FIG. 34 (5), the number of symbol variation display has increased because the symbol variation display has been completed (the third symbol pd3 has been completely stopped), and the gauge in the gauge display Gm has increased. (Refer to the arrow pointing to the right shown in FIG. 34 (5)). However, the gauge may increase due to the temporary stop of the third symbol pd3. In FIG. 34 (6), the variation icon c disappears from the region cs where the variation icon is displayed.

  In FIG. 34 (7), the variation display of the third symbol pd3 is started, and also in the fifth symbol pd5, the variation symbol of the decorative symbol is displayed as in the case of the third symbol pd3, and the variation of the fourth symbol pd4 is displayed. The display mode is switched to a combination of a white square and a black circle representing the inside. However, the shift movement of the hold icon is not started, and the change icon is not displayed in the region cs where the change icon is displayed. Further, even when the variable display of the third symbol pd3 is started, the second operation means display Od2 is continuously displayed, and the second operation means display Od2 extends over the continuous variable display of the third symbol pd3. Is displayed. Further, in FIG. 34 (8), the shift movement of the hold icon has started, and the hold icon h1 that has been displayed in the area hs that displays the first hold icon until now changes to the area cs that displays the change icon. The hold icon h2 displayed in the area hs displaying the second hold icon is starting to move toward the area hs displaying the first hold icon. The order of the start of shift movement of the hold icon, the start of the variation display of the third symbol pd3, the switching of the display mode of the fourth symbol pd4, the start of the variation display of the fifth symbol pd5 at the start of the variation of the first symbol, It may be simultaneous, or one of them may be first. However, the timing of switching the display mode of the fourth symbol pd4 coincides with the timing of starting the variable display of the fifth symbol pd5.

  In FIG. 34 (9), the shift movement of the hold icon is completed, and the variable icon c of the white display mode, which is the default display mode, is displayed in the area cs where the change icon is displayed. A hold icon h1 having a red display mode, which is a display mode of a prefetch notice, is displayed in the display area hs.

  Also in FIG. 34 (10), the variation display of the third symbol pd3 continues, and the display of the second operation means display Od2 is also continued. Here, the display mode of the second operation means display Od2 changes, and a meter display Tm representing the remaining period which is the remaining period display is added. In other words, the second operation means display Od2 is a combination of the display in which PUSH characters are added to the display imitating the chance button 136 that emits red light and the meter display Tm. In addition, a sound effect is output from the speaker 120 to notify that the display mode of the second operation means display Od2 has changed. Either the change of the display mode or the output of the sound effect may be first or may be simultaneous. The meter display Tm is a display different from the second operation means display Od2, and the display mode of the second operation means display Od2 does not change, and it can be said that the meter display Tm is added. Further, instead of adding the meter display Tm, or together with the addition of the meter display Tm, the display mode of the second operation means display Od2 may be changed. For example, the display may be blinked, the color may be changed, or the display may be enlarged.

  Also in FIG. 34 (11), the variation display of the third symbol pd3 continues, the meter of the meter display Tm is slightly reduced, and in FIG. 34 (12), the operation means corresponds to the second operation means display Od2. The chance button 136 is operated. When the chance button 136 is operated while the second operation means display Od2 is displayed, the display mode of the second operation means display Od2 changes. In this example, as shown in FIG. 34 (13), the display returns to the first operation means display Od1. That is, the display mode in which the PUSH character is added to the display imitating the chance button 136 that emits red light is changed to the display mode in which the PUSH character is added to the display that imitates the white chance button 136. Yes. Further, when the chance button 136 is operated in a state where the second operation means display Od2 is displayed, a pre-reading notice (corresponding to the first notice effect) may be started. That is, the wipe display Wd, which has previously displayed “castle town” as the name of the background stage, displays “heat” as a pre-reading notice, and the wipe is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. An effect image Ed is added to the display Wd. The effect image Ed is an effect for conspicuously indicating that the pre-reading notice has been started. Here, the pre-reading notice is also started by the output of the sound effect from the speaker 120, the emission of various lamps, and other displays. You may notify that. Note that the output of sound effects, the light emission of various lamps, and other displays can be regarded as one of the pre-reading notices (corresponding to the first notice effect). In the state shown in FIG. 34 (13), there is only one special figure hold, so the target of the pre-reading notice with the characters “heat” displayed on the wipe display Wd is the hold icon h1 shown in FIG. 34 (13). The symbol change display corresponding to the first hold indicated by. Since the hold icon h1 is displayed in the display mode of the pre-reading notice, two types of pre-reading notices such as the pre-reading notice by the wipe display Wd and the pre-reading notice by the display mode of the hold icon are executed. Become. Also, the change of the display mode of the second operation means display Od2, the switching to the pre-reading notice display on the wipe display Wd, and the addition of the effect image Ed shown in FIG. 34 (13) may be performed simultaneously. Any one may be started first, and any one may be started later. The effect image Ed may be light emission of the effect image pattern by the light guide plate.

  Here, another possible example will be described in detail. First, even when the chance button 136, which is the operation means corresponding to the first operation means display Od1, is operated in the state where the first operation means display Od1 shown in FIG. 34 (1) is displayed, nothing changes. Does not happen. That is, the display mode of the first operation means display Od1 does not change, the first operation means display Od1 is displayed as it is, and an effect in response to the operation of the chance button 136 (for example, a notice effect) is started. Not. Therefore, it can be said that the operation of the chance button 136 at this timing is invalidated, and the first operation means display Od1 is a display indicating that the operation of the chance button 136 is invalid. it can. In the following description, it is assumed that the operation of the operation unit is invalid, including that the operation of the operation unit is not accepted and that the operation is invalidated as accepted.

  Next, during the period of variation display of the third symbol pd3 being executed when the first operation means display Od1 is changed to the second operation means display Od2 (FIG. 34 (2) to FIG. 34 (3)). Even when the chance button 136 which is the operation means corresponding to the second operation means display Od2 is operated, the “heat” which is the pre-reading notice on the wipe display Wd as described with reference to FIG. And the effect image Ed are added, and the pre-reading notice is started. Further, the second operation means display Od2 returns to the first operation means display Od1. In this case, the second operation means display Od2 in a display mode in which PUSH characters are added to the display imitating the chance button 136 that emits red light is a display indicating that the operation of the chance button 136 is effective. It can be said.

  On the other hand, the prefetch notice may not be started. That is, until the meter display Tm with the display added in FIG. 34 (10) is displayed, even if the chance button 136 is operated, as in the state where the first operation means display Od1 is displayed. No change may occur. In this case, it can be said that the second operation means display Od2 including the meter display Tm is a display indicating that the operation of the chance button 136 is effective, and FIGS. 34 (2) to (9). It can be said that the second operation means display Od2 having no meter display Tm is a display indicating that the operation of the chance button 136 is invalid. It can also be said that the meter display Tm itself is a display indicating that the operation of the chance button 136 is effective. Further, the pre-reading notice may not be started even if the chance button 136 is operated unless the stop display of the third symbol pd3 is performed after the change to the second operation means display Od2. That is, it can be said that the second operation means display Od2 shown in FIGS. 34 (2) to (6) is a display indicating that the operation of the chance button 136 is invalid. Further, the pre-reading notice may be started when the chance button 136 is operated only during the variation display of the third symbol pd3 being executed when the second operation means display Od2 is changed. . That is, the second operation means display Od2 shown in FIGS. 34 (2) to (3) can be said to indicate that the operation of the chance button 136 is valid, and the chance button 136 is operated. If not, the second operation means display Od2 may return to the first operation means display Od1 at the timing of FIG. 34 (4). Alternatively, the pre-reading notice may not be started unless the chance button 136 is operated before the display of the third symbol pd3 after the second operation means display Od2 is displayed (temporary stop). If the chance button 136 is not operated, the second operation means display Od2 returns to the first operation means display Od1 at the timing of the shaking display (temporary stop) shown in FIG. Also good. Further, even when the third symbol pd3 is being stopped (mainly stopped), if the chance button 136 is operated while the second operation means display Od2 is displayed, the pre-reading notice is started. There may be.

  Further, the meter with the meter display Tm shown in FIG. 34 (10) becomes 0 at the timing of FIG. 34 (14), for example, when the chance button 136 is not operated. That is, it becomes 0 before the symbol variation display subject to the prefetch notice is started. Even if the chance button 136 is not operated within the operation valid period, it is assumed that the operation has been performed. After the meter on the meter display Tm becomes 0, the word “heat” which is a pre-reading notice on the wipe display Wd is displayed. Is displayed and an effect image Ed is added, and a pre-reading notice is started. When there is no operation, the aspect of the pre-reading notice effect may be changed. For example, when the effect image Ed is not displayed or there is an operation, sound output such as a sound effect is executed, but when there is no operation, the sound output may not be executed.

  Although various aspects have been described above, the second operation means display Od2 returns to the first operation means display Od1 when the prefetching notice is started. However, it may not return. Further, when the chance button 136 is operated, the second operation means display Od2 may return to the first operation means display Od1 even if the pre-reading notice is not started. However, as long as the pre-reading notice is not started, the operation of the chance button 136 may be accepted thereafter, and the pre-reading notice may be started. In this case, the second operation is performed until the pre-reading notice is started. The means display Od2 may continue to be displayed as the second operation means display Od2 without returning to the first operation means display Od1.

  The fact that the pre-reading notice may be executed after the second operation means display Od2 is displayed means that the second operation means display Od2 itself corresponds to the display of the pre-reading notice (third notice effect). I can say that.

  In FIG. 34 (14), the third symbol pd3 is swayed (temporarily stopped) due to the combination of the decorative symbols being lost, but as in FIG. The fourth symbol pd4 remains in the display mode indicating that the variable display is being performed. Further, although the effect image Ed has disappeared, the pre-reading notice display (character display of “heat”) on the wipe display Wd continues.

  In FIG. 34 (15), the third symbol pd3 stops and displays the combination of decorative symbols, and the fifth symbol pd5 also displays the combination of decorative symbols and stops (mainly stops). The 4 symbol pd4 is switched to the display mode indicating that the stop display is being performed, and the fixed display period (FIG. 34 (15) to FIG. 17 (17)) of the first symbol (special symbol) (not shown) is started. Even during this fixed display period (during the actual stop of the third symbol pd3), the first operation means display Od1 is continuously displayed. In FIG. 34 (16), the number of symbol variation display has increased due to the completion of symbol variation display, and the gauge in the gauge display Gm has increased (see the arrow pointing to the right in FIG. 34 (16)). ). In FIG. 34 (17), the fluctuation icon c disappears from the area cs where the fluctuation icon is displayed.

  In FIG. 34 (18), the variation display of the third symbol pd3 is started again, and the variation symbol of the decorative symbol is displayed in the fifth symbol pd5 as well as the third symbol pd3. The display mode is switched to the display mode. However, the shift movement of the hold icon has not started. Further, even when the variation display of the third symbol pd3 is started, the first operation means display Od1 is continuously displayed, and the first operation means display Od1 is also displayed a plurality of variations of the third symbol pd3. Are displayed.

  FIG. 35 is a diagram showing step by step an example in which the operation means display is displayed following FIG.

  In FIG. 35 (19) following FIG. 34 (18), the shift movement of the hold icon is started, and the hold icon h1 of the prefetch notice display mode starts moving toward the area cs displaying the change icon, In FIG. 35 (20), the shift movement of the hold icon is completed and the hold icon is no longer displayed, but the change icon c in the red display mode is displayed in the area cs where the change icon is displayed. The symbol variation display started in FIG. 34 (18) is a symbol variation display that is a target of the above-described two types of prefetching advance notices (the prefetching advance notice by the wipe display Wd and the prefetching advance notice by the display mode of the hold icon h1). Even if the symbol variation display that was the subject of the pre-reading notice is started, the “heat” character is displayed on the wipe display Wd, but the symbol variation display that was the subject of the pre-fetching notice has been started. Therefore, the character “heat” in the wipe display Wd becomes a so-called normal notice (the change notice) for the currently displayed symbol change display. Further, the change icon c in the red display mode is also displayed in the display mode of the normal notice (the change notice). That is, the pre-reading notice is switched to the normal notice at the start of the symbol variation display subject to the pre-reading notice. By switching from the pre-reading notice to the normal notice and continuing the normal notice, many players may be able to notice that the started symbol change display is hot.

  In FIG. 35 (21), the reach effect of “decoration 7” is started in the variation display of the third symbol pd3, and in FIG. In addition to the sound, it may be notified that the reach effect has been started by light emission or display of various lamps. In this state, the reach effect is a normal reach effect, but the reach effect of “decoration 7” may be a reach effect with a higher degree of expectation of a big hit than a reach effect with other numbers. In FIG. 35 (23), a balloon display is added to the character design display Cd displayed on the second decorative design display device 208M. The display of the balloon is a character display of “development” that suggests or notifies the advancement to super reach, and is displayed across the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In addition, the display of this balloon overlaps the variable display of the third symbol pd3 in the reach state displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the third symbol pd3 is difficult to visually recognize. In addition, the visual recognition difficulty here means the relative thing that it is difficult to visually recognize compared with the state before that (the same hereafter).

  The display of the area cs for displaying the variation icon, the display of the variation icon c, the display of the area hs for displaying the hold icon in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the display Cd of the character in the second decorative symbol display device 208M. , Character display Lv, gauge display Gm, “heat” character display of wipe display Wd, and first operation means display Od1 in the third decorative symbol display device 208N are all displayed up to FIG. 35 (23). However, in FIG. 35 (24) in which the display of the balloon “development” disappeared, the character design display Cd, the character display Lv, and the gauge display Gm on the second decorative design display device 208M are displayed together with the display of the speech balloon. All disappear, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the display of the area hs for displaying the hold icon is all gone. However, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the display of the region cs for displaying the variation icon and the display of the variation icon c are continuously displayed because they represent the degree of expectation of the symbol variation display currently being performed. ing. In addition, in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the “heat” character display of the wipe display Wd and the first operation means display Od1 are still being displayed, and the third symbol pd3 is also being visibly displayed. The 4 symbol pd4 and the 5th symbol pd5 are also being displayed. If the hold icon is displayed in FIG. 35 (23), the display of the hold icon also disappears. The display of the balloon hiding, the character picture display Cd, the character display Lv, the gauge display Gm, and the display of the holding icon hs may all be erased at the same time, or the timing of disappearance is different. May be. Alternatively, a part of the display (for example, balloon display, character picture display Cd, character display Lv, gauge display Gm) disappears at the same time, and the remaining display (display of the area hs displaying the hold icon, display of the hold icon) ) May disappear at different times.

  In FIG. 35 (25), the display of the region cs for displaying the variation icon and the display of the variation icon c displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L move toward the second decorative symbol display device 208M. In FIG. 35 (26), the animation ends, and the display of the region cs for displaying the variation icon and the display of the variation icon c are displayed by the mini character until then on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. It is displayed at the position where it was done. By doing so, it is possible to perform an effect (here, a super reach effect) with a high degree of expectation of a big hit using the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L widely. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 35 (26), the dark display is displayed except for the display area of the fifth symbol pd5, and the third symbol pd3 and the background display of the castle town are not visible. However, the fifth symbol pd5 is always displayed so that it can be seen that the variable display is being performed. Note that the fifth symbol pd5 may be displayed surrounded by a frame. Further, in the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 35 (26), the wipe display Wd changes from “Heat” to “Swordsman” which represents the name of the super-reaching production (swordsman reach). ing. Therefore, it can be said that the normal notice by the wipe display Wd is ended here. On the other hand, the variation icon c moved to the second decorative symbol display device 208M continues to be displayed in a red display mode which is a display mode of a normal notice (the change notice). In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a reduced display pd3 'of the third symbol pd3 is displayed.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 35 (27), the swordsman reach production of the super reach production is started and the main character is displayed on the full screen, but the fifth design pd5 is visible without being hidden. It is. In FIG. 35 (28), the display is switched to the background display of the wilderness, the main character and the enemy swordsman have started a confrontation, and the scene after slashing from FIG. (29) to FIG. 36 (36) continues to be displayed. . In addition, as shown in FIGS. 35 (30) to (32), the first operation means display Od1 that has been continuously displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N so far is the third decorative symbol display. An animation popping out from the device 208N and moving to the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed. In FIG. 35 (32), the first operation means display Od1 is displayed at the center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Next, in FIG. 35 (33) where the swordsman reach production continues, the first operation means display Od1 changes to the fourth operation means display Od4. That is, the display changes to the fourth operation means display Od4 during the variation display of the third symbol pd3. The fourth operation means display Od4 may be a display obtained by developing the first operation means display Od1, or may be a display switched from the first operation means display Od1. The fourth operation means display Od4 is a display different from the first operation means display Od1. The fourth operation means display Od4 shown in FIG. 35 (33) is a display in which an enlarged display, a change in display mode, and a meter display indicating the remaining period which is the remaining period display are added. That is, a display in which PUSH characters are added to the display imitating the chance button 136 that emits red light is enlarged, and a large meter display Tm ′ is additionally displayed below the display. As described above, the fourth operation means display Od4 changes in size and size as the display mode of the first operation means display Od1 changes, and the display position also changes. The large meter display Tm ′ can also be viewed as a display different from the fourth operation means display Od4. Further, in the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 35 (33), the wipe display Wd is changed from the character “Swordsman” to the character “Press” that is the operation promotion display.

  In FIG. 35 (34), the swordsman reach production continues, the meter of the meter display Tm ′ decreases slightly, the meter further decreases in FIG. 35 (35), and the meter in FIG. Decrease to 1/4 remaining. This meter display Tm ′ hides a chance-up display (character display of “chance”), and the display gradually appears as the meter decreases. Here, “up chance” means that the degree of expectation to be a big hit in the currently displayed symbol variation display is increased.

  FIG. 36 is a diagram showing, in stages, an example in which the operation means display is displayed, continuing from FIG.

  In FIG. 36 (37) following FIG. 35 (36), the chance button 136 which is an operation means corresponding to the fourth operation means display Od4 is operated. When the chance button 136 is operated in a state where the fourth operation means display Od4 is displayed, a normal notice (corresponding to the second notice effect) for notifying a big hit in the current symbol variation display is started. The Further, the fourth operation means display Od4 returns to the first operation means display Od1. In FIG. 36 (38), the crest character 224E ′ that has been in the initial position so far performs a drop operation, and the whole crest character 224E ′ overlaps the first decorative symbol display device 208L from the front side, and further, the first decoration. The effect image Ed1 is displayed large on the symbol display device 208L. The effect image Ed1 is displayed so as to almost hide the scene after the swordsman and the swordsman in the wilderness background image, making it difficult for both the swordsman and the swordsman to see. The tip portion of the effect image Ed1 is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and the effect image Ed1 is displayed across the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to 208N. Has been. In addition, in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the first operation means display Od1 returned from the fourth operation means display Od4 is displayed again, and above that, the wipe display Wd is a character “press”. Changes to “Victory” and the tip of the effect image Ed1 overlaps the wipe display Wd. However, the character “Victory” is visible, and the tip portion of the effect image Ed1 makes the character “Victory” in the wipe display Wd conspicuous. It should be noted that the effect image Ed1 does not overlap with the fifth symbol pd5 that continuously represents the variable display, and the fact that the variable symbol display continues is clearly shown in the fifth symbol pd5 together with the fourth symbol pd4. It is displayed. As described above, in this example, the crest character 224E 'performs the drop operation and the effect image Ed1 is displayed as the effect of the normal notice, and the wipe display Wd is changed to the characters "win". The effect of the normal notice here is an effect with high expectation level of the jackpot, and when the expectation level of the jackpot is low, the family crest member 224E ′ does not fall or the effect image Ed1 is not displayed even if it falls. Or the wipe display Wd changes to “defeat” or changes to a question mark. Further, simultaneously with the fall of the family crest member 224E ′, in the second decorative symbol display device 208M shown in FIG. 36 (38), the reduced display pd3 ′ of the third symbol pd3 is a combination of big hits of decorative symbols (“decoration 7”). -"Decoration 7"-"Decoration 7") starts shaking display (temporary stop).

  In FIG. 36 (39), the crest character 224E 'that has been in the fall position has risen to the initial position, but the effect image Ed1 is still displayed across the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to 208N.

  In FIG. 36 (40), the effect image Ed1 disappears, and the result of the swordsman reach effect which is the super reach effect is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Here, the scene where the protagonist wins is displayed. Therefore, the super reach production is the production from FIG. 35 (26) to FIG. 36 (40). Note that the scene where the main character, Tono-sama, shown in FIG. 36 (40) wins, is viewed as a part of the normal notice started by operating the chance button 136 in the state where the fourth operation means display Od4 is displayed. You can also.

  In FIG. 36 (41), the reduced display pd3 ′ of the third symbol pd3 displayed on the second ornamental symbol display device 208M returns to the first ornamental symbol display device 208L, and is displayed on the first ornamental symbol display device 208L. “Decoration 7” is displayed in any of the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Here, any “decoration 7” is displayed in a shaking manner (temporarily stopped), but the 5th symbol pd5 continues to be displayed in a variable manner, and the 4th symbol pd4 remains in a display mode indicating that the variable display is being displayed. . Further, the normal notice display (character display of “win”) in the wipe display Wd is continued.

  In FIG. 36 (42), the third symbol pd3 is stopped and displayed (mainly stopped) with a combination of decorative symbols (“decoration 7”-“decoration 7”-“decoration 7”), and the fifth symbol pd5 is also displayed. The combination of the big symbols of the decorative symbols is stopped (mainly stopped), and the fourth symbol pd4 is switched to the display mode indicating that the stop symbol is being displayed, and the fixed display of the first symbol (special symbol) not shown is started. During this fixed display period (during the actual stop of the third symbol pd3), the first operation means display Od1 and the normal notice display (“win” character display) on the wipe display Wd are continuously displayed. Yes.

  Here, another possible example will be described in detail. First, in FIG. 34 (13) to FIG. 35 (32) after returning to the first operation means display Od1, even if the chance button 136 which is the operation means corresponding to the first operation means display Od1 is operated, No change occurs as in the state of FIG. That is, the display mode of the first operation means display Od1 does not change, the first operation means display Od1 is displayed as it is, and an effect in response to the operation of the chance button 136 (for example, a notice effect) is started. Not.

  On the other hand, when the first operation means display Od1 is changed to the fourth operation means display Od4, as described above, the operation of the chance button 136 is accepted and the normal notice is started. Here, including the display of the fourth operation means display Od4, the series of effects of FIGS. It can be said that this is equivalent to the so-called production (the so-called final judge production). The fact that the normal notice may be executed after the fourth operation means display Od4 is displayed means that the fourth operation means display Od4 itself corresponds to the display of the normal notice (second notice effect). I can say that.

  Further, in this example, the first operation means display Od1 is changed and the fourth operation means display Od4 is displayed. However, the fourth operation means display Od1 is not displayed. The display Od4 may start to be displayed alone, or even if the first operation means display Od1 is displayed, the first operation means display Od1 does not change, but the fourth operation means display Od4 alone. It may begin to be displayed. However, when the first operation means display Od1 is changed and the fourth operation means display Od4 is displayed, the big hit expectation is higher than when the fourth operation means display Od4 starts to be displayed alone. .

  Further, when the chance button 136 is operated, the fourth operation means display Od4 returns to the first operation means display Od1 in FIG. 36 (38), but the fourth operation means display Od4 disappears, Nothing is displayed on the operation means display once, and the redisplay of the first operation means display Od1 may be started after the jackpot game ends or when the next variable display of the third symbol pd3 is disclosed. . Alternatively, the first operation means display Od1 may not be displayed even when the big hit game ends, or the first operation means display Od1 is not displayed even if the next variable display of the third symbol pd3 is disclosed. You may make it not display.

  Further, even if the chance button 136 is not operated before the meter displayed on the meter display Tm ′ shown in FIG. 35 (33) becomes 0, the meter displayed on the meter display Tm ′ After reaching 0, the normal notice effect of FIGS. 36 (38) to (40) may be executed.

  In the example described with reference to FIG. 34, when the chance button 136 is operated while the second operation means display Od2 is displayed, the pre-reading notice is started, but the chance button 136 is operated. The normal notice for the symbol variation display performed at the time may be started instead of the prefetch notice.

  FIG. 37 is a diagram showing step by step an example in which the first operation means display Od1 changes to the second operation means display Od2 in a pachinko machine having a game board having a configuration different from the configuration of the game board shown in FIG. It is.

  The description here will focus on differences from the examples shown in FIGS. 34 to 36, and the description of the same points as in the examples shown in FIGS. 34 to 36 may be omitted.

  In the example shown in FIG. 37, instead of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N that are arranged on the left and right of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the lower side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The fourth decorative symbol display device 208O is disposed in the screen. The fourth decorative symbol display device 208O is also movable means, like the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and the size of the display screen is smaller than that of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In the fourth decorative symbol display device 208O shown in FIG. 37 (a), the upper portion overlaps the central portion of the effect display area 208d in the first decorative symbol display device 208L from the front side (player side), and this position is the initial position. Correspondingly, the fourth decorative symbol display device 208O is a display device capable of moving up and down. In the example shown in FIG. 37, the background image of the fourth decorative symbol display device 208O is also the streets of the castle town, and four areas hs for displaying the hold icon are displayed. In FIG. 37 (a), all the areas hs are displayed. The hold icons h1 to h4 in the white display mode, which is the default display mode, are displayed.

  A region cs for displaying a variation icon is prepared at the left end of the effect display region 208d in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and this region cs is the same low stage as the region hs for displaying the hold icon. In FIG. 37 (a), the change icon c of the white display mode which is the default display mode is displayed in the area cs, and the variable display is performed in each of the third symbol pd3 and the fifth symbol pd5. . Further, in this example, the fourth symbol pd4 is displayed on the upper left of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and in FIG. 37A, the fourth symbol pd4 is a display mode indicating that the variable display is being performed.

  Furthermore, a first operation means display Od1 is displayed at the right end of the effect display area 208d in the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

  In FIG. 37 (b), a display Cd1 of the hero's character picture appears on the variation icon c. In FIG. It is displayed in an upright position on the area cs displaying the icon. Then, an animation is displayed in which the character of the protagonist carries the variation icon c (FIG. 37 (d)) and throws away the variation icon c carried (FIG. 37 (e)). That is, the animation here is a moving animation of the fluctuation icon c. The thrown variation icon c crosses the third symbol pd3 during variation display (FIG. 37 (f)) and hits the first operation means display Od1 (FIG. 37 (g)). Then, as shown in FIG. 37 (h), the effect image Ed2 appears so as to hide a part of the change icon c and the first operation means display Od1, and in FIG. 37 (i), the change icon c disappears. A change occurs in the first operation means display Od1, and in FIG. 37 (j), the effect image Ed2 disappears and the second operation means display Od2 is displayed at the position where the first operation means display Od1 was displayed. ing. The second operation means display Od2 here is a display mode in which PUSH characters are added to the display imitating the chance button 136 that emits blue light. The actual chance button 136 itself also changes from the white light emission state to the blue light emission state. As the light emission mode of the chance button 136 itself or the display mode of the second operation means display Od2, the red mode and the blue mode have a higher expectation level for the big hit than the white mode. As shown in FIGS. 34 (1) to (2), the first operation means display Od1 is changed to the second operation means display Od2. In the case where the one operation means display Od1 is changed to the second operation means display Od2, the expectation degree of the big hit becomes higher. The character of Tono-sama after throwing away the variation icon c continues the same pose until FIG. 37 (j). In FIG. 37 (k), the character is displayed in an upright position on the region cs displaying the variation icon. Yes.

  In FIG. 37 (k), a balloon display of “chance is” is added to the character pattern display Cd1. This balloon display of “chance is” can be said to be a kind of operation promotion display or a kind of pre-reading notice. Also in this example, it can be said that the second operation means display Od2 itself corresponds to the display of the pre-reading notice (third notice effect).

  In FIG. 37 (l), the chance button 136, which is an operation means corresponding to the second operation means display Od2, is operated. When the chance button 136 is operated in a state where the second operation means display Od2 is displayed, the display mode of the second operation means display Od2 also changes in this example, as shown in FIG. The display returns to the first operation means display Od1. In addition, a pre-reading notice (corresponding to the first notice effect) is started. In FIG. 37 (m), a change animation is started in which the display mode of the hold icon displayed on the fourth decorative symbol display device 208O changes to the display mode of the prefetch notice, and a part or all of the second hold icon h2 is displayed. The effect image Ed3 appears so as to be hidden, and in the subsequent FIG. 37 (n), the second hold icon h2 that has been changed to the display pattern of the fan pattern is displayed in front of the effect image Ed3. In FIG. 37 (o), the effect image Ed3 disappears, and the second hold icon h2 of the display pattern of the fan pattern, which is the display mode of the prefetch notice, is displayed. The second hold icon h2 of the display form of this prefetch notice is displayed. Will continue to be displayed until the second hold is consumed.

  Other possible examples will be described in detail. First, in this example, the chance button 136 is operated quickly after the second operation means display Od2 is displayed. However, even if the operation timing is delayed, if the operation timing is within the effective period, FIG. m) to the effect of the pre-reading notice shown in FIG. In addition, the chance button 136 is displayed until the variation display of the third symbol pd3, which is being executed when the display of the second operation means display Od2, is started, and the next variation display of the third symbol pd3 is started. If not operated, the second operation means display Od2 is continuously displayed. That is, when the display of the second operation means display Od2 is started, the variation display of the third symbol pd3, which is being executed when the display is started, is continued and the second operation means display Od2 is continuously displayed during the stop display. Even if the next variation display of the three symbols pd3 is started, the second operation means display Od2 is continuously displayed, and the second manipulation means display Od2 is displayed across the variation variation of the continuous third symbol pd3. The Further, the second operation means display Od2 may continue to be displayed until the symbol variation display corresponding to the second hold icon h2 shown in FIG. 37 is completed at the longest unless the chance button 136 is operated.

  The display imitating the chance button 136 that emits blue light may correspond to an example of a third operation means display. The third operation means display here is an operation means display in a mode different from the first operation means display Od1, and the third operation means display is in a state where the third operation means display is displayed. This means an operation means display in which the display mode does not change even when the operation means corresponding to the display (here, the chance button 136) is operated. When the operation means corresponding to the third operation means display is operated in a state where the third operation means display is displayed, the notice effect may be started or may not be started. . Hereinafter, the display imitating the chance button 136 that emits blue light will be referred to as blue third operation means display, and the description will be continued. For example, until the meter display Tm shown in FIG. 34 (10) is added to the blue third operation means display, or until the PUSH character is added, the operation of the chance button 136 is disabled and the meter display is made. If the chance button 136 is operated after Tm is added or after the PUSH character is added, the pre-reading notice effect shown in FIGS. 37 (m) to (o) may be executed. May be. In other words, there may be a case where the period for disabling the operation of the chance button 136 is switched to the period for enabling it. In this case, when the meter display Tm is added to the blue third operation means display or the chance button 136 is operated after the PUSH character is added, the first display as shown in FIG. When the meter display Tm is added to the blue third operation means display or the PUSH character is added to the third operation means display Od1, the third operation means display is changed to the second operation means display Od1. It can be said that it has changed to means display. Moreover, there may be a case where the blue third operation means display changes to the first operation means display Od1, and in this case, the operation of the chance button 136 is always invalidated. If the pre-reading notice is not started even if the player operates the chance button 136 while the blue third operation means display is displayed, the player can determine when the operation of the chance button 136 is effectively switched, Or it waits, expecting switching effectively, whether it returns to 1st operation means display Od1 without switching. The degree of expectation that is effectively switched may be expressed by the light emission mode of the chance button 136 itself or the display mode of the third operation means display. For example, the expectation may be higher in the blue mode than in the red mode, and in the 7-color change mode (rainbow mode) than in the blue mode. When the operation of the chance button 136 is switched effectively, the prefetching notice is executed, and the expectation of the big hit becomes higher than the case where the operation returns to the first operation means display Od1 without switching. Further, during the period in which the operation of the chance button 136 is invalid, the display mode of the third operation means display may be changed to increase the level of expectation for effective switching, or to decrease it.

  In this example, the remaining period display of the chance button 136 is not displayed. However, even if the chance button 136 is not operated within the operation effective period of the chance button 136, it is assumed that the operation has been performed. After the validity period has elapsed, the pre-reading notice effects shown in FIGS. 37 (m) to (o) may be executed.

  Furthermore, in FIG. 37 (j), the display changes to the second operation means display Od2, but may change to the fourth operation means display Od4. In this case, the chance button 136 is disabled until the symbol variation display corresponding to the second hold icon h2 to be notified starts, and the symbol variation display corresponding to the second hold icon h2 is started. If there is an operation of the button 136, the normal notice may be started.

  FIG. 38 is a diagram showing stepwise modifications of the example shown in FIG.

  The description here will focus on differences from the example shown in FIG. 37, and the same points as in the example shown in FIG.

  Also in the example shown in FIG. 38, the fourth decorative symbol display device 208O is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In the fourth decorative symbol display device 208O shown in FIG. 38 (a), four hold icons h1 to h4 are displayed, and each of the hold icons h1 to h4 has a white display mode which is a default display mode. is there. Also, a white display mode variation icon c, which is the default display mode, is displayed at the left end of the effect display area 208d in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. The first operation means display Od1 is displayed.

  In FIG. 38 (b), the display Cd1 of the character of the hero's character appears on the first operation means display Od1, and in FIG. 38 (c), the character's character displays the first operation means display. It descends behind Od1 and is displayed in an upright position. Then, an animation is displayed in which the character of the main character takes on the first operation means display Od1 (FIG. 38 (d)) and throws off the carried first operation means display Od1 (FIG. 38 (e)). That is, the animation here is a moving animation of the first operation means display Od. The first operation means display Od1 that has been thrown off passes in front of the third symbol pd3 during the variable display, and in FIG. 38 (f), the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the fourth decorative symbol display device 208O. Just displayed on the border. That is, the upper half of the first operating means display Od1 is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the lower half of the first operating means display Od1 is displayed on the fourth decorative symbol display device 208O. The first operation means display Od1 falls into the fourth decorative symbol display device 208O as it is (see the arrow extending downward from the first operation means display Od1 shown in FIG. 38 (f)), FIG. In g), four icons are displayed on the hold icons h1 to h4 displayed side by side. Next, as shown in FIG. 38 (h), the first operation means display Od1 changes to the second operation means display Od2 at that location. In other words, the display changes to a display mode in which PUSH characters are added to the display imitating the chance button 136 that emits blue light. Further, the actual chance button 136 itself also changes to a blue light emitting state.

  In FIG. 38 (i), the character display Cd1 is displayed at the position where the first operation means display Od1 was displayed, and the character display Cd1 indicates that “push the button”. A balloon display is added. The display of the balloon “Don't press a button” can be said to be a kind of operation promotion display or a kind of pre-reading notice. Also in this example, it can be said that the second operation means display Od2 itself corresponds to the display of the pre-reading notice (third notice effect).

  The subsequent steps are the same as those in FIG.

  In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 38, the arrival point of the first operation means display Od1 thrown away was in the fourth decorative symbol display device 208O, but may be in the first decorative symbol display device 208L. . In the example shown in FIG. 38, the operation means display is moved (thrown away) while the operation of the chance button 136 is invalid, but the operation means display is displayed while the operation of the chance button 136 is valid. You may move. That is, the display itself may be moved after changing to the second operation means display Od2 which is also a pre-reading notice display (third notice effect). However, even if the chance button 136 is operated during the movement, the prefetch notice is not started. In addition, as for other possible examples, various examples described as other examples considered in FIG. 37 are applicable.

  FIG. 39 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner an example in which the first operation means display Od1 changes to the third operation means display Od3 and the third operation means display Od3 changes to the second operation means display Od2. is there.

  The example in FIG. 39 and subsequent figures is an example in the pachinko machine 100 having the game board 200 shown in FIG. 3, and in the explanation after FIG. 39, points different from the examples shown in FIG. 34 to FIG. Description of the same points as in the examples shown in FIGS. 34 to 36 may be omitted.

  The state of FIG. 39A is the same as the state of FIG. 34A, and the variable display is performed in each of the third symbol pd3 and the fifth symbol pd5. Further, the fourth symbol pd4 displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M is a display mode representing that the variable display is being performed. Further, a first operation means display Od1 is displayed below the wipe display Wd displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

  In FIG. 39 (b), the first operation means display Od1 changes to the third operation means display Od3. The third operation means display Od3 may be a display obtained by developing the first operation means display Od1, or may be a display switched from the first operation means display Od1. The third operation means display Od3 is a display different from the first operation means display Od1. The third operation means display Od3 shown in FIG. 39 (b) is a display mode in which PUSH characters are added to a display imitating a state in which the chance button 136 emitting white light vibrates. In addition to changing to a display of a different color, the display may change to a display having a different operation mode such as vibration. Note that the actual chance button 136 itself vibrates while emitting white light. Furthermore, the characters “Preparing” are displayed on the wipe display Wd where “castle town” as the name of the background stage has been displayed. The character under preparation here is a character indicating that it is a period of waiting until the operation of the chance button 136 becomes effective. That is, it becomes a character indicating that the operation of the chance button 136 is invalid (hereinafter the same). Therefore, even if the chance button 136 is operated while the third operation means display Od3 is displayed, no change occurs. That is, the display mode of the third operation means display Od3 does not change, the third operation means display Od3 is displayed as it is, and an effect (for example, a notice effect, etc.) in response to the operation of the chance button 136 is started. Not. When the characters “in preparation” are displayed, the third operation means display Od3 is displayed (hereinafter the same). By displaying the characters “in preparation” on the wipe display Wd, it may be possible to focus attention on the change in the third operation means display Od3 and future development.

  In FIG. 39 (c), the third symbol pd3 is swayed (temporarily stopped) with the combination of the decorative symbols lost ("decoration 7"-"decoration 7"-"decoration 1"). ), The third symbol pd3 is stopped and displayed with the combination of the decorative symbols lost (main stop), and this main stop continues until FIG. In FIG. 39 (g), the variable display of the third symbol pd3 is started. The third operation means display Od3 is displayed continuously from FIG. 39 (b), is displayed during the stop display of the third symbol pd3, and is displayed across the continuous variation display of the third symbol pd3. Yes.

  In FIG. 39 (h), the shift movement of the hold icon is started, and in FIG. 39 (i), the shift movement is completed. As a result, the first hold icon h1 is a hold icon with a red display mode, which is a display mode of the pre-reading notice. The third operation means display Od3 continues to be displayed from the start to the completion of the shift of the hold icon. Note that the characters “Preparing” are continuously displayed on the wipe display Wd from FIG. 39 (b) to FIG. 39 (i).

  In FIG. 39 (j), the variation display of the third symbol pd3 continues. Here, the third operation means display Od3 changes to the second operation means display Od2. The second operation means display Od2 shown in FIG. 39 (j) is a combination of the display in which PUSH characters are added to the display imitating the chance button 136 that emits red light and the meter display Tm. Further, in the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 39 (j), the wipe display Wd is changed from the character “Preparing” to the character “Press” that is the operation promotion display.

  Also in FIG. 39 (k), the variation display of the third symbol pd3 continues, the meter of the meter display Tm slightly decreases, and in FIG. 39 (l), the operation means corresponds to the second operation means display Od2. The chance button 136 is operated. When the chance button 136 is operated while the second operation means display Od2 is displayed, the display mode of the second operation means display Od2 changes. In this example, the first operation means display Od1 is changed as shown in FIG. Further, when the chance button 136 is operated in a state where the second operation means display Od2 is displayed, as shown in FIG. 39 (m), a change in which the display mode of the hold icon changes to the display mode of the pre-reading notice. The animation is started and the effect image Ed4 appears so as to hide the entire first hold icon h1 that has been displayed in red until now. In FIG. 39 (n), the effect image Ed4 disappears and the first hold icon h1 is changed to a holding icon in a seven-color change mode (rainbow mode). In the display mode of the hold icon, the expectation degree of jackpot is higher in the rainbow mode than in the red display mode. Therefore, by operating the chance button 136 in a state where the second operation means display Od2 is displayed, the prefetching notice that has been performed so far is changed to a prefetching notice that has a high expectation of the big hit.

  In the example of FIG. 39 described above, since the third operation means display Od3 is changed to the second operation means display Od2, and the chance button 136 is operated, the pre-reading notice is started. The means display Od2 itself is also a pre-read notice display (third notice effect), and the pre-read notice may be executed after the third operation means display Od3 is displayed. It can be said that the means display Od3 itself corresponds to the display of the pre-reading notice (third notice effect).

  Even if the chance button 136 is not operated before the meter displayed on the meter display Tm shown in FIG. 39J becomes 0, the meter displayed on the meter display Tm is set to 0. After that, the pre-reading notice effect shown in FIGS. 39 (m) to (n) may be executed.

  FIG. 40 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner an example in which there are periods during which two types of operation means display are simultaneously displayed.

  The first operation means display Od1 shown in FIG. 40B is changed to the second operation means display Od2 in FIG. 40C, and a sound effect is output from the speaker 120. In FIG. 40 (d), the reach effect of “decoration 4” is started in the third symbol pd3 that is being displayed in a variable manner. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 40 (e), the third symbol pd3 is displayed. The reach character image is displayed so as to hide. However, the fourth symbol pd4 and the fifth symbol pd5 are not hidden, and it is well understood that the variable display is still continued.

  Next, in FIG. 40 (f), the button effect is started, and a display in which PUSH characters are added to the display imitating the chance button 136 that emits red light is displayed in the center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Below that, a meter display Tm ′ representing the remaining period, which is a remaining period display, is also displayed. These displays are part of the button effect display, and correspond to the fourth operation means display Od4. On the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second operation means display Od2 displayed from FIG. 40 (c) is continuously displayed. At the timing of FIG. 40 (f), the fourth operation means is displayed. The display Od4 and the second operation means display Od2 are displayed at the same time. Note that “displayed simultaneously” does not need to be simultaneous until the display start time, in other words, means that they are displayed overlapping in time (in parallel in time) (in the following, The same).

  Also in FIG. 40G, the fourth operation means display Od4 and the second operation means display Od2 are displayed at the same time. In FIG. 40 (g), as in FIG. 35 (35), the meter display Tm ′ is reduced to some extent, but in FIG. 40 (g), unlike FIG. I can't see it.

  In FIG. 40 (h), the chance button 136 is operated. The chance button 136 is an operation unit corresponding to both the second operation unit display Od2 and the fourth operation unit display Od4. Here, the fourth operation unit display Od4 has priority, and FIG. As shown in (i), the fourth operation means display Od4 disappears, a decorative symbol “continue” that is a pseudo-continuous symbol appears in the middle symbol display area 208b, and the third symbol pd3 is the first time in the pseudo-continuous effect. Is temporarily stopped. The pseudo-continuous effect is a notice effect (ordinary notice effect) for the currently displayed symbol variation display and corresponds to a second notice effect. On the other hand, there is no change in the second operation means display Od2, and it continues to be displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

  The chance button 136 is operated again almost immediately after the operation of the chance button 136 at the timing of FIG. 40 (h) (FIG. 40 (j)). As shown in FIG. 40 (k), the operation of the chance button 136 here is changed from the second operation means display Od2 to the first operation means display Od1, as in FIG. 34 (13). In the wipe display Wd displayed on the one operation means display Od1, the word “heat” is displayed as a pre-reading notice display (first notice effect), and further, in the third decorative symbol display device 208N. An effect image Ed is added to the wipe display Wd. In addition, in the 3rd design pd3 shown in FIG.40 (k), the 1st temporary stop in the pseudo-continuous production is continued.

  In FIG. 40 (l), re-variation of the third symbol pd3 in the pseudo-continuous effect has started, and in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the effect image Ed disappears but the pre-reading notice display on the wipe display Wd. (Character display of “heat”) continues.

  In the example described above, the normal notice effect has priority over the normal notice effect and the prefetch notice effect. The normal notice is associated with the fourth operation means display Od4 on which the meter display Tm ′ indicating the remaining period of the operation effective period is displayed, and the operation effective period is the period of the currently displayed symbol variation display. Limited to within. On the other hand, the pre-reading notice is associated with the second operation means display Od2 that can be displayed across the continuous variation display of the third symbol pd3, and there is a time margin. Therefore, the normal notice associated with the fourth operation means display Od4 is preferentially started. As shown in this example, by providing a start order (priority order) of the notice effects, a plurality of notice effects are not performed at a time, and it is possible to clearly inform the player what happened. There are advantages.

  When the chance button 136 is operated at the timing of FIG. 40D, the pre-reading notice effect as shown in FIG. 40K is immediately started, and the second operation means display Od2 is set to the first operation means display Od2. Changes to the operation means display Od1. Therefore, in this case, in FIG. 40F, the fourth operation means display Od4 and the first operation means display Od1 are displayed simultaneously. In the example shown in FIG. 40, the second operation means display Od2 is changed to the second operation means display Od2 in FIG. 40C, but the third operation means display Od3 shown in FIG. The timing may change from the third operation means display Od3 to the second operation means display Od2 at the timing (g) or the timing (i) in FIG. In this case, in FIG. 40F, the fourth operation means display Od4 and the third operation means display Od3 are displayed simultaneously.

  Further, even if the chance button 136 is not operated before the meter displayed on the meter display Tm ′ shown in FIG. 40F becomes 0, the meter displayed on the meter display Tm is 0. After that, the pseudo-continuous effect may be started. Further, the remaining operation period display is not displayed in the second operation means display Od2 displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N, but the chance button 136 is not operated within the operation effective period of the chance button 136. Even in this case, it may be assumed that the operation has been performed, and the pre-reading notice effect of FIG. 40 (k) may be executed after the operation effective period has elapsed.

  Even if the operation of the chance button 136 in FIG. 40 (h) is not a single operation such as a single press or a short press, but a so-called long press operation, a normal notice effect by a pseudo-continuous effect is provided. However, the operation of the chance button 136 is temporarily stopped and the operation is performed again, whereby the pre-reading notice effect by the character display of “heat” and the effect image Ed in the wipe display Wd is started.

  Furthermore, for one operation of the chance button 136, there is only one effect of the normal notice effect by the pseudo-continuous effect and the character display of “heat” in the wipe display Wd and the pre-read notice effect by the effect image Ed. Instead of being started, both effects may be started or may be started without fail.

  FIG. 41 is a modification of the example shown in FIG. 39, and is a diagram showing step by step an example in which there is a period in which displays simulating the operating means are displayed simultaneously.

  As in the example shown in FIG. 39, the first operation means display Od1 shown in FIG. 41A changes to the third operation means display Od3 in FIG. In the wipe display Wd, the characters “Preparing” are displayed.

  In FIG. 41 (i), the third operation means display Od3 is also displayed. At the timing of the next figure (j), there is a single ball winning at the first special figure starting port 230. In FIG. Two hold icons that were only displayed are now displayed. In FIG. 41 (k), the second hold icon h2 is increasing. The second hold icon h2 is a so-called button hold icon in which a mini-item MI in which PUSH characters are added to a display imitating the chance button 136 that emits red light is added to the hold icon hd in the white display mode. is there. The button hold icon here refers to a hold icon whose display mode changes when the corresponding operation unit is operated, and does not necessarily have to be a display imitating the operation unit, and may be only an operation promotion display mode. Further, only the remaining period display mode or a combination of these modes may be used. Corresponding operating means may be displayed as a picture on the icon, and here is a chance button 136. The button hold icon h2 shown in FIG. 41 (k) is different from the first operation means display Od1, the second operation means display Od2, the third operation means display Od3, and the fourth operation means display Od4. That is, although the display is different from the operation means display, the mini item MI is a reduced display of the operation means display (here, the second operation means display Od2 displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N). ing. That is, the display mode of the second hold icon (button hold icon) h2 shown in FIG. 41 (k) is a display mode in which the second operation means display Od2 is reduced. Note that the size of the mini item MI may change according to the degree of expectation of the jackpot, or depending on the size of the displayed operation means display, the display mode of the button hold icon may be the operation means display (for example, A display mode in which the second operation means display Od2) is enlarged may be used. Further, the button hold icon is displayed only during the operation valid period of the chance button 136. That is, while the button hold icon is displayed, the operation of the chance button 136 is treated as valid. However, when the button hold icon is displayed at the same time as the operation means display, even if the chance button 136 is operated, an effect relating to the operation means display is performed first, and when the chance button 136 is operated again, the button There may be an effect related to the hold icon. Also in the following examples, the description here can be applied to the button hold icon, and the description here can also be applied to the button change icon. In addition, as a display mode that changes, a display mode of a pre-reading notice that varies depending on the level of expectation of jackpot, and a display mode that has a low level of expectation of jackpot includes a default display mode. The display mode of a symbol is also included. The button hold icon itself can be regarded as a pre-read notice display. The button hold icon is a display different from the operation means display. In the third decorative symbol display device 208N of FIG. 41 (k), the third operation means display Od3 is displayed, and the chance button 136 emitting white light in the third operation means display Od3 vibrates. A display imitating a state of being present and a display imitating a chance button 136 that emits red light in the second hold icon h2 (button hold icon) are simultaneously displayed. Note that a mode in which the hold icon in the white display mode is omitted and only the mini item MI is set as the hold icon may be used. Alternatively, the second hold icon h2 is only a hold icon in a white display mode, and can be seen as a mode in which the mini item MI is added to the second hold icon h2, but in any case, it emits white light The display imitating the state that the chance button 136 is vibrating and the display imitating the chance button 136 emitting red light are displayed at the same time.

  In FIG. 41 (l), the third operation means display Od3 is changed to the second operation means display Od2 as in FIG. 39 (j). The second operation means display Od2 shown in FIG. 40 (j) is also a display in which the display in which the PUSH character is added to the display imitating the chance button 136 that emits red light and the meter display Tm are combined. In addition, the wipe display Wd also changes from “preparing” to “pressing” as an operation promotion display. In FIGS. 41L to 41N, two displays simulating the chance button 136 that emits red light are displayed at the same time. Here, the hold of the symbol variation display that is the target of the pre-reading notice of the second operation means display Od2 is the hold indicated by the first hold icon h1.

  In FIG. 41 (o), the chance button 136 is operated in a state where two displays simulating the chance button 136 that emits red light are displayed at the same time. The chance button 136 is an operation means corresponding to both the second operation means display Od2 and the second hold icon h2 which is a button hold icon, and here, pre-reading notice for both is started. That is, as shown in FIG. 41 (p), the effect image Ed4 appears so as to hide all of the second hold icon h2 that is the button hold icon, and the pattern that is the target of the pre-reading notice on the second operation means display Od2. The effect image Ed5 also appears so as to hide the entire first hold icon h1 representing the hold of the variable display. In FIG. 41 (q), the effect images Ed4 and Ed5 disappear, and the first hold icon h1 is 7 It changes to the hold icon of the color change mode (rainbow mode). In addition, the second hold icon h2 is changed from a button hold icon to a hold icon in a display mode representing the face of the character of Tonosama. Therefore, the mini item MI in which the characters PUSH are added to the display imitating the chance button 136 that emits red light disappears. On the other hand, at the stage of FIG. 41 (p), the second operation means display Od2 has changed to the first operation means display Od1. In the display mode of the hold icon, the expectation degree of jackpot is higher in the display mode representing the face of the Tono-sama character than in the rainbow mode.

  In the example shown in FIG. 41, the operation effective period of the chance button 136 related to the button hold icon and the operation effective period of the chance button 136 related to the second operation means display Od2 overlap (FIG. 41 (l) to FIG. 41 (n) In this overlapping period, it is possible to see the change of the hold icon at a time by one operation of the chance button 136, which may surprise the player. In this example, two notice effects are performed simultaneously, but three or more notice effects may be performed simultaneously. For example, when a plurality of button hold icons appear due to winning of a plurality of balls, or when a plurality of second operation means display Od2 is displayed (for example, one changes from the first operation means display Od1 and another For example, there may be a case where the third operation means display Od3 changes. The greater the number of announcements performed at the same time, the higher the degree of expectation of the big hit. If the pre-announcement effect to be performed at the same time is an effect of the pre-reading notice, the target of the pre-reading notice may be different or the same. Alternatively, the fourth operation means display Od4 is also displayed at the same time. Unlike the example shown in FIG. 40, the normal notice may be performed simultaneously with the prefetch notice. Further, a plurality of fourth operation means displays Od4 may be displayed, and a plurality of normal notices may be simultaneously performed by a single operation. In this case, the greater the number of normal announcements being made at the same time, the higher the probability of a big hit in the currently displayed symbol variation display.

  In this example, the appearance timing of the button hold icon is FIG. 41 (k) and is earlier than the change timing to the second operation means display Od2. Accordingly, when the chance button 136 is operated at the timing of FIG. 41 (k) before the change from the third operation means display Od3 to the second operation means display Od2, the button that is the second hold icon h2 is first displayed. If only the hold icon changes, and then the chance button 136 is operated again after the second operation means display Od2 is displayed, only the first hold icon h1 is changed this time. In contrast to this example, the change timing to the second operation means display Od2 may be earlier than the appearance timing of the button hold icon. In this case, when the chance button 136 is operated at the timing when the second operation means display Od2 is displayed, only the first hold icon h1 changes first, and then the chance that the button hold icon appears and then the chance. If the button 136 is operated again, only the button hold icon changes this time. Therefore, the player can choose whether to change two hold icons at a time or one at a time waiting for the appearance of the button hold icon, and to entertain the player There is.

  Even when the second operation means display Od2 and the button hold icon are displayed at the same time, only the button hold icon that is the second hold icon h2 is changed by the first operation of the chance button 136, Only the first hold icon h1 may change in the second operation, or conversely, only the first hold icon h1 changes in the first operation, and the second hold icon h2 in the second operation. Only certain button hold icons may change.

  Further, in this example, the hold of the symbol variation display that is the target of the pre-reading notice of the second operation means display Od2 is the hold indicated by the first hold icon h1, but is indicated by the second hold icon h2. It may be put on hold. In this case, it overlaps with the pre-reading notice by the button hold icon. However, when the chance button 136 is operated once, the second hold icon h2 is hidden by the effect image and then changed to a rainbow-type hold icon. When the chance button 136 is operated once more, the second hold icon h2 is hidden by the effect image again, and then changed to a hold icon having a display mode representing the face of the Tono-sama character. It may be a change. The twice operation here may be a continuous hitting operation in addition to the normal operation being performed twice at intervals, or may be limited to an operation in which the normal operation is performed twice at intervals, or limited to a continuous hitting operation. May be. Alternatively, the above two-stage change may be performed by operating the chance button 136 once. The single operation here may be a normal operation, may be a long press operation, may be limited to a normal operation, or may be limited to a long press operation.

  Further, even when the chance button 136 is not operated before the meter displayed on the meter display Tm shown in FIG. 41 (l) becomes 0, the meter displayed on the meter display Tm is set to 0 because it is operated. After that, the pre-reading notice effects of FIGS. 41 (p) to (q) may be executed.

  FIG. 42 is a diagram showing step by step an example in which operation means display is displayed on each of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

  The example shown in FIG. 42 is a modification of the example shown in FIG. 39, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M shown in FIG. 42A displays the character of Tono-sama displayed in FIG. The mini character composed of the combination of the pattern display Cd, the character display Lv, and the gauge display Gm is not displayed, and the first operation means display Od1 is displayed instead. Further, the first operation means display Od1 is also displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG.

  In FIG. 42B, the first operation means display Od1 displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N is changed to the third operation means display Od3, and the wipe display on the third operation means display Od3 is displayed. In Wd, a character “in preparation” is displayed. On the other hand, on the second decorative symbol display device 208M shown in FIG. 42B, the first operation means display Od1 is displayed, and the first operation means display Od1 and the third operation means display Od3 are displayed simultaneously. Will be. Both the first operation means display Od1 and the third operation means display Od3 continue to be displayed until the next variation display of the third symbol pd3, and are displayed across the continuous variation display of the third symbol pd3.

  In FIG. 42 (i), the first operation means display Od1 displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M is changed to the second operation means display Od2. On the other hand, on the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 42 (i), the third operation means display Od3 is still displayed, and the second operation means display Od2 and the third operation means display Od3 are simultaneously displayed. It will be displayed.

  In FIG. 42 (j), the third operation means display Od3 displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N is changed to the second operation means display Od2, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M also includes the third operation means display Od3. The second operation means display Od2 is also displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208N. Note that the second operation means display Od2 displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M is only a display in which PUSH characters are added to the display imitating the chance button 136 that emits red light. The second operation means display Od2 displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N is a display in which a meter display Tm is added to the same display as the display on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. The embodiment is different. However, the display mode may be the same.

  In FIG. 42 (k), the chance button 136 is operated. The chance button 136 is an operation means corresponding to any second operation means display Od2, and in FIG. 42 (l), the second operation means display Od2 displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M is The display mode is changed so that the fan pattern Fd overlaps the display imitating the chance button 136 that emits white light. The fan picture Fd is a display of a pre-reading notice, and is a picture with a high expectation degree of jackpot. Here, since only one hold remains, it can be seen that the target of the pre-reading notice is the symbol change display of the first hold. However, when two or more holds are left, the pre-read by the fan design Fd is performed. In the notice, the symbol change display subject to notice is unknown. In addition, instead of the pre-reading notice by the fan picture Fd, a normal notice by the fan picture Fd may be used. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 42 (l), the second operation means display Od2 displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N is changed to the first operation means display Od1, and all the first hold icons h1 are displayed. An effect image Ed4 appears to hide. The appearance timing of the fan picture Fd on the second decorative symbol display device 208M after operating the chance button 136 may coincide with the appearance timing of the effect image Ed4 on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. It may be shifted. For example, in this example, both are pre-reading notices and the notice target is also common, so the appearance timing is the same, and when the pre-reading notice object is different, the one with the higher expectation of jackpot appears first. Or it may appear later. In addition, when one is a pre-reading notice and the other is a normal notice, the normal notice may appear first in the same way as in the example shown in FIG. May appear. Furthermore, the priority order may be determined by a decorative symbol display device on which an operation means display is displayed. For example, the operation means display displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M may be started prior to the operation means display displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Or vice versa.

  In FIG. 42 (m), the fan design Fd that appears on the second decorative design display device 208M rises (see the upward arrow shown in FIG. 42 (m)), and the first operation means display Od1 is visible. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the effect image Ed4 disappears, and the first hold icon h1 is changed to a display mode representing the face of the Tono-sama character.

  In FIG. 42 (n), the effect image Ed is applied to the fan picture Fd on the first operation means display Od1, and then the fan picture Fd disappears together with the effect image Ed (FIG. 42 (o)). That is, before the symbol variation display subject to the prefetching notice starts, the fan picture Fd disappears, and the prefetching notice with the fan picture Fd ends in a short time. On the other hand, in both FIG. 42 (n) and FIG. 42 (o), the first hold icon h1 continues to be displayed in a display mode representing the face of the Tono-sama character. Note that the fan design Fd may continue to be displayed until the symbol variation display subject to the prefetching notice starts, or may continue to be displayed until the symbol variation display subject to the prefetching notice ends.

  In this example, as in the example of FIG. 41, two types of notice are started by one operation of the chance button 136, but only one notice may be started by one operation of the chance button 136. There may be a case where two types of notice are started by one operation, and the expectation of jackpot may be higher than the case where only one notice is started by one operation. In addition, in the operation means display, the period displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the period displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N may not overlap with each other. The expected degree of jackpot may be determined by the decorative symbol display device on which the operation means display is displayed. For example, when the chance button 136 is operated in a state where the operation means display is displayed only on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the operation means display is displayed only on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The expectation of jackpot may be higher than when the chance button 136 is operated, or vice versa.

  Further, even if the chance button 136 is not operated before the meter displayed on the meter display Tm shown in FIG. 42 (j) becomes 0, the meter displayed on the meter display Tm is set to 0 because it is operated. After that, the notice effect of FIG. 42 (l) to FIG. 42 (o) may be executed.

  FIG. 43 is a diagram showing an example of the case where the effects differ before and after the change of the operation means display.

  In the example shown in FIG. 43, as shown in FIG. 43 (c), the chance button 136, which is an operation means corresponding to the first operation means display Od1, in a state where the first operation means display Od1 is displayed. Is operated, an operation sound such as “pico” is output from the speaker 120. That is, the operation of the chance button 136 at this timing is not accepted, or even if accepted, the operation is not invalidated, the operation is accepted as valid, and as a result, an operation sound is output. Yes. Although the operation of the chance button 136 is valid, the display mode of the first operation means display Od1 does not change according to the operation of the chance button 136.

  In FIG. 43 (d), the first operation means display Od1 changes to the third operation means display Od3 regardless of the operation of the chance button 136 in FIG. The third operation means display Od3 is a display form in which PUSH characters are added to the display imitating the chance button 136 that emits red light, and is the same as the display form of the second operation means display Od2. Therefore, the player cannot distinguish between the second operation means display Od2 and the third operation means display Od3. However, when the operation means (here, the chance button 136) is operated, the second operation means display Od2 is displayed. If so, the display mode changes, and if it is the third operation means display Od3, the display mode does not change.

  After changing to the third operation means display Od3, as shown in FIG. 43E, when the chance button 136 is operated again, a sound such as “pico-pico” is output from the speaker 120 this time. This sound is different from the operation sound output in FIG. 43 (c), but may be an operation sound corresponding to the third operation means display Od3, or may be an effect sound for a pre-reading notice. May be. In this case as well, the display mode of the third operation means display Od3 does not change according to the operation of the chance button 136. The third operation means display Od3 continues to be displayed until the next variation display of the third symbol pd3, and is displayed across the continuous variation display of the third symbol pd3.

  Further, when the chance button 136 is operated in a state where the third operation means display Od3 is displayed, when the pre-reading notice sound is output, the third operation means display Od3 itself is pre-read. It can also be said that it corresponds to a notice display (fourth notice effect).

  In FIG. 43 (n), the third operation means display Od3 changes to the second operation means display Od2. That is, a display in which PUSH characters are added to the display imitating the chance button 136 that emits red light is enlarged, and a large meter display Tm is additionally displayed below the display. However, the display position is not changed, and the second operation means display Od2 is also displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. In addition, a sound effect is output from the speaker 120 to notify that the operation means display has changed.

  In FIG. 43 (o), the meter display Tm is slightly reduced, and in FIG. 43 (p), the chance button 136 is operated. The operation of the chance button 136 here is as shown in FIG. 43 (q), in which the second operation means display Od2 changes to the first operation means display Od1, and the changed first operation means display Od1 is displayed. In the wipe display Wd displayed on the screen, the word “heat” is displayed as a pre-read notice display (first notice effect), and the effect image Ed is displayed on the wipe display Wd in the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Have been added. The pre-reading notice in FIG. 43 (q) is a notice with a high expectation of jackpot. In this example, the output sound from the speaker 120 in FIG. 43 (f) is different from the output sound from the speaker 120 in FIG. 43 (c). That is, the operation sound is a kind of effect, and the effect is different before and after the change of the operation means display (FIG. 43 (c)) and after the change (FIG. 43 (f)). If the effect after the change of the operation means display is different from the effect before the change, the effect of the jackpot in FIG. 43 (q) is obtained after the output of the sound effect in FIG. 43 (n). High notice may be executed. The player does not know the output timing of the sound effect, and can pay attention to the player's attention to the output of the sound effect and the change in the display of the operation means. ) May be disappointing.

  Note that even if the presentation differs between before and after the change of the display of the operation means, there may be a case where a warning with a low expectation of jackpot is executed, but a warning with a high expectation of jackpot is more likely to be executed.

  Further, even if the chance button 136 is operated again during the period of FIGS. 43 (g) to (m), the display mode of the third operation means display Od3 does not change, and a sound such as “pico-pico” is output from the speaker 120. Is only output again.

  Furthermore, even if the chance button 136 is not operated before the meter displayed on the meter display Tm shown in FIG. 43 (n) becomes 0, the meter displayed on the meter display Tm is set to 0 because it has been operated. After that, the effect of the pre-reading notice in FIG. 43 (q) may be executed.

  FIG. 44 is a diagram showing an example of the case where the effects are the same before and after the change of the operation means display. Hereinafter, the difference from the example shown in FIG. 43 will be mainly described.

  In the example shown in FIG. 44 as well, in FIG. 44 (c), the chance button 136, which is the operation means corresponding to the first operation means display Od1, is operated in the state where the first operation means display Od1 is displayed. As a result, an operation sound such as “pico” is output from the speaker 120.

  Further, in FIG. 44F, when the chance button 136 is operated in a state where the third operation means display Od3 in which the first operation means display Od1 is changed is displayed, “pico” is output from the speaker 120. Is output. That is, the same sound is output before and after the change of the operation means display.

  In FIG. 44 (n), the third operation means display Od3 changes to the second operation means display Od2. The second operation means display Od2 here also includes a display in which PUSH characters are added to the display imitating the chance button 136 that emits red light, as in the case of FIG. 43 (n). This display is not an enlarged display but a normal size. Also included is a normal size meter display Tm. Furthermore, a sound effect is output from the speaker 120 to notify that the operation means display has changed.

  In FIG. 44 (o), when the chance button 136 is operated, the operation means display which has been the second operation means display Od2 so far changes to the first operation means display Od1, and the changed first operation means. In the wipe display Wd displayed on the display Od1, characters “slight fever” are displayed as a pre-reading notice display (first notice effect). Here, the effect image Ed as shown in FIG. 43 (q) is not added, and the prefetching notice of “slight heat” in FIG. 44 (p) is replaced with the prefetching notice of “heat” shown in FIG. 44 (q). In comparison, the expectation of jackpot is low. In this example, the production (in this case, the output sound from the speaker 120) is the same before and after the change of the operation means display (FIG. 44C) and after the change (FIG. 44F). In such a case, after that, through the output of the sound effect in FIG. 44 (n), a notice with a low expectation level for jackpot in FIG. 44 (p) may be executed. Even if the production is the same before and after the change of the display of the operation means, a notice with a high expectation of jackpot (notice shown in FIG. 43 (q)), or “a certain thick” or “large board behavior” instead of “slight fever”. A notice with a very high expectation level for jackpot may be executed, but a notice with a low expectation level for jackpot is more likely to be executed.

  Note that even if the chance button 136 is operated again during the period of FIGS. 44 (g) to (m), the display mode of the third operation means display Od3 does not change, and a sound such as “pico” from the speaker 120 does not change. Is only output again.

  FIG. 45 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner an example in which the chance button 136 is operated during the execution of the variable display of the third symbol pd3, which was performed at the timing when the holding increased.

  In FIG. 45A, the third symbol pd3 is variably displayed in a state where there is no hold, and the first operation means display Od1 is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Then, at the timing of the next figure (b), there is a one-ball winning in the first special figure starting port 230, and in the figure (c), the first hold icon h1 is displayed. The first hold icon h1 is a so-called button hold icon in which a mini item MI ′ in which PUSH characters are added to a display imitating the chance button 136 that emits white light is added to the hold icon hd in a white display mode. It is. The display mode of the mini item MI 'here is the same as the display mode of the first operation means display Od1 displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Even if the chance button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 45C, no change occurs. That is, the display mode of the first operation means display Od1 does not change, the first operation means display Od1 is displayed as it is, and an effect corresponding to the operation of the chance button 136 is not started. This effect in response to the operation of the chance button 136 includes a change animation of the button hold icon, and the display mode of the button hold icon does not change at all.

  45 (d), the first operation means display Od1 displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N is changed to the second operation means display Od2, and the chance button 136 is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 45 (e1). Operated. That is, the chance button 136 is operated before the third symbol pd3, which has been displayed at the timing of FIG. Then, as shown in FIG. 45 (f1), the second operation means display Od2 is changed to the first operation means display Od1, and the wipe display Wd displayed on the changed first operation means display Od1. Is displayed as a pre-reading notice display (first notice effect), and the effect image Ed is added to the wipe display Wd in the third decorative symbol display device 208N. On the other hand, the first hold icon h1 is a display mode including the mini item MI 'and does not change at all.

  In FIG. 45 (g1), the third symbol pd3 is stopped (present stop). Even if the chance button 136 is not operated before the main stop, it is assumed that the operation has been performed, and the pre-reading notice shown in FIG. 45 (f1) is executed before or during the main stop. You may make it do.

  In FIG. 45 (h1), the first hold represented by the first hold icon h1 is digested, and the third symbol pd3 starts to be displayed in a variable manner. In the wipe display Wd, the characters “Next” displayed as the pre-read notice display disappear, and “Castle Town” as the name of the background stage is displayed. In addition, the button hold icon which has been the first hold icon h1 until then starts moving toward the area cs displaying the change icon while including the mini item MI ′. In FIG. 45 (i1), the change icon Is displayed as a fluctuation icon c including the mini item MI ′. It should be noted that the icon that has been the first hold icon h1 until then becomes a variable icon when it reaches the area cs where the variable icon is displayed, and at the time when the first symbol (special figure) starts the variable display. It may be considered as a fluctuation icon, or may be regarded as a fluctuation icon at a point away from the area hs where the hold icon is displayed.

  In FIG. 45 (j1), the mini item MI 'included in the change icon c changes to a mini item MI in a display mode in which PUSH characters are added to the display imitating the chance button 136 that emits red light. The display mode of the mini item MI here is the same as the display mode of the second operation means display Od2.

  When the chance button 136 is operated at the timing of FIG. 45 (k1), as shown in FIG. 45 (l1), the effect image Ed6 appears so as to hide all of the variation icons c. In FIG. 45 (m1), The effect image Ed6 disappears, and the change icon c has changed to a display mode representing the face of the Tono-sama character. The display form representing the face of the Tono-sama character corresponds to the display form of the normal notice with a very high expectation degree of jackpot, and the normal notice using the change icon c is started.

  In this example, the remaining display of the chance button 136 is not displayed on the mini item MI. However, even if the chance button 136 is not operated within the operation effective period of the chance button 136, there is no operation. For example, the normal notice using the change icon c may be started after the operation valid period has elapsed.

  FIG. 46 is a diagram showing an example of the case where the operation of the chance button is delayed in the example shown in FIG. Hereinafter, differences from the example shown in FIG. 45 will be described.

  In the example shown in FIG. 46, the chance button 136 is not operated during the execution of the variable display of the third symbol pd3, which has been performed at the timing when the hold increases, and the next variable display of the third symbol pd3 starts. Then, the chance button 136 is operated (FIG. 46 (i2)). That is, a state in which the second operation means display Od2 is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and the mini-item MI having the same display form as the display form of the second operation means display Od2 is included in the variation icon c. Then, the chance button 136 is operated. Then, as shown in FIG. 46 (j2), the second operation means display Od2 changes to the first operation means display Od1, and the wipe display Wd displayed on the changed first operation means display Od1. Is displayed as a normal notice display (second notice effect), and the effect image Ed is added to the wipe display Wd in the third decorative symbol display device 208N. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the character symbol “CHANCE” is displayed in a large size so as to overlap the third symbol pd3 during the variable display from the front side. On the other hand, an effect image Ed6 that hides the entire variation icon c appears in the region cs that displays the variation icon.

  In FIG. 46 (k2), the effect image Ed6 disappears, and the change icon c has changed to a display mode representing the face of the Tono-sama character. Further, the effect image Ed in the wipe display Wd also disappears.

  In FIG. 46 (l2), the variation display of the third symbol pd3 started in FIG. 46 (f2) is continued, and the variation icon c continues to be displayed in a display form representing the face of the character, and the wipe display The display of the normal notice in Wd (character display of “hot”) continues to be displayed. Note that the character symbol “CHANCE” displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L disappears, and the third symbol pd3 being displayed in a variable manner is visible. In addition, the display of the normal notice on the wipe display Wd (character display of “hot”) is also changed to “castle town” as the name of the background stage, and the normal notice corresponding to the second operation means display Od2 is ended early. May be. Thereafter, the variable display of the third symbol pd3 is ended, and the stop display (main stop) is performed with the combination of big hits. In addition, even if a normal advance notice is executed, a stop display (main stop) may be made by a combination of misses.

  In the example of FIGS. 45 and 46 described above, the operation of the chance button 136 can be accepted from the time when the second operation means display Od2 is changed, and the sub-control units 400 and 500 side change the symbol to be notified. When the operation of the chance button 136 is detected before the display is started, the pre-reading notice effect data corresponding to the second operation means display Od2 is used, and FIG. 45 (f1) to FIG. 45 (g1). If the operation of the chance button 136 is detected after the symbol change display to be notified is started (for example, after receiving the symbol change start command from the main control unit 300), On the control unit 400, 500 side, the effect data for the normal notice corresponding to the second operation means display Od2 is used, and the effect data for changing the display mode of the fluctuation icon c is used. Performs normal notice shown in FIG. 46 (j2) or later. For this reason, the player may be given pleasure to select when to operate the chance button 136.

  FIG. 47 is a diagram showing step by step an example in which the operation means display once disappears after the chance button 136 is operated.

  The first operation means display Od1 shown in FIG. 47A is changed to the second operation means display Od2 in FIG. 47B, and a sound effect is output from the speaker 120. Here, the second operation means display Od2 is a combination of the display in which PUSH characters are added to the display imitating the chance button 136 that emits red light and the meter display Tm.

  When the chance button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 47 (d) during the variation display of the third symbol pd3, as shown in FIG. The “next” character is displayed as the notice effect), and the effect image Ed is added to the wipe display Wd in the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Further, the second operation means display Od2 displayed under the wipe display Wd disappears, and no operation means display is displayed under the wipe display Wd.

  In FIG. 47F, the effect image Ed disappears, but the “next” character continues to be displayed on the wipe display Wd. After the display of the variation of the third symbol pd3 continues for a while, in FIG. 47 (i), the third symbol pd3 sways (temporarily stops) due to the combination of the decorative symbol loss, and in FIG. The 3 symbol pd3 is stopped and displayed by a combination of the decorative symbols lost (main stop). The stop display (main stop) of the third symbol pd3 continues until FIG. 47 (m). During this stop display (main stop), as shown in FIG. 47 (k), the wipe display Wd is changed from “next” as the pre-reading notice display to “castle town” as the name of the background stage. . The operation means display is not displayed until the time of FIG. 47 (k).

  While the stop display (main stop) of the third symbol pd3 continues, as shown in FIGS. 47 (l) to (m), in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the first operation means display Od1 is displayed from the bottom. An animation that gradually appears (display start animation) is displayed, and finally the first operation means display Od1 is displayed below the wipe display Wd during the stop display (main stop) of the third symbol pd3. Is done.

  In this way, the second operation means display Od2 does not have to be immediately switched to the first operation means display Od1 when the corresponding operation means (here, the chance button 136) is operated, and once it disappears. The first operation means display Od1 may be displayed.

  The timing at which the first operation means display Od1 is displayed may be during the fluctuation display when the second operation means display Od2 disappears during the fluctuation display of the third symbol pd3. The next variation display start of the third symbol pd3 may be started, or the next variation display may be in progress. The timing may be during the stop display (main stop) when the second operation means display Od2 disappears during the stop display (main stop) of the third symbol pd3. The next variation display start of the symbol pd3 may be started, or the next variation display may be in progress.

  Further, in this example, the first operation means display Od1 is displayed, but it may be the third operation means display Od3, the fourth operation means display Od4, or first. The second operation means display Od2 may be different from the displayed second operation means display Od2.

  Further, the fourth operation means display Od4 does not immediately switch to the first operation means display Od1 as shown in FIG. 36 (38) when the corresponding operation means (here, the chance button 136) is operated. Alternatively, it may be displayed after the first operation means display Od1 after disappearing. Further, when the corresponding operation means is operated while the fourth operation means display Od4 is displayed, an operation means display other than the first operation means display Od1 may be displayed.

  The various operation means displays Od1 to Od4 may be hidden during the big hit game, and may be suddenly displayed without the display start animation when the display is started after the big hit game ends.

  Further, the various operation means displays Od1 to Od4 may disappear once during the display and be displayed again. For example, it may disappear once during the variation display of the third symbol pd3, and may be redisplayed during the variation display, may be redisplayed at the start of the next variation display, or redisplayed during the next variation display. May be. Alternatively, it may disappear once during the stop display (main stop) of the third symbol pd3, and may be displayed again during the stop display (main stop), or may be displayed again at the start of the next variable display, It may be redisplayed during the next variation display.

  FIG. 48 is a diagram showing a modified example of how to display the operation means display.

  In FIG. 48 (a), the second decorative symbol display device 208M on the left side displays the reduced display pd3 ′ of the third symbol pd3, the area cs for displaying the variation icon, and the variation icon c. The first operating means display Od1 is displayed on the three decorative symbol display device 208N. Note that a super reach effect is being executed, and the scene after the swordsman and swordsman slash are displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

  In FIG. 48B, the second decorative symbol display device 208M starts moving to the right side, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N starts moving to the left side. That is, the movements 208M and 208N start to move toward each other.

  FIG. 48 (c) shows the moment when the right end of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the left end of the third decorative symbol display device 208N are in contact with each other at the central portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. That is, the moment when the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are completely closed is shown. At this stage, there is no change in the display on the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the display on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. When the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are completely closed, the lower part of the family crest member 224E ′ is the upper right end portion of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decoration. The symbol display device 208N overlaps with the upper left corner from the front side. Further, both the lord and the swordsman displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L are hidden by the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. However, the fifth symbol pd5 is not hidden by the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N and is visible.

  In FIG. 48D, the first operation means display Od1 displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N is displayed in a state where the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are completely closed. It changes to the second operation means display Od2. In other words, as the second operation means display Od2, a display in which PUSH characters are added to a display imitating the chance button 136 that emits red light straddles the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. In addition, a large meter display Tm ′ is also displayed below the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Note that the first operation means display Od1 disappears from the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Further, from the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the region cs for displaying the variation icon and the variation icon c disappear to make the first operation means display Od1 stand out.

  In this example, the second operation means display Od2 is enlarged and displayed so as to straddle two decorative symbol display devices, but may be enlarged and displayed so as to straddle three decorative symbol display devices. Further, the display size is not limited to the enlarged display, and may be the same as the size before the change (here, the first operation means display Od1). Furthermore, the same applies to other operation means displays other than the second operation means display Od2. That is, the operation means display may be displayed across a plurality of decorative symbol display devices.

  As described above, in the example described with reference to FIGS. 34 to 48, the operation means display is displayed even during the stop display (main stop) of the third symbol pd3, so that the variation display of the third symbol pd3 is still displayed. You can make the player feel as if it has not ended.

  In the example described with reference to FIGS. 34 to 48, the operation means display is a display corresponding to the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 1 and the chance button 136 is operated. The means display may be a display corresponding to another operation means such as the second chance button, the transparent portion 191 and the operation key unit 181.

  Further, the operation of the chance button 136 may be a normal operation called single press or short press or a single press, a long press operation, a continuous hit operation, or a normal operation. The operation may be an operation that is performed a plurality of times at intervals.

  In addition, the above-described advance notice such as the pre-read notice and the normal notice is not always a big hit even if the notice is executed, and may be lost. That is, the higher the expectation level of jackpot, the lower the chance of losing and the higher the chance of hitting.

  In FIGS. 35 (26) to 36 (40), the first operation means display Od1 and the fourth operation means display Od4 are displayed during execution of the super reach effect. In some cases, at least one of the first operation means display Od1 to the fourth operation means display Od4 or all of the operation means display may not be displayed. It may be displayed. In addition, when there are a plurality of types of super-reach effects, only one or a plurality of types of super-reach effects may be hidden or may not be displayed. In FIG. 40 (i), the second operation means display Od2 is displayed during the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect, but the first operation means display Od1 to the fourth operation display is also performed during the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect. Of the operation means display Od4, at least one of the operation means display or all of the operation means display may or may not be displayed. Furthermore, not only the super reach effect and the pseudo-continuous effect but during the execution of the specific effect, at least one of the first operation means display Od1 to the fourth operation means display Od4 or all the operation means display is displayed. , It may be hidden or it may be hidden.

  Further, during the execution of the jackpot game that the attacker opens, at least one of the first operation means display Od1 to the fourth operation means display Od4 or all the operation means display is not displayed. There may be, and it may be hidden. On the other hand, during the non-hit game that is not being executed, all the operation means displays Od1 to Od4 can be displayed. However, even during a non-hit game, in the probability variation state (special figure high probability state), at least one of the first operation means display Od1 to the fourth operation means display Od4 or all the operations are displayed. The means display may or may not be displayed. Even during a non-hit game, in the electric support state (ordinary high probability state), at least one operation means display or all of the first operation means display Od1 to the fourth operation means display Od4 are displayed. The operation means display may be hidden or may not be displayed.

  The second operation means display Od2 may be a display having a display form that is different from the display form of the first operation means display Od1 in at least one of color and size. For example, the second operation means display Od2 shown in FIGS. 34 (2) to (9) is different from the display form of the first operation means display Od1 only in color, but the color is the same and only the size is different. May be. On the other hand, the second operation means display Od2 shown in FIG. 43 (n) to FIG. 43 (o) has a different color and size from the display form of the first operation means display Od1, and a meter display Tm is added. Yes.

  Further, the third operation means display Od3 may also be a display having a display form that is different from the display form of the first operation means display Od1 in at least one of color and size. For example, the third operation means display Od3 shown in FIG. 43 (d) to FIG. 43 (m) differs from the display form of the first operation means display Od1 only in color, but the color is the same and only the size is different. Alternatively, both the color and size may be different, and the pattern and shape may be different.

  In addition, all of the operation means displays of the first operation means display Od1 to the fourth operation means display Od4 are displays including a display imitating the corresponding operation means (here, the chance button 136). The display imitating the button 136 is not necessarily included, and all the operation means display may not be included, or only a part of the operation means display (for example, the second operation means display Od2) is included. It does not have to be.

  In addition, the effects that are started when the operation means is operated while the operation means display is displayed include the effects related to the current symbol variation, the effects related to prefetching, and the effects in which the change is stopped (for example, variations) It is possible to list the effects in a state where there is no suspension and there is no hold (a demonstration effect may or may not be included). That is, the effects that are started when the operating means is operated may be all of the above-listed effects, or may not be applied among the above-listed effects.

  Further, in FIG. 41 (k), FIG. 41 (l), and the like, a button hold icon which is a display related to the operation means but is different from the operation means display is displayed together. In addition to the button holding icon, the display other than the operation means displays Od1 to Od4 includes a button display in the judgment effect, a button display in the pseudo-joint effect, a button display in the conversation notice, and the like. These displays may be displayed together with the operation means displays Od1 to Od4. In addition, the display related to the hold icon such as the button hold icon is different, but the button display in the judgment effect, the button display in the pseudo-joint effect, the button display in the conversation notice can be regarded as a kind of operation means display. There is also. For example, the fourth operation means display Od4 shown in FIGS. 35 (33) to 35 (36) can be viewed as a button display in the judgment effect.

  As described above, the example in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko machine (bullet ball game machine) has been described in detail. However, the game table of the present invention is not limited to this example. The present invention can also be applied to a spinning machine (slot machine) to be used. That is, the pachinko machine 100 described so far is a pachinko (1 type + 1 type), but other pachinko (eg, 1 type, 2 types, 3 types, 1 type + 2 types, etc.), slot etc. Parrot, jade ball). More specifically, when a medal (game medium) is inserted and the start lever is operated to rotate the reel, the winning combination is determined internally by internal lottery, and the stop button is operated to stop the reel In addition, if a combination of symbols predetermined according to the internal decision is displayed on the symbol display window, a winning combination is established, and if a winning combination with a medal payout is established, a prescribed number of medals are paid out, etc. It may be a spinning machine (slot machine) that gives a privilege to the player. Alternatively, a predetermined number of game balls are encapsulated as encapsulated balls, the encapsulated spheres are fired into a game area to play a game, and a predetermined game value is given to a player based on the fact that the encapsulated balls win a predetermined entry area. It is also possible to use an enclosed ball game table that can be circulated by launching the enclosed ball that has won the predetermined entry area or the enclosed ball that has not won the prize into the game area.

  As described above, the present invention can be applied to various types of game machines, and will be described more specifically with reference to the drawings.

  FIG. 49 is a front view of a sealed pachinko machine to which the present invention can be applied.

  In a sealed pachinko machine 900 shown in FIG. 49, a predetermined number of game media (for example, game balls) are circulated inside the game table. That is, the game medium launched from the launching means 901 to the game area 902 can be discharged from the game area 902 and supplied to the launching means 901 again. In addition, a display means 903 for displaying information on the number of game media (award balls, rental balls, total number of balls, etc.) and other information is disposed below the game area 902 on the front of the game table. The upper plate 126 and the lower plate 128 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 50 is an external perspective view of a slot machine to which the present invention can be applied as viewed from the front side (player side).

  The slot machine 1000 includes a main body 1001 and a front door 1002 that is attached to the front surface of the main body 1001 and can be opened and closed with respect to the main body 1001. Inside the center of the main body 1001 (not shown in FIG. 50), three reels (left reel 1010, middle reel 1011 and right reel 1012) having a plurality of types of symbols arranged on the outer peripheral surface are stored. It is configured to rotate inside. These reels 1010 to 1012 are rotationally driven by driving means such as a stepping motor.

  In the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 50, an appropriate number of symbols are printed at equal intervals on the belt-like member, and the reels 1010 to 1012 are configured by sticking this belt-like member to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame material. . When viewed from the player, the symbols on the reels 1010 to 1012 are generally displayed in the vertical direction from the symbol display window 1013 so that a total of nine symbols can be seen. Then, by rotating each of the reels 1010 to 1012, the combination of symbols that can be seen by the player varies. That is, each of the reels 1010 to 1012 functions as a display unit that displays a combination of a plurality of types of symbols in a variable manner. In addition to the reel, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can also be used as such a display means. Further, in the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 50, three reels are provided in the center of the slot machine 1000, but the number of reels and the installation position of the reels are not limited to this.

  A backlight (not shown in FIG. 50) for illuminating individual symbols displayed on the symbol display window 1013 is arranged on the rear surface of each reel 1010 to 1012. It is desirable that the backlight is shielded for each symbol so that the individual symbols can be illuminated evenly. In the slot machine 1000, an optical sensor (not shown) including a light projecting unit and a light receiving unit is provided in the vicinity of each reel 1010 to 1012. The light projecting unit and the light receiving unit of this optical sensor are provided. A light shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel passes between the two. Based on the detection result of this sensor, the position of the symbol on the reel in the rotation direction is determined, and the reels 1010 to 1012 are stopped so that the target symbol is displayed on the winning line.

  The winning line display lamp 1020 is a lamp indicating a winning line 1014 that is valid. The effective pay line is determined in advance by the number of medals bet as a game medium. There are 5 winning lines 1014. For example, when one medal is bet, the middle horizontal winning line is valid, and when two medals are betted, the upper horizontal winning line and the lower horizontal winning line are added. If three are valid and three medals are bet, five lines including a right-down winning line and an upper-right winning line are valid as winning lines. The number of winning lines 1014 is not limited to five. For example, when one medal is bet, the middle horizontal winning line, the upper horizontal winning line, the lower horizontal winning line, the right Five lines, the down line and the upper right line, may be valid as the winning lines.

  The notification lamp 1023 is, for example, a lamp that informs the player that a specific winning combination (specifically, a bonus) has been won internally in the internal lottery or that a bonus game is in progress. The game medal insertable lamp 1024 is a lamp for notifying that the player can insert a game medal. The replay lamp 1022 informs the player that the current game is replayable (the medal need not be inserted) when winning a replay that is one of the winning combinations in the previous game. It is a lamp. The reel panel lamp 1028 is an effect lamp.

  The bet buttons 1030 to 1032 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (referred to as credits) stored electronically in the slot machine 1000. In the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 50, every time the bet button 1030 is pressed, a maximum of three cards are inserted. When the bet button 1031 is pressed, two cards are inserted, and when the bet button 1032 is pressed. Three cards are inserted. Hereinafter, the bet button 1032 is also referred to as a MAX bet button. The game medal insertion lamp 1029 turns on the lamps corresponding to the number of inserted medals, and when a prescribed number of medals are inserted, the game start is informed that a game start operation is possible. The lamp 1021 is turned on.

  The medal slot 1034 is an slot for the player to insert a medal when starting a game. In other words, medals can be inserted electronically using the bet buttons 1030 to 1032, or actual medals can be inserted (insertion operation) from the medal insertion slot 1034. is there. The stored number display 1025 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 1000. The game information display 1026 is a display for displaying various types of internal information (for example, the number of medals paid out during a bonus game) as numerical values. The payout number display unit 1027 is a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a result of winning a winning combination.

  The start lever 1035 is a lever type switch for starting the rotation of the reels 1010 to 1012. That is, when a desired medal number is inserted into the medal insertion slot 1034 or when the bet buttons 1030 to 1032 are operated and the start lever 1035 is operated, the reels 1010 to 1012 start to rotate. The operation on the start lever 1035 is referred to as a game start operation. In this slot machine 1000, based on the operation of the start lever 1035, an internal lottery process for performing a lottery to determine which of the plurality of roles is won is executed. It is determined whether the player is in a relatively advantageous state or a relatively unfavorable state.

  The stop button unit 1036 is provided with stop buttons 1037 to 1039. Stop buttons 1037 to 10310 are button-type switches for individually stopping the reels 1010 to 1012 that have started rotating by operating the start lever 1035, and are associated with the reels 1010 to 1012. Hereinafter, the operation on the stop buttons 1037 to 1039 is referred to as a stop operation, the first stop operation is referred to as a first stop operation, the next stop operation is referred to as a second stop operation, and the last stop operation is referred to as a third stop operation. Note that a light emitter may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 1037 to 1039. When the stop buttons 1037 to 1039 can be operated, the light emitter can be turned on to notify the player.

  The medal return button 1033 is a button that is pressed to remove a medal when the inserted medal is clogged. The settlement button 1043 is a button for adjusting the medals electronically stored in the slot machine 1000 and the bet medals and discharging them from the medal payout exit 1055. Door key hole 1040 is a hole into which a key for unlocking front door 1002 of slot machine 1000 is inserted. The medal payout exit 1055 is a payout exit for paying out medals.

  50 is provided with the same operation key unit 1090 as the operation key unit 181 provided in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 between the MAX bet button 1032 and the medal slot 1034. ing. This operation key unit 1090 also has a cross key, an OK button, and a cancel button. Further, next to the operation key unit 1090, the same effect button 1091 as the chance button 136 provided in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 is provided.

  The sound hole 1060 is a hole for outputting the sound of a speaker provided inside the slot machine 1000 to the outside. Side lamps 1044 provided on the left and right portions of the front door 1002 are decorative lamps for exciting games. A rendering device 1080 is disposed above the front door 1002. This rendering device 1080 includes a door (shutter) member 1063 including two right doors 1063a and 1063b that can be opened and closed in a horizontal direction, and a liquid crystal display device 1057 (illustrated) disposed on the back side of the door member 1063. When the two right doors 1063a and 1063b are opened in the horizontal direction in front of the liquid crystal display device 1057, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1057 (not shown) is displayed in front of the slot machine 1000 (player). Side). In addition, even if it is not a liquid crystal display device, it should just be comprised so that various effect images and various game information can be displayed, for example, it consists of a dot matrix display, an organic EL display, a plasma display, or a projector and a screen. A display device or the like may be used. Further, the display screen has a rectangular shape and is configured so that the player can visually recognize the entire display screen. In the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 50, the display screen is a rectangular flat surface, but may be a square flat surface. In addition, a decorative object (not shown) may be provided on the periphery of the display screen, and a part of the peripheral edge of the display screen may be hidden by the decorative object, so that the display screen looks irregular. Furthermore, the display screen may have a curved surface.

  In the slot machine 1000 described above, as operation means, in addition to the bet buttons 1030 to 1032, the start lever 1035, the stop buttons 1037 to 1039, etc., the operation key unit 1090 (an example of the first operation means and the third operation means). ) And effect buttons 1091 (an example of second operation means). Further, in the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 50, a display panel 1070 displaying a device title and the like can project toward the front side. Further, a light emitting diode (LED) is built in the display panel 1070. The display panel 1070 shown in FIG. 50 is in the initial position. When the display panel 1070 protrudes toward the front side, the display panel 1070 can perform a push-in operation, and functions as an operation unit (button) in the same manner as the transmission unit 191. This corresponds to an example of one operating means, and also corresponds to an example of a movable means. Further, each button of the operation key unit 1090, the effect button 1091, and the display panel 1070 can vibrate. However, the buttons of the operation key unit 1090 may not vibrate.

In the above description,
“Display means [for example, any one of the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the fourth decorative symbol display device 208O, etc. One or more],
Operation means provided at a position where the player can operate [for example, any one or more of a chance button 136, a second chance button, a transparent portion 191, an operation key unit 181 and the like];
A game machine equipped with
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of operation means display,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a decorative symbol [for example, a decorative symbol (third symbol pd3), a fourth symbol pd4, or a fifth symbol pd5 shown in FIG. 5B),
The display means is a means capable of displaying a hold display [for example, hold icons h1 to h4, button hold icons MI, hd] according to the number of held balls,
One of the plurality of types of operation means displays is a first operation means display [for example, first operation means display Od1],
One of the plurality of types of operation means displays is a second operation means display [for example, second operation means display Od2],
The second operation means display is a display different from the first operation means display [for example, a display, shape, color, size, etc. having the same shape and different colors, sizes, patterns, etc. Display with the same pattern, etc., with different operation modes such as vibration, rotation, etc., and display with different shapes (from the display that simulates the operation means, the operation promotion display, the remaining period display, etc. A different type of display, a display with a different operating means, etc.]
The first operation means display is a display different from the hold display,
The second operation means display is a display different from the hold display,
The first operation means display is a display [e.g., FIG. 34 (13) to FIG. 35 (29)] that may be displayed across a plurality of continuous display variations of the decorative symbol.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

  Here, the “decorative display of the decorative pattern” means that the decorative display of the variable display is being displayed, and includes the display of the variable display when the variable display is started with the stop display interposed therebetween. Moreover, it can also be regarded as 1 fluctuation | variation from the start of a fluctuation | variation display to a fixed display. Furthermore, “stretching” means that a decorative symbol stop display period (fluctuation stop period) is sandwiched between them.

  The second operation means display may be a display developed from the first operation means display, or may be a display switched from the first operation means display.

  Further, the operation means display is a display related to the operation means, for example, a display prompting to operate the operation means (hereinafter referred to as “operation promotion display”), or an operation effective period of the operation means. Display of the remaining period (hereinafter referred to as “remaining period display”) or a display reminiscent of the operation means.

  The first operation means display may be a display that is always displayed over a plurality of variations of the decorative symbol display. In addition, the second operation means display may be a display that is always displayed over a plurality of variations of the decorative symbol display.

  The first operation means display may be a display that is continuously displayed during the display of the decorative symbol variation display, or may be a display that once disappears in the middle. Further, during the display of the stop display of the decorative design, it may be a display that is continuously displayed, may be a display that disappears in the middle, or may continue to disappear during the display of the stop display. May be displayed. In addition, the first operation means display may end during the display of the stop display, but may be a display that may not end.

  The second operation means display may be a display that is continuously displayed during the display of the decorative symbol variation display, or may be a display that once disappears in the middle. Further, during the display of the stop display of the decorative design, it may be a display that is continuously displayed, may be a display that disappears in the middle, or may continue to disappear during the display of the stop display. May be displayed. Further, the second operation means display may end during the display of the stop display, but may be a display that may not end.

  Further, the second operation means display may be the same display mode as the first operation means display or may be a different display mode.

  Note that the operation means may be means that must be operated by a player. In addition, the display means may be means for always displaying a plurality of types of operation means display, may be means for always displaying decorative symbols, or always displays a hold display according to the number of balls on hold. It may be a means to do.

Also,
“The first operation means display is a display that does not change even when the operation means is operated [for example, FIG. 43 (b)] [for example, as shown in FIG. 43 (c), the first operation means display. Od1 has not changed],
When the operation means is operated in the state where the first operation means display is displayed, a response action corresponding to the operation means being operated [For example, as shown in FIG. Output of operation sound such as “pico” may occur,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this aspect, although the operation means display (first operation means display) does not change even if the operation means is operated, the response operation is performed, giving the player a sense of incongruity and interest. There are cases where it is possible.

  Here, the first operation means display may be a default operation means display among the plurality of types of operation means displays.

In addition to the output from the speaker, the response operation may be any display, light emission of the light emitting means, operation of the movable means, etc., or a combination thereof (hereinafter the same) .)
When the operation means is operated in the state where the first operation means display is displayed, a response operation according to the operation of the operation means may be performed without fail.

Also,
“One of the plural types of operation means displays is a third operation means display [for example, third operation means display Od3],
The third operation means display is different from the first operation means display [for example, a display mode including a display imitating the chance button 136 that emits white light] [for example, the chance button 136 that emits red light is displayed. Display mode including simulated display],
The third operation means display is a display different from the hold display,
The third operation means display is a display that does not change even when the operation means is operated [for example, the third operation means display Od3 does not change as shown in FIG. 43 (f)],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this aspect, since the third operation means display different from the first operation means display is displayed, when the player operates the operation means, there is some change in the third operation means display. There is a case where it is possible to give a player a sense of incongruity and interest because there is no change.

  The third operation means display may be a display that is continuously displayed during the display of the decorative symbol variation display, or may be a display that once disappears in the middle. Further, during the display of the stop display of the decorative design, it may be a display that is continuously displayed, may be a display that disappears in the middle, or may continue to disappear during the display of the stop display. May be displayed. The third operation means display may end during the display of the stop display, but may also be a display that may not end.

  The third operation means display may be a display developed from the first operation means display, a display switched from the first operation means display, or the first operation means display. The operation means display may be changed.

  In addition, the third operation means display is a display in which the first operation means display is changed, and the first operation means display is the third operation means during display of the decorative symbol variation display. The display may change.

  The third operation means display may be the same display form as the second operation means display, or may be a different display form.

Also,
“When the operation means is operated while the third operation means display is displayed, a response action corresponding to the operation means being operated [for example, as shown in FIG. [Operation sound output such as “pico-pico”] may be performed,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  When the operation means is operated in a state where the third operation means display is displayed, a response operation corresponding to the operation of the operation means may be performed without fail.

Also,
The third operation means display is a display in which the first operation means display is changed.
There is a case where the first operation means display changes to the third operation means display [for example, the case shown in FIG. 43 (d)] during the display of the decorative symbol variation display.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  In addition, during the display of the variation display of the decorative symbol, the first operation means display may be changed to the third operation means display.

Also,
The third operation means display is a display [for example, FIG. 43 (d) to FIG. 43 (m)] that may be displayed across a plurality of variations of the decorative symbol.
The third operation means display is a display in which there is a case [for example, a case shown in FIG. 43 (h) to FIG.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  The third operation means display may be a display that is always displayed over a plurality of times the decorative symbol variation display. The third operation means display may be a display that is always displayed even during the display of the stop display of the decorative symbol.

Also,
“When the operation means is operated while the third operation means display is displayed [for example, FIG. 43 (e)], when the first notice effect is started [for example, FIG. 43 (f) ), When the output of the pre-notification effect sound such as “pico-pico” is started]
The first notice effect is a notice effect of a pre-read notice,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Note that when the operation means is operated in a state where the third operation means display is displayed, the first notice effect may be surely started.

  Here, the third operation means display itself may be a display of a pre-reading notice (fourth notice effect).

Also,
The display means includes first display means [for example, first decorative symbol display device 208L] and one or more second display means [for example, second decorative symbol display device 208M, third decorative symbol display device. 208N, any one or more of the fourth decorative symbol display device 208O].
The second display means is a means having a display screen smaller than the first display means,
The first operation means display is a display that may be displayed on the second display means [for example, FIG. 34 (1)],
The second operation means display is a display that may be displayed on the second display means [for example, FIG. 34 (2) to FIG. 11 (11)],
The third operation means display is a display that may be displayed on the second display means [for example, FIG. 39 (b) to FIG. 39 (i)],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the fourth operation means display may be a display that may be displayed on the first display means, or a display that may be displayed on the second display means. Also good.

  The first operation means display may be a display that is always displayed on the second display means, and the second operation means display is a display that is always displayed on the second display means. The third operation means display may be a display that is always displayed on the second display means.

  The display means may be a means including only the first display means and one or a plurality of second display means, or may be a means including a third display means.

Also,
“It is configured to be able to execute a jackpot game that an attacker [for example, variable prize opening 234, 235] opens,
The first operation means display is a display that may be displayed in a non-hit game [for example, a normal game state in which a variation display of decorative symbols can be executed]
The second operation means display is a display that may be displayed in the non-hit game,
The third operation means display is a display that may be displayed in the non-hit game.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the fourth operation means display may be a display that may be displayed in the non-hit game.

  Note that the jackpot game that is opened by the attacker may be executed without fail.

Also,
The first operation means display may be hidden during execution of a certain effect [for example, super reach effect or pseudo-continuous effect, etc.] even when the decorative symbol variation display is being displayed. Display,
The second operation means display is a display that may be hidden during execution of the certain effect, even if the decorative symbol variation display is being displayed.
The third operation means display is a display that may be hidden during execution of the certain effect even when the decorative symbol variation display is being displayed.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the certain effect may be a super reach effect or a pseudo-continuous effect. That is, the certain effect may be both a super reach effect and a pseudo-ream effect, or only one of them. Here, the super reach production refers to various reach productions other than the normal reach production (including special reach such as special multi-line reach, full rotation reach, special full rotation reach, etc.). Further, the pseudo-continuous effect is an effect in which a temporary stop display of the decorative symbol, which is different from the stop display of the decorative symbol, is displayed. If the operation means is operated while the fourth operation means display is displayed, the fourth operation means display may disappear and the second notice effect may be started. The second notice effect may be a pseudo-continuous effect, and the pseudo-continuous effect may be an effect in which a temporary stop display of the decorative symbol is displayed, which is different from the stop display of the decorative symbol.

  The first operation means display may be a display that may be hidden during the big hit game, and the second operation means display may be hidden during the big hit game. The third operation means display may be a display that may be hidden during the big hit game.

  The first operation means display may be a display that may be hidden in the probability change state, and the second operation means display may be a display that may be hidden in the probability change state. Alternatively, the third operation means display may be a display that may not be displayed in the probability variation state.

  Further, the first operation means display may be a display that may be hidden in the electric support state, and the second operation means display may be a display that may be hidden in the electric support state. The third operation means display may be a display that may be hidden in the electric support state.

  The first operation means display may be a display that is always hidden during the super reach, even during the display of the decorative symbol variation display, and the second operation means display may be Even during display of the decorative symbol variation display, it may be a display that is always hidden during the super reach, and the third operation means display is during the decoration symbol variation display display. Even in such a case, the display may be always hidden during the super reach.

  The first operation means display may be a display that is always hidden during a big hit game, and the second operation means display may be a display that is always hidden during a big hit game. The third operation means display may be a display that is always hidden during the big hit game.

  The first operation means display may be a display that is always hidden in the probability change state, and the second operation means display may be a display that is always hidden in the probability change state. The third operation means display may be a display that is always hidden in the probability variation state.

  The first operation means display may be a display that is always hidden in the electric support state, and the second operation means display may be a display that is always hidden in the electric support state. The third operation means display may be a display that is always hidden in the electric support state.

Also,
“The second operation means display is a display of a display form different from the display form of the first operation means display in at least one of color and size [for example, FIG. 34 (2) to FIG. ) Second operation means display Od2 shown in FIG. 43, and second operation means display Od2 shown in FIG. 43 (n) to FIG.
The third operation means display is a display of a display form different from the display form of the first operation means display in at least one of color and size [for example, FIG. 43 (d) to FIG. The third operation means display Od3] shown in FIG.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the display of the second operation means may be a display having the same display form as the display of the third operation means. The display of the display mode from which at least any one of these differs may be sufficient.

  Further, the fourth operation means display may be a display form in which at least one of color or size is different from the display form of the first operation means display.

  Further, the fourth operation means display may be the same display form as the display form of the second operation means display, and the display form, color or size of the second operation means display. The display of the display mode from which at least any one of differs may be sufficient.

  Further, the fourth operation means display may be the same display form as the third operation means display, or the display form, color or size of the third operation means display. The display of the display mode from which at least any one of differs may be sufficient.

  The second operation means display may be a display form different from the display form of the first operation means display, both in color and size, or only in color, or only in size. The third operation means display may be a display form different from the display form of the first operation means display, both in color and size, or only in color, or only in size.

  The second operation means display may be a display form different from the display form of the third operation means display in both color and size, or only the color or only the size. The fourth operation means display may be a display form that is different from the display form of the first operation means display, both in color and size, only in color, or only in size.

  The fourth operation means display may be a display form different from the display form of the second operation means display, both in color and size, or only in color, or only in size. The display mode of the third operation means display and the display mode may be different in both color and size, or only in color or only in size.

Also,
“One of the plurality of types of operation means display is a fourth operation means display [for example, a fourth operation means display Od4],
The fourth operation means display is a display different from the hold display,
The fourth operation means display is a display [e.g., FIG. 35 (33) to FIG. 36 (36)] that may be displayed during display of the decorative symbol variation display.
The fourth operation means display is a display that is not displayed during the display of the stop display of the decorative design,
The fourth operation means display is a display that is not displayed across a plurality of variations of the decorative symbol display,
When the operation means is operated in the state where the fourth operation means display is displayed [for example, FIG. 36 (37)], a second notice effect may be started.
The second notice effect is a notice effect related to a big hit by a variation display of the decorative symbol displayed at the time of start [for example, a family crest character shown in FIGS. 36 (38) to (40) 224E 'operation etc. of normal notice]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the fourth operation means display may be a display developed from the first operation means display, a display switched from the first operation means display, or the first operation means display. One operation means display may be changed.

  Further, the fourth operation means display is a display in which the first operation means display is changed, and the first operation means display is the fourth operation means during display of the decorative symbol variation display. The display may change.

  In addition, the fourth operation means display may be a display in which display is started regardless of other types of operation means display (for example, the first operation means display).

  The fourth operation means display may be a display mode different from the first operation means display. The fourth operation means display may be a display displayed at a display position different from the display position of the first operation means display, or larger than the size of the first operation means display. It may be a display that is displayed, or may be a display that is displayed smaller than the size of the first operation means display.

  The fourth operation means display may be the same display form as the second operation means display, or may be a different display form. The fourth operation means display may be a display displayed at a display position different from the display position of the second operation means display, or larger than the size of the second operation means display. The display may be displayed, or the display may be smaller than the size of the second operation means display.

  The fourth operation means display may be the same display form as the third operation means display, or may be a different display form. The fourth operation means display may be a display displayed at a display position different from the display position of the third operation means display, or larger than the size of the third operation means display. It may be a display that is displayed, or may be a display that is displayed smaller than the size of the third operation means display.

  Note that when the operation means is operated in a state where the fourth operation means display is displayed, the second notice effect may be surely started.

Also,
“The fourth operation means display is a display that may be displayed simultaneously with the second operation means display [for example, the case shown in 40 (f) to FIG.
When the operation means is operated while the fourth operation means display and the second operation means display are simultaneously displayed, the second operation means display does not change [for example, FIG. ) As shown in the second operation means display Od2],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the display timing of the fourth operation means display and the second operation means display may be different.

  The fourth operation means display may be a display that may be displayed in parallel with the second operation means display.

  Further, when the operation means is operated while the fourth operation means display and the second operation means display are simultaneously displayed [for example, FIG. 40 (h)], the fourth operation means Of the second notice effect corresponding to the display and the first notice effect corresponding to the second operation means display, the second notice effect [for example, by the pseudo-continuous effect shown in FIG. Only the normal notice effect] may be started, or only the second notice effect may always be started.

  When the operation means is operated again after the second notice effect is started, the first notice effect corresponding to the second operation means display [for example, as shown in FIG. In the wipe display Wd, there may be a case where the character display of “heat” and the pre-reading notice effect by the effect image Ed] may be started, or the first notice effect may always be started. The second operation means display may change [for example, change to the first operation means display Od1 as shown in FIG. 40 (k)].

  Here, when the operation means is operated in a state where the fourth operation means display and the second operation means display are simultaneously displayed, the second operation means display corresponding to the fourth operation means display. Both the notice effect and the first notice effect corresponding to the second operation means display may or may not be started. In this case, the second operation means display changes.

Also,
“One of the plurality of types of operation means display is a fourth operation means display [for example, a fourth operation means display Od4],
The fourth operation means display is a display different from the hold display,
The fourth operation means display is a display [e.g., FIG. 35 (33) to FIG. 36 (36)] that may be displayed during display of the decorative symbol variation display.
The fourth operation means display is a display that is not displayed during the display of the stop display of the decorative design,
The fourth operation means display is a display that is not displayed across a plurality of variations of the decorative symbol display,
When the operation means is operated in the state where the fourth operation means display is displayed [for example, FIG. 36 (37)], a second notice effect may be started.
The second notice effect is a notice effect related to a big hit by a variation display of the decorative symbol displayed at the time of start [for example, a family crest character shown in FIGS. 36 (38) to (40) 224E ', etc.
When the fourth operation means display is displayed simultaneously with the first operation means display [for example, the chance button 136 is operated at the timing of FIG. 40 (d) and the second operation means display Od2 is the first display. 40 (f) to FIG. 40 (g) after changing to the operation means display Od1 in FIG.
The fourth operation means display is a display that may be displayed simultaneously with the second operation means display [for example, the case shown in FIG. 40 (f) to FIG. 40 (g)],
When the fourth operation means display is displayed simultaneously with the third operation means display [For example, in FIG. 40 (f) to FIG. 40 (g), the second operation means display Od2 is the third operation means display. If the operation means display is Od3], there is a display.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the display timing of the fourth operation means display and the first operation means display may be different, and the fourth operation means display and the second operation means display are displayed. The start timing may be different, and the display timing of the fourth operation means display and the third operation means display may be different.

  The fourth operation means display may be displayed in parallel with the first operation means display, and the fourth operation means display is in parallel with the second operation means display. The fourth operation means display may be a display that may be displayed in parallel with the third operation means display.

  Note that when the operation means is operated in a state where the fourth operation means display is displayed, the second notice effect may be surely started.

Also,
“Even if the operation means is operated while the first operation means display is displayed, the first notice effect is not started [for example, an operation sound is output as shown in FIG. Will not start the announcement]
The first notice effect is a notice effect of a pre-read notice,
When the operation means is operated while the second operation means display is displayed [for example, FIG. 34 (12)], when the first notice effect is started [for example, FIG. 13), the display of the character “heat” in the wipe display Wd, the display of the effect image Ed, and the output of the sound effect may be started].
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the second operation means display itself may be a prefetch notice display (third notice effect).

  When the operation means is operated while the second operation means display is displayed, the first notice effect may be surely started.

Also,
The second operation means display is a display in which the first operation means display is changed,
There may be a case [for example, a case shown in FIG. 34 (2)] in which the first operation means display changes to the second operation means display during the display of the decorative symbol variation display.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  The first operation means display may be changed to the second operation means display during the display of the decorative symbol variation display.

Also,
“When the operation means is operated in a state where the second operation means display is displayed [for example, FIG. 34 (12)], the second operation means display may change [for example, As shown in FIG. 34 (13), there is a case where the display changes to the first operation means display Od1]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Note that when the operation means is operated in a state where the second operation means display is displayed, the second operation means display may be changed.

Also,
“The case where the second operation means display changes” described above is “the case where the second operation means display changes to the first operation means display”
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Note that the second operation means display may always change to the first operation means display.

Also,
“When the display mode of the second operation means display changes” described above, “the second operation means display has once disappeared [for example, FIGS. 47 (e) to (k) Then, when the first operation means display is displayed [for example, in the case of FIG. 47 (l) to FIG. 47 (m)].
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  The first operation means display may always be displayed after the second operation means display once disappears.

Also,
“The second operation means display is a display [for example, FIG. 34 (2) to FIG. 34 (11)] that may be displayed across a plurality of variations of the decorative symbol display,
The first operation means display is a display that may continue to be displayed even during the display of the decorative symbol stop display [for example, the case shown in FIG. 34 (15) to FIG. 17 (17)],
The second operation means display is a display in which there is a case [for example, a case shown in FIG. 34 (4) to FIG.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

The first operation means display may be a display that is always displayed even during the display of the stop display of the decorative symbol,
The second operation means display may be a display that is always displayed even during the display of the stop display of the decorative symbol.

Also,
“The first operation means display is a display [for example, the first operation means display Od1 shown in FIG. 46 (a)] that may be displayed even when the hold display is not displayed.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
“At least one of the plurality of types of operation means displays is a display imitating the operation means [for example, the first operation means display Od1 and the second operation means display Od2 shown in FIG. A fourth operation means display Od4 shown in FIG. 35 and a third operation means display Od3 shown in FIG. 39].
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  In addition, all the displays of the plurality of types of operation means display may include a display imitating the operation means, or only a part of the plurality of types of operation means displays. However, the display may include a display imitating the operation means.

Also,
“The display means displays the hold display [for example, the second hold icon h2 shown in FIG. 41 (k)] and the operation means display mode [for example, the white display mode and the chance button 136 that emits red light. It is a means that can be displayed in a display mode in which a mini item MI in which PUSH characters are added to the imitated display is added,
The operation means display mode is a display mode in which the second operation means display [for example, the second operation means display Od2 displayed on the third operation means display Od3 shown in FIG. 41 (l)] is enlarged or reduced. Is,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the operation unit display mode may be a display mode in which the second operation unit display is enlarged or reduced only during the operation effective period of the operation unit.

  Further, the operation means display mode is not limited to the second operation means display, but other operation means display (for example, the first operation means display, the third operation means display, the fourth operation means display). It may be a display mode in which (display) is enlarged or reduced. Alternatively, the operation unit display mode may be a display mode in which part or all of the operation unit display is enlarged or reduced. The operation means display mode may be different in color and pattern from the operation means display. Further, depending on the case, the operation means display mode may be the same size as the operation means display, or the shape may be different from the operation means display. As long as the display mode is related to the same operation means, it may be different from the display mode of the operation means display.

  In addition, the hold display of the operation means display mode may be displayed at a time different from the operation effective period of the operation means, and the operation operation effective period of the operation means is always displayed during the display. It may be.

  Further, when the operation unit is operated in a state where the hold display is displayed in the operation unit display mode, the hold display displayed in the operation unit display mode may change, It may change. For example, the display mode may change to a display mode (including a default display mode in which the expected level is 0) that represents the degree of expectation of jackpot.

In the above explanation,
“Display means [for example, any one of the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the fourth decorative symbol display device 208O, etc. One or more],
Operation means provided at a position where the player can operate [for example, any one or more of a chance button 136, a second chance button, a transparent portion 191, an operation key unit 181 and the like];
A game machine equipped with
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of operation means display,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a decorative symbol [for example, a decorative symbol (third symbol pd3), a fourth symbol pd4, or a fifth symbol pd5 shown in FIG. 5B),
The display means is a means capable of displaying a hold display [for example, hold icons h1 to h4, button hold icons MI, hd] according to the number of held balls,
One of the plurality of types of operation means displays is a first operation means display [for example, first operation means display Od1],
One of the plurality of types of operation means displays is a second operation means display [for example, second operation means display Od2],
The second operation means display is a display different from the first operation means display [for example, a display, shape, color, size, etc. having the same shape and different colors, sizes, patterns, etc. Display with the same pattern, etc., with different operation modes such as vibration, rotation, etc., and display with different shapes (from the display that simulates the operation means, the operation promotion display, the remaining period display, etc. A different type of display, a display with a different operating means, etc.]
The first operation means display is a display different from the hold display,
The second operation means display is a display different from the hold display,
The first operation means display is a display [for example, FIG. 34 (13) to FIG. 35 (29)] that may be displayed across a plurality of continuous variation display of the decorative symbol,
The second operation means display is a change of the first operation means display,
During the display of the variation display of the decorative design, the first operation means display may change to the second operation means display [for example, as shown in FIG. 34 (2)],
The first operation means display may be displayed in a certain period,
The certain period is a period in which the decorative symbol is stopped and the number of reserved balls is 0 [for example, a period from when the decorative symbol is stopped to a demonstration display, or a demonstration display Is the “currently displayed period”
When the operation means is operated in a state where the first operation means display is displayed during the certain period, a response display corresponding to the operation means being operated [for example, described in paragraph 0829 It is configured so that a certain animation display may be performed,
When the operation means is operated while the second operation means display is being displayed while the decorative symbol variation display is being displayed [for example, FIG. 34 (12)], when a notice effect is started [ For example, as shown in FIG. 34 (13), the display of the character “heat”, the display of the effect image Ed, the output of the sound effect, etc. in the wipe display Wd is started]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

Also,
“When the operation means is operated while the first operation means display is displayed [for example, FIG. 43 (b)], the first operation means display is configured not to change. [For example, the first operation means display Od1 does not change as shown in FIG. 43 (c)],
When the operation means is operated while the second operation means display is displayed [for example, FIG. 34 (12)], the second operation means display may change. [For example, as shown in FIG. 34 (13), there is a case where the first operation means display Od1 may be changed),
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
“When the second operation means display changes” described above means “when the second operation means display changes to the first operation means display [for example, FIG. 34 (13)]. ”
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
“When the second operation means display changes” described above, “after the second operation means display once disappears [for example, FIG. 47 (e) to FIG. 47 (k)] When the first operation means display is displayed [for example, in the case of FIG. 47 (l) to FIG. 47 (m)].
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
“The second operation means display is a display [for example, FIG. 34 (2) to FIG. 34 (11)] that may be displayed across a plurality of continuous variation display of the decorative symbol.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
“The notice effect is a look-ahead notice effect [for example,“ character of “heat” as display of look-ahead notice ”described in paragraph 0564”]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
“The notice effect is an effect of a notice [for example, a normal notice described in paragraph 0582] related to a change display of the decorative symbol being changed.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
'The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of notices,
One notice of the plurality of kinds of notices is a first notice,
One notice of the plurality of kinds of notices is a second notice,
The first notice is a look-ahead notice [for example, a character display of “next is” in the wipe display Wd shown in FIG. 45 (f1)]
The second notice is a notice related to the change display of the decorative symbol being changed [for example, a character display of “hot” in the wipe display Wd shown in FIG. 46 (j2)],
When an operation is performed on the operation means, the first notice may be executed [for example, FIG. 45 (e1)],
When the certain operation is performed on the operation means, the second notice may be executed [for example, FIG. 46 (i2)],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
“The certain operation is an operation in a state [for example, FIG. 45 (d), FIG. 46 (h2)] in which the second operation means display is displayed.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
“Variable display of decorative symbol to be notified (hereinafter referred to as“ preliminary variable display ”) [For example, in the example of FIG. 45, the decorative symbol prior to the variable display started in FIG. 45 (h1)] When the certain operation is performed [for example, FIG. 45 (e1)], the first notice may be displayed on the display means [for example, FIG. 45 (f1)]. ,
In the notice target change display [for example, the change display started in FIG. 46 (f2) in the case of FIG. 46], when the certain operation is performed [for example, FIG. 46 (i2)] The second notice may be displayed on the display means [for example, FIG. 46 (j2)],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
“The response display is an effect display [for example, an animation display described in paragraph 0829]].
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
“One of the plural types of operation means displays is a third operation means display [for example, third operation means display Od3],
The third operation means display is different from the first operation means display [for example, a display mode including a display imitating the chance button 136 that emits white light] [for example, the chance button 136 that emits red light is displayed. Display mode including simulated display],
The third operation means display is a display different from the hold display,
The third operation means display is a display that does not change even when the operation means is operated [for example, the third operation means display Od3 does not change as shown in FIG. 43 (f)],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
“When the operation means is operated while the third operation means display is displayed, a response action corresponding to the operation means being operated [for example, as shown in FIG. [Operation sound output such as “pico-pico”] may be performed,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
The third operation means display is a display in which the first operation means display is changed.
There is a case where the first operation means display changes to the third operation means display [for example, the case shown in FIG. 43 (d)] during the display of the decorative symbol variation display.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
The third operation means display is a display [for example, FIG. 43 (d) to FIG. 43 (m)] that may be displayed across a plurality of variations of the decorative symbol.
The third operation means display is a display in which there is a case [for example, a case shown in FIG. 43 (h) to FIG.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
“When the operation means is operated in the state where the third operation means display is displayed [for example, FIG. 43 (e)], an effect of pre-reading notice [for example,“ shown in FIG. 43 (f), “ Output of pre-notification effect sound such as “pico-pico” may be executed,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
“The second operation means display is a display of a display form different from the display form of the first operation means display in at least one of color and size [for example, FIG. 34 (2) to FIG. ) Second operation means display Od2 shown in FIG. 43, and second operation means display Od2 shown in FIG. 43 (n) to FIG.
The third operation means display is a display of a display form different from the display form of the first operation means display in at least one of color and size [for example, FIG. 43 (d) to FIG. The third operation means display Od3] shown in FIG.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
“One of the plurality of types of operation means display is a fourth operation means display [for example, a fourth operation means display Od4],
The fourth operation means display is a display different from the hold display,
The fourth operation means display is a display [e.g., FIG. 35 (33) to FIG. 36 (36)] that may be displayed during display of the decorative symbol variation display.
The fourth operation means display is a display that is not displayed during the display of the stop display of the decorative design,
The fourth operation means display is a display that is not displayed across a plurality of variations of the decorative symbol display,
When the operation means is operated in a state where the fourth operation means display is displayed [for example, FIG. 36 (37)], a normal notice effect may be started.
The effect of the normal notice is an effect related to a big hit by a variation display of the decorative symbol displayed at the start [for example, family crest character 224E ′ shown in FIGS. 36 (38) to (40). Is a regular notice effect accompanied by
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
“The fourth operation means display is a display that may be displayed simultaneously with the second operation means display [for example, the case shown in 40 (f) to FIG.
When the operation means is operated while the fourth operation means display and the second operation means display are simultaneously displayed, the second operation means display does not change [for example, FIG. ) As shown in the second operation means display Od2],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
“The second operation unit display includes a display [e.g., meter display Tm shown in FIG. 34 (10), FIG. 39 (j), FIG. 41 (l), etc.] indicating the operation effective period of the operation unit. A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
“At least one of the plurality of types of operation means displays is a display imitating the operation means [for example, the first operation means display Od1 and the second operation means display Od2 shown in FIG. A fourth operation means display Od4 shown in FIG. 35 and a third operation means display Od3 shown in FIG. 39].
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
The display means adds the hold display [for example, the second hold icon h2 shown in FIG. 41 (k)], and the operation means display [for example, a PUSH character is added to the display imitating the chance button 136 that emits red light. Display of the mini item MI displayed] in a manner including
The operation means display is an enlarged or reduced display of the second operation means display [for example, the second operation means display Od2 displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 41 (l)]. ,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
“The certain period is a period from when the decorative symbol is stopped to the start of demonstration display.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In the above explanation,
“Display means [for example, any one of the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the fourth decorative symbol display device 208O, etc. Two or more game machines,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a decorative symbol [for example, a decorative symbol (third symbol pd3), a fourth symbol pd4, or a fifth symbol pd5 shown in FIG. 5B),
The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a first display [e.g., first operation means display Od1 or "castle town" display]
One of the plural types of displays is a second display [for example, a fourth operation means display Od4 or “heat” display]
The first display is a display that may be displayed across a plurality of continuous decorative symbol variation displays [for example, the first operation means display of FIGS. 34 (13) to 35 (29). Od1 and “Castle Town” in FIGS. 34 (1) to (11)]
There are cases [for example, FIG. 35 (30) to FIG. 33 (33) and FIG. 34 (13)] in which the first display changes to the second display while the decorative design changes.
The first display may be displayed in a certain period, and
The certain period is a certain period of the period during which the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed [for example, the period of FIG. 34 (6) or the period of demonstration display].
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

Also,
[Operation means [for example, one or more of a chance button 136, a second chance button, a transparent portion 191, an operation key unit 181 and the like]
The first display is a display related to the operation means [e.g., first operation means display Od1, operation promotion display, remaining period display].
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
The second display is a display related to the operation means [for example, fourth operation means display Od4, operation promotion display, remaining period display, second operation means display Od2 shown in FIG. 37 or FIG. 39]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
'The display means is means capable of displaying a first response display,
The first response display is a display that may be displayed in response to the operation means being operated while the first display is displayed [for example, the effect image shown in FIG. 34 (13). Ed, display of an animation]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
'The display means is means capable of displaying a second response display,
The second response display is a display that may be displayed in response to the operation means being operated while the second display is displayed [for example, the wipe shown in FIG. 36 (38)] Display of the character “win” on the display Wd, display of the effect image Ed3m shown in FIG. 37 (m) and the effect image Ed4 shown in FIG. 39 (m), and “continuation” which is a pseudo-continuous pattern shown in FIG. 40 (i). And so on.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
“The display means is a means capable of displaying a hold display [for example, hold icons h1 to h4] according to the number of held balls,
The hold display is a display that may be displayed in the first display mode,
The hold display is a display that may be displayed in the second display mode,
The first display mode is a display mode related to the operation means [for example, a display mode of the button hold icon MI, hd]
The second display mode is a display mode different from the first display mode [for example, a display mode representing the rainbow mode or the face of the character of Tono-sama]
In the state where the hold display and the second display of the first display mode are displayed, the hold display changes to the second display mode and the second response display is displayed. Can be executed by a common operation on the operation means [for example, FIG. 46 (j2)],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
“The second response display is a display [for example, a character display of“ hot ”shown in FIG. 46 (j2)] for notifying a big hit in the currently displayed decorative symbol variation display.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
The second response display is a pre-read notice display [for example, “next” character display shown in FIG. 47 (e)].
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
“The second response display is a display different from the first display [for example, the first operation means display Od1], which is displayed over a plurality of continuous decorative pattern variation displays [ For example, the display of “Castle Town”] is a display that changes.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
'The second display is a pre-read notice display.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
The second display is a display larger than the first display [for example, the fourth operation means display Od4 shown in FIG. 35 (33)].
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
“The first display [for example, the first operation means display Od1 shown in FIG. 38 (a)] is a display that may be moved.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
“When the first display [for example, the first operation means display Od1 shown in FIG. 38 (a)] changes to the second display after performing the moving display [for example, FIG. 38 (h) In the case of
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Furthermore, various limitations described below are recognized.

  The fourth operation means display may be a display displayed closer to the hold display (hold icon) than the first operation means display, or the hold may be displayed more than the second operation means display. It may be a display displayed near the display (hold icon), or may be a display displayed near the hold display (hold icon) rather than the third operation means display.

  The display means is display means capable of displaying the hold display as a variation icon corresponding to the variation display of the decoration symbol after the variation display of the decoration symbol is started, and the fourth operation unit display includes: The display may be displayed closer to the variation icon than the first operation means display, or may be display closer to the variation icon than the second operation means display. However, the display may be displayed closer to the variation icon than the third operation means display.

  The first operation means display may be a display closer to the specific display than the fourth operation means display, and the second operation means display may be the fourth operation means display. May be a display that is displayed closer to the specific display, and the third operation means display may be a display that is displayed closer to the specific display than the fourth operation means display. . As an example of the specific display here, the display of the presentation mode, the display of the stage name, the display of the pre-reading notice (display of the first notice notice effect), the display of the notice of the change (display of the second notice notice effect) ), Display of special effects such as super reach, display of operation means (the above-mentioned operation promotion display, operation invalidation display (for example, display during preparation), etc.), control state display (for example, display during probability change), effect, etc. Display and the like can be enumerated. That is, as the specific display, all of the above-described enumerations may be used. On the other hand, some of those listed above may not be applied.

  The first operation means display and the second operation means display may be displayed at the same display position, or may be displayed at different display positions. The first operation means display and the third operation means display may be displayed at the same display position, or may be displayed at different display positions. The second operation means display and the third operation means display may be displayed at the same display position, or may be displayed at different display positions.

  The hold display may be displayed in an operation means display mode related to the operation means, and the first operation means display is displayed simultaneously over the entire display period or a part of the hold display of the operation means display mode. The second operation means display may be displayed simultaneously with the hold display of the operation means display mode for the entire period or a part of the period. The third operation unit display may be displayed simultaneously with the hold display of the operation unit display mode for the entire period or a part of the period.

  The variation icon may be displayed in an operation unit display mode related to the operation unit, and the fourth operation unit display is displayed simultaneously with the variation icon of the operation unit display mode over a whole period or a part of the period. It may be done.

  The display in the operation means display mode referred to here means that the hold display itself is displayed in a display mode imitating the operation means, or an icon (for example, a display form imitating the operation means in the hold display) , A display as a mini item) may be added and displayed, the hold display itself may be displayed in the operation promotion display, or the operation promotion display (for example, as a mini item) may be displayed on the hold display. Display) may be displayed, the hold display itself may be displayed in the remaining period display, or the remaining period display (for example, display as a mini item) may be displayed in the hold display. It may be added and displayed, or may be a combination of two or all of the display imitating the operation means, the operation promotion display, and the remaining period display.

  The first operation means display, the second operation means display, the third operation means display, the fourth operation means display, and the hold display or the display of the fluctuation icon are displayed as imitations of the operation means. When displayed, the remaining period display may be displayed at intervals from each display (display imitating the operation means) (for example, displayed at intervals below), or each display (the operation means). And the remaining period display may be displayed together.

  While the decoration symbol stop display is being displayed, the first operation means display, the second operation means display, and the third operation means display may be displayed. During the display, there may be a case where a notification that allows setting change or a specific effect is executed. Further, when the decorative design is stopped and the number of reserved balls is 0, operating the operating means may cause some animation display, some sound output, or some light emission. The animation display, sound output, and light emission are performed during the display of the decorative symbol stop display. More specifically, the display may be performed during the display of the so-called demonstration display. It may be performed after the decoration symbol is stopped and displayed until the demonstration display is started.

  The operation means may be capable of changing the aspect. As an example of the change in the mode, a change in the color, a change in the light emission mode, a change in the movement of the operation surface (for example, a change in the protrusion amount), a rotation of a frame surrounding the operation surface, and the like can be listed. That is, the above-described changes in the mode of the operation means may be all of those listed above. On the other hand, some of those listed above may not be applied. The operation means may be a button type or a lever type. If it is a button type, the operation surface may be movable in the vertical direction or the front-back direction. Moreover, as long as it is a lever type, it may be able to be tilted in one or a plurality of directions.

  When the first operation means display changes to the fourth operation means display, the first operation means display displayed on the second display means is displayed on the first display means. The movement may be started and displayed as the fourth operation means display on the first display means. The movement here may be started during the display of the decorative symbol variation display.

  When the first operation means display changes to the second operation means display, the first operation means display displayed on the second display means is displayed on the first display means. May be displayed as the second operation means display on the first display means, or the first operation means display displayed on the first display means may be The movement toward the second display unit may be started and displayed as the second operation unit display on the second display unit.

  Further, when the first operation means display changes to the third operation means display, the first operation means display displayed on the second display means is changed to the first display. The movement toward the means may be started and displayed as the third operation means display on the first display means, or the first operation means display displayed on the first display means may be displayed. The movement toward the second display means may be started and displayed as the third operation means display on the second display means.

  When the notice target (for example, a certain symbol variation display) is the same, or when the corresponding notice effect mode is the same, the first operation means display and the second operation means display are simultaneously performed. The first operation means display and the third operation means display are not displayed at the same time, and the second operation means display and the third operation means display are also displayed at the same time. You may not make it. On the other hand, when the notice target (for example, a certain symbol variation display) is different, or when the corresponding notice effect mode is different, the first operation means display and the second operation means display are In some cases, it may be displayed simultaneously over the entire period or a part of the period, or the first operation means display and the third operation means display may be displayed over the entire period or a part of the period, The second operation means display and the third operation means display may be displayed simultaneously over the entire period or a part of the period.

  In addition, the first operation means display and the fourth operation means display may be displayed simultaneously over the whole period or a part of the period, and the second operation means display and the fourth operation means display are also included. In some cases, the third operation unit display and the fourth operation unit display may be displayed simultaneously over the entire period or a part of the period.

  In the following, including what has been described so far.

(Appendix 1)
Display means;
Operation means provided at a position where the player can operate;
A game machine equipped with
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of operation means display,
The display means is means capable of displaying a decorative design,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a hold display according to the number of held balls,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of notice effects,
One display of the plurality of types of operation means display is a first operation unit display,
One display of the plurality of types of operation means display is a second operation unit display,
The second operation unit display is a display different from the first operation unit display,
The first operation unit display and the second operation unit display are different from the hold display,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a display for changing the first operation means display to the second operation means display (hereinafter referred to as “first change display”),
The first operation means display is a display that may be displayed while the decoration symbol variation is stopped (hereinafter referred to as “first state”),
The first operation means display is a display that may be displayed while the decorative design is changing (hereinafter referred to as “second state”),
The second operation means display is a display that may be displayed in the first state,
The second operation means display is a display that may be displayed in the second state,
The first change display is a display that may be displayed in the second state,
The first operation means display is a display indicating that the operation of the operation means is invalid,
The second operation means display is a display indicating that the operation of the operation means is effective.
A game stand characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine described in appendix 1, there is a case where it is possible to make it seem that the fluctuation has not stopped yet by performing the effect by displaying the display means even while the fluctuation is stopped.

(Appendix 2)
The game machine according to appendix 1,
The first operation means display is a display in which the display may not be ended even if it is shifted from one of the first state and the second state to the other,
The second operation means display is a display in which the display may not be ended even when shifting from one of the first state and the second state to the other.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 3)
A game machine according to appendix 1 or appendix 2,
The first operation means display is a display that may be displayed even in a state where the hold display is not performed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 4)
A gaming machine according to any one of Appendix 1 to Appendix 3,
An effect can be displayed by operating the operation means of the player.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 5)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendix 1 to appendix 4,
One notice effect of the plurality of kinds of notice effects is a first notice effect,
The display means is means capable of starting display of the first notice effect by an operation of the operation means of a player.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 6)
A gaming machine according to any one of Appendix 1 to Appendix 5,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a prefetch notice effect,
One display of the plurality of types of operation means display is a third operation means display,
The third operation means display is a display different from the hold display,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a display for changing the first operation means display to the third operation means display (hereinafter referred to as “second change display”),
The third operation means display is a display that may be displayed as the prefetch notice,
The third operating means display is a display that may not end the display even when the state is shifted from one of the first state and the second state.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 7)
A game machine as set forth in appendix 6,
The third operation means display is a display indicating that the operation of the operation means is invalid,
The third operation means display is a display different from the first operation means display.
A game stand characterized by that.

  The third operation means display is a display in which the operation means is invalid as in the case of the first operation means display. However, the third operation means display may have the same mode as the second operation means display. Further, the third operation means display may be different from the second operation means display.

(Appendix 8)
A gaming machine according to appendix 6 or appendix 7,
The first operation means display is a display that may not be displayed in parallel with the second operation means display,
The first operation means display is a display that may not be displayed in parallel with the third operation means display,
The second operation means display is a display that may not be displayed in parallel with the third operation means display.
A game stand characterized by that.

  In one display means, two operation means displays (first, second and third) may not be displayed at the same time. Further, the operation means display related to the operation of another operation means may be displayed at the same time.

  Further, if the operation means is operated while the second operation means display is displayed, the second operation means display may return to the first operation means display or until just before the fluctuation stop. It may disappear completely.

(Appendix 9)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendix 6 to appendix 8,
One operation means display of the plurality of types of operation means display is a fourth operation means display,
The fourth operation means display is a display indicating that the operation of the operation means is valid,
If the player operates the operation means while the fourth operation means display is displayed, the first notice display may be displayed.
The fourth operation means display is a display that can be displayed in the second state,
The fourth operation means display is a display that may be displayed in parallel with the first operation means display,
The fourth operation means display is a display that may be displayed in parallel with the second operation means display,
The fourth operation means display is a display that may be displayed in parallel with the third operation means display.
A game stand characterized by that.

  Note that the operation means display may be displayed at the same time as normal button effects other than the operation means display (including judgment effects, pseudo-linking, button hold, and conversation notice button display).

  Further, the effect performed by the operation during display of the fourth operation means may be the first notice effect.

(Appendix 10)
A gaming machine according to appendix 9, wherein
In the case where the fourth operation means display and the second operation means display are displayed in parallel, when the player operates the operation means once, only the first notice effect is provided. Is displayed,
A game stand characterized by that.

  The first notice effect may be a display related to an operation performed during the display of the fourth operation means.

  Further, the effect (notice) displayed by operating the operation means when the second operation means display is displayed may be the second notice effect.

(Appendix 11)
A gaming machine according to any one of Appendix 1 to Appendix 10,
The operation means display may be displayed on the sub liquid crystal display means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix R0-1)
Display means;
Operation means provided at a position where the player can operate;
A game machine equipped with
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of operation means display,
The display means is means capable of displaying a decorative design,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a hold display according to the number of held balls,
One of the plurality of types of operation means display is a first operation means display,
One display of the plurality of types of operation means display is a second operation means display,
The second operation means display is a display different from the first operation means display,
The first operation means display is a display different from the hold display,
The second operation means display is a display different from the hold display,
The first operation means display is a display that may be displayed across a plurality of continuous variation display of the decorative symbol,
The second operation means display is a display in which the first operation means display has changed,
During the display of the decorative symbol variation display, the first operation means display may change to the second operation means display,
The first operation means display may be displayed in a certain period,
The certain period is a period in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, and the number of reserved balls is zero.
When the operation means is operated while the first operation means display is displayed during the certain period, a response display may be performed in response to the operation means being operated. Has been
A notice effect other than reach may be started when the operation means is operated in a state where the second operation means display is being displayed while the decorative symbol variation display is being displayed. A game stand.

(Appendix R0-2)
A gaming machine according to appendix R0-1,
When the operation means is operated in a state where the first operation means display is displayed, the first operation means display is configured not to change,
When the operation means is operated in a state where the second operation means display is displayed, the second operation means display may be changed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix R0-3)
A game machine according to appendix R0-2,
“When the second operation means display changes” described in the supplementary note R0-2 is “when the second operation means display changes to the first operation means display”.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix R0-4)
A game machine according to appendix R0-2,
“When the second operation means display is changed” described in Appendix R0-2 is “when the first operation means display is displayed after the second operation means display once disappears” Is,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix R0-5)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices R0-1 to R0-4,
The second operation means display is a display that may be displayed across a plurality of continuous display variations of the decorative symbol.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix R0-6)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices R0-1 to R0-5,
The response display is an effect display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix R0-7)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices R0-1 to R0-6,
One display of the plurality of types of operation means display is a third operation means display,
The third operation means display is a display different from the first operation means display,
The third operation means display is a display different from the hold display,
The third operation means display is a display that does not change even when the operation means is operated.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix R0-8)
A gaming machine according to appendix R0-7,
When the operation means is operated in a state where the third operation means display is displayed, a response action may be performed in response to the operation means being operated.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix R0-9)
A game machine according to appendix R0-7 or R0-8,
The third operation means display is a display in which the first operation means display has changed,
The first operation means display may be changed to the third operation means display during the display of the decorative symbol variation display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix R0-10)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices R0-7 to R0-9,
The third operation means display is a display that may be displayed across a plurality of variations of the decorative symbol display,
The third operation means display is a display that may continue to be displayed even during the display of the stop display of the decorative symbol.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix R0-11)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices R0-7 to R0-10,
The second operation means display is a display of a display form that is different from the display form of the first operation means display in at least one of color or size,
The third operation means display is a display in a display form in which at least one of color or size is different from the display form of the first operation means display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix R0-12)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices R0-1 to R0-11,
One display of the plurality of types of operation means display is a fourth operation means display,
The fourth operation means display is a display different from the hold display,
The fourth operation means display is a display that may be displayed during the display of the variation display of the decorative design,
The fourth operation means display is a display that is not displayed during the display of the stop display of the decorative design,
The fourth operation means display is a display that is not displayed across a plurality of variations of the decorative symbol display,
When the operation means is operated in a state where the fourth operation means display is being displayed, a normal notice effect may be started.
The effect of the normal notice is an effect related to a big hit with a variation display of the decorative symbol displayed when it is started.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix R0-13)
A gaming machine according to appendix R0-12,
The fourth operation means display is a display that may be displayed simultaneously with the second operation means display,
When the operation means is operated while the fourth operation means display and the second operation means display are displayed at the same time, the second operation means display does not change.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix R0-14)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices R0-1 to R0-13,
The second operation means display is a display including a display indicating an operation effective period of the operation means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix R0-15)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices R0-1 to R0-14,
At least one display of the plurality of types of operation means displays is a display including a display imitating the operation means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix R0-16)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices R0-1 to R0-15,
The display means is means capable of displaying the hold display in a mode including operation means display,
The operation means display is an enlarged or reduced display of the second operation means display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix R0-17)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices R0-1 to R0-16,
The certain period is a period from when the decorative design is stopped and displayed until the demonstration display is started.
A game stand characterized by that.

  Note that the operation means display may be displayed only during normal games.

  Further, the operation means display may not be displayed during a specific effect (for example, during super reach).

  Further, the second operation means display may be a color change with respect to the first operation means display, or may be an enlarged display of the first operation means display.

  In addition, the third operation means display may be a color change with respect to the first operation means display, or may be an enlarged display of the first operation means display.

  It should be noted that the above description of the decorative pattern change display may be a change display of the design (more specifically, a special figure), and the display of the decorative design stop display may be a symbol (more Specifically, it may be a special display) stop display.

  In addition, in the above description, “may be” may be replaced with “always to be”, “always to be”, “always become”, or the like. It may be replaced with “always XX”.

  In addition, even if the configuration requirements are included only in the description of the embodiment, examples, modifications, various examples, supplementary notes, etc. described above, the configuration requirements are not limited to other embodiments, examples, You may apply to a modification, various examples, an appendix, etc.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 100 Pachinko machine 136 Chance button 181 Operation key unit 191 Transmission part 208 Decoration design display device 208L 1st decoration design display device 208M 2nd decoration design display device 208N 3rd decoration design display device 208O 4th decoration design display device 300 Main control part 400 1st sub-control unit 500 2nd sub-control unit 600 Dispensing control unit 1000 Slot machine pd3 3rd symbol pd4 4th symbol pd5 5th symbol h1-h4 Hold icon c Fluctuation icon Wd Wipe display Od1 First operation means display Od2 Second operation means display Od3 Third operation means display Od4 Fourth operation means display

Claims (13)

A gaming machine equipped with a display means,
The display means is means capable of displaying a decorative design,
The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a first display,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a second display,
The first display is a display that may be displayed across a variation display of a plurality of consecutive decorative symbols,
The first display may change to the second display during the decoration pattern change.
The first display may be displayed in a certain period, and
The certain period is a certain period of the period during which the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed.
A game stand characterized by that. The game stand according to claim 1,
With operating means,
The first display is a display related to the operation means.
A game stand characterized by that. The game stand according to claim 2,
The second display is a display related to the operation means.
A game stand characterized by that. The game stand according to claim 2 or 3,
The display means is means capable of displaying a first response display,
The first response display is a display that may be displayed in response to the operation means being operated in a state where the first display is displayed.
A game stand characterized by that. It is a game stand as described in any one of Claims 2 thru | or 4,
The display means is means capable of displaying a second response display,
The second response display is a display that may be displayed in response to the operation means being operated in a state where the second display is displayed.
A game stand characterized by that. The game table according to claim 5,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a hold display according to the number of held balls,
The hold display is a display that may be displayed in the first display mode,
The hold display is a display that may be displayed in the second display mode,
The first display mode is a display mode related to the operation means,
The second display mode is a display mode different from the first display mode,
In the state where the hold display and the second display of the first display mode are displayed, the hold display changes to the second display mode and the second response display is displayed. Can be executed by a common operation on the operation means,
A game stand characterized by that. The game stand according to claim 5 or 6,
The second response display is a display for notifying the jackpot in the currently displayed decorative symbol variation display,
A game stand characterized by that. The game stand according to claim 5 or 6,
The second response display is a display of a prefetch notice.
A game stand characterized by that. The game stand according to claim 5 or 6,
The second response display is a display for changing a display different from the first display, which is displayed across a variation display of a plurality of consecutive decorative symbols,
A game stand characterized by that. It is a game stand as described in any one of Claims 1 thru | or 9, Comprising:
The second display is a pre-read notice display.
A game stand characterized by that. It is a game stand as described in any one of Claims 1 thru | or 10,
The second display is a display larger than the first display.
A game stand characterized by that. It is a game stand as described in any one of Claims 1 thru | or 11,
The first display is a display that may perform a moving display.
A game stand characterized by that. A game table according to claim 12,
The first display is a display that may change to the second display after performing the moving display.
A game stand characterized by that.